Anda di halaman 1dari 461

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

Modeling
Browse Categories
Datum/Point Curve Curve from Curves Curve from Bodies Edit Curves Design Feature Edit Features Associative Copy Combine bodies Trim bodies Align Offset / Scale Detail Feature Surface Mesh Surface Sweep Flange Surface Edit Surface Synchronous Modeling Edit Facet Bodies Appendices

View a topic
What are you looking for in Modeling? Part modeling overview Features created by sweeping Feature modeling Expressions Part Navigator Update Browser Modeling Preferences Path Selection Copy, Copy Feature, and Paste Using Double-Click to Edit Objects Object specific pop-up menus On-screen input boxes in Modeling Input Points from a File Primitives Move Object Part Families Boolean operations Feature Group Group DesignLogic Modeling video examples

A.What are you looking for in Modeling?


How do I? Create a datum coordinate system Create a sketch Extrude a solid body Revolve and unite a section drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


Create a conic edge blend Create surfaces Create expressions Edit features Create an assembly Create product and manufacturing information (PMI) Create a drawing Validate the design Manage files with Teamcenter Don't see what you are looking for?

Concepts Part modeling overview Feature modeling overview Synchronous modeling

Click Help.

above to search

Click above to browse Help. Find Siemens training

B. Part modeling overview


The modeling process you follow to design a part is the same whether you design stand-alone parts or design parts within an assembly. The decisions you make at each step depend on your design goals.

These are some of the main steps in the process of designing parts in NX. Start with a new file. 1. Create an empty file for your part model. 2. Add the empty file to the assembly as a new component to design the part within an assembly context. Design parts within an assembly to create proper fit and alignment to other parts, and to avoid unintentional interferences. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

Select the History mode. Define the History mode at the top of the Part Navigator

Use history mode to model parts when parameter changes are expected. This is the traditional mode for highly engineered parts. Use History-free mode when you do not know what types of changes to expect, for example for a conceptual design. This mode is often used with Synchronous Modeling commands.

Define your modeling strategy.

Decide if your final part will be a solid body or a sheet body. This will impact your modeling strategy of which features to build first

Solid bodies are preferred for most models because they provide an unambiguous definition of the volume and mass. Sheet bodies are sometimes used for manufacturing or simulation. They may also be used as trimming tools for solid body models

Create datums. Create datum coordinate systems and datum planes to position modeling features. These datums form the beginning of a chain of associativity for the features you add next.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Create features. Create features according to your modeling strategy.

1. Start with design features such as extrude, revolve, or sweep to define basic shapes. These features typically use sketches to define sections. 2. Continue adding other features to design the model. 3. Finish with detailed features such as edge blends, chamfers, and draft to add the final details.

C.Features created by sweeping


Features created by sweeping are characterized by moving geometry through space. The geometry being swept is referred to as section geometry. Swept features can be classified into two types:

Vector driven (extruded, revolved)

Guide/spine/path driven

You can sweep either a single section or a set of section geometry.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

You can also create swept features with offsets.

You can create a solid body or sheet body from the section geometry, based on the body type setting at creation.

Solid

Sheet

The commands that create features by sweeping include:


Extrude Revolve Styled Sweep Swept

Sweep along Guide Variational Sweep Tube

Associativity Features created by sweeping are fully associated with the section or guide geometry.

If you delete associated parent curves, such as a sketch that has been extruded into a solid body, you are notified that other features are affected and the solid body is also deleted. If you select a solid face or datum plane to trim or limit a swept feature, the resulting feature is associated to the face or datum plane. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

For example, if you select a face to limit the end of an extrude feature, the extrude feature will update when you change the shape or location of the face.

If you select a line, edge, or datum axis to define the direction of extruded feature or the axis of a revolved feature, the resulting feature is associated with the selected reference.

Closed swept features If the guides form a closed loop, the first section can be selected again as the last section to create a closed body.

1. 2. 3. 4.

First section Second section Last section Closed guide

1. Section geometry
You can use the Type Filter to control what type of geometry can be selected for the section:

Curves Curve features Sketches

Edges Faces Section Segments

You can use the Curve Rule to quickly define the section with fewer number of selections:

Single Curve Connected Curves Tangent Curves Face Edges

Sheet Edges Feature Curves Region Boundary Curves Infer Curves

After you select the objects for the section, the ends are highlighted by an asterisk if the section is not completely closed.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

2. Section geometry and intersections


When defining sections for sweeping, you can select contiguous or non-contiguous geometry.

If you select a set of non-contiguous geometry that extends beyond intersection points, you will get an self-intersection error message.

Stop at Intersection used in conjunction with the Curve Rule setting lets you signal which portions of the section curves to use.

Non-contiguous curves that do not extend to the intersection point can only be used if the gaps are within the distance tolerances specified for the feature. The Extrude and Revolve commands will produce multiple sheet bodies if the gaps are greater than the distance tolerance. How section curve connections are interpolated depends on where section geometry is selected. If there is any ambiguity in the selected curves, asterisks alert you to selection decision areas. Your subsequent selections determine the section. Example 1

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Example 2

3. Swept feature error scenarios

Avoid creating a situation where vertices or edges of section geometry create a body of zero thickness.

You will be alerted to possible error situations by display of an asterisk where problem occurs.

If you continue, the operation will be completed, ignoring problem areas and you will get an error message alerting you of a self intersecting section.

When using swept features for boolean operations such as a Subtract or Unite, be sure the feature actually comes in contact with the model.

Cylindrical extrusion and revolve share mass; Unite operation successful.

Cylindrical extrusion and revolve share mass; Subtract operation successful.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

Cylindrical extrusion and revolve do not share mass; any Boolean operation will be unsuccessful. 'Tool Solid Completely Outside Target Solid' error message is issued.

Specifying closed and opened curves together as one section, or curves intersecting each other, will yield error messages: o 'Gaps in strings or multiple loops'. o 'Selected objects will result in a self intersecting section'. If the selected objects are not contiguous and the gaps are not within the distance tolerance, you may receive a 'The section contains multiple loops' message. Avoid situations where a swept feature would intersect itself if created. This usually happens with revolve features whose swept axis is within the boundaries of the section geometry. You will get an 'Unable to Trim' message if a potential swept feature cannot be intersected with the start or end limiting geometry.

D.Feature modeling
Feature modeling is the process of adding features to your model to create the design. Features that you add are listed in the Part Navigator. You typically start a design with datum features, such as datum coordinate systems and datum planes. These can be used to position other features, such as sketches. Working in History mode, the software maintains associativity between features as you create them. For example, when you create a sketch and revolve it, the software maintains associativity from the sketch to the revolve feature. To see the parent and child relationships of a feature, select the feature in the Part Navigator.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

10

In this example, feature (2), a revolve feature, is selected in the Part Navigator. The magenta color indicates that feature (0), a datum coordinate system, and feature (1), a sketch, are both parent features of the revolve feature. Feature (3), an edge blend, is highlighted in blue to indicate that it is a child of the revolve feature. If you edit the sketch, the revolve feature updates because it is a child of the sketch. When the revolve feature updates, the edge blend also updates, and so on.

1. Feature Modeling
The term "Feature " is used generally in NX to describe a class of objects that have defining parents. A feature's parents enable it to recall the inputs and the operation that were used in its creation. Features include all solids, bodies, primitives and certain wireframe objects. Features can be described by the following characteristics:

The inputs of a feature are its "parents" and the resulting feature object is the "child," which is Associative or "associated with" its parents. Parents can be geometric objects or numerical variables (known as Expressions). In the case of numerical variables, the numbers are known as "parameters" of the child object, and the child is said to be "parametric." If any object is modified, its associated children are updated (regenerated) to reflect the change. The combination of parents and the creation operation is sometimes known as the "history" of an object. The parent-child analogy can be extended further within NX, and it is reasonable to speak of ancestors, descendents, siblings, orphans, reparenting and so on.

Other Common Terms Used in Feature Modeling Listed below are the most common terms used in Feature Modeling. Body A class of objects containing solids and sheets. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Solid Body A collection of faces and edges that enclose a volume. Sheet Body A collection of one or more faces that do not enclose a volume. Face A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges.

11

Creating Solid Bodies You can create solid bodies by:

Sweeping sketch and non-sketch geometry to create associative features (see Swept Features). Sweeping sketch and non-sketch geometry lets you create a solid body with complex geometry. This method also gives you total control over the editing of that body. Editing is done by changing the swept creation parameters or by changing the sketch. Editing the sketch causes the swept feature to update to match the sketch.

Creating primitives for the basic building blocks, then adding more specific features, such as holes and slots to provide further detail. Creating a solid body using primitives results in a simple geometry solid body. Making changes to primitives is more difficult, because primitives cannot always be parametrically edited. You can use primitives when you do not need to be concerned with editing the model. Generally, however, it is to your advantage to create the model from a sketch.

Modeling space

All bodies must be within a 1000 x 1000 x 1000 meter cube, centered about the origin of the absolute coordinate system. o Tolerances can have an impact on how bodies get created in modeling space. Example If the spline is being used as a guide curve and is long and nearly straight and the default distance tolerance (0.01") is used, the spline is approximated using a large arc whose radius could be outside the maximum part size limit of 1000 x 1000 x 1000 meters. You can avoid this problem by increasing the distance tolerance.

The smallest linear value that can be applied to a body is 0.00001 millimeters or 0.00000039 inches. o Any linear value less than or equal to 0.00001 millimeters is considered to be zero for operations on bodies. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Feature Parameter Customer Defaults

12

Use File Utilities Customer Defaults to specify defaults for Modeling feature parameters and dialogs. For further information, see the Customer Defaults Help. Basic Terminology Feature Refers to all solids, bodies, and primitives. Body A collection of faces and edges. This includes both solid bodies and sheet bodies. Solid body A collection of faces and edges that "close up" to enclose a volume. Sheet A body with zero thickness, made up of a collection of faces and edges that do not "close up" to enclose a volume. Face A region on the outside of a body, separated from other faces by strings of edges. Section Curves that you sweep to create a body. curves Guide Curves used to help define the path for the sweep operation. curves Common Concepts The following options and topics appear throughout Feature Modeling options. Object Selection Defining Points Defining Vectors Throughout all Feature options you are required to select objects.

All points, including origin points, limit points, start points, and endpoints are defined using the Point Constructor. All direction, reference, and destination vectors are defined using the Vector Constructor. Features created using the Thru option of Face Association define vectors in I, J, K components mapped to the Absolute Coordinate System. You can enter I, J, K components as real values or expressions. Target Solid The solid body on which you create new features. If there is only one solid body displayed, the system selects the target solid for you. Otherwise, you must select the body you want to identify as the target. Boolean When you create primitives and swept features, you must choose to either create a new Operations target solid or perform a Boolean operation with respect to an existing target solid. Undo Allows you to back up, one step at a time, to an existing previous state. Undo appears on the main menu bar under Edit, and on the MB3 popup menu. Object Selection In some options, such as Extrude or Revolve, where several objects are to be swept, associativity to sketches or nonsketch curves is created with the swept objects or with the path in which they are swept. This means that when you edit the curves, the solid body is updated automatically. Boolean Operations When you create primitives and swept features, you can choose to perform a Boolean operation with respect to an existing target solid. Unite Lets you join the new feature with a target solid. The new solid body will contain the combined volume of the target solid and the new feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

13

Subtract Lets you remove the new feature from a target solid. Intersect Lets you create a solid body from material that is common to both the new feature and the target solid. Here are a few things to keep in mind with Boolean operations:

When you attempt to add a swept feature to a solid body, ensure that the feature you defined comes in contact with the target solid. When you attempt to subtract or intersect a swept feature to a solid body, ensure that the feature you defined intersects the target solid. If the new feature does not come in contact with the current target solid and can be a standalone solid body, choose to Create a new target solid. If you perform a Boolean operation between a view dependent solid body and a model solid, the target solid controls the resultant body. If you perform an undo, both bodies are restored

Color and Shading Variances It is possible that while performing operations on solid bodies, some faces may acquire colors different from that of the parent solid. If this occurs, affected faces of the solid body may have different colors in a high quality shaded image. You can easily correct this by performing an Edit Object Display Type Face Select All, and then setting all faces to a single color. The shaded image then displays correctly. Invalid solid bodies may not shade. If shading of a solid body fails, use Analysis Examine Geometry to see if the body is valid. Rows and Columns Many of the sheet creation options use the concept of rows. A row defines the U direction of the sheet body. For example, if you are creating the sheet by specifying a collection of points or poles, a row is simply a collection of points running in roughly the same general direction. Similarly, if you are creating the sheet through a collection of curves, each curve you select defines a row. A column is defined by the set of points of a curve running roughly perpendicular to the rows. This defines the V direction. See the figure below.

Bodies are pictorially represented by a U-V grid. The grid consists of lines that create a net conforming to the curvatures of the body. The grid is only a display feature that provides a visual representation of the body. The density of the U-V grid has no relationship to the mathematical accuracy of the body. The density of the grid is user-defined and may be modified to best represent the body. To properly display a complex body requires many grid lines, while a flat body requires very few.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

14

You can change the grid display for all subsequently created bodies using the Grid Lines options on the Modeling Preferences dialog. Degrees Degree is a mathematical concept - it actually refers to the degree of the polynomial that is used to describe a surface. NX uses similar concepts to define sheet bodies. Each sheet body has a degree in the U direction and a degree in the V direction. The degree of a sheet (in either direction) must be between 1 and 24. However, we recommend that you use cubics (a degree of 3) when creating sheets. Creating lower degree sheet bodies results in faster performance during subsequent operations such as machining and display. Using higher degree sheet bodies reduces the chance of transferring data to other systems which may not support them. Also, the creation of a high degree sheet through many points may lead to unpredictable results. A higher degree sheet is "stiffer" in the sense that you have to move a pole a long way to produce any appreciable change in the shape of the body. Lower degree sheet bodies are more pliable, and tend to follow their poles much more closely. Poles roughly correlate to the degrees of freedom of the sheet. To increase the degrees of freedom for a sheet, you can:

Increase the number of points per patch (that is, the degree) Increase the number of patches for the sheet body

Patches A patch is a portion of a sheet. Using more patches to create a sheet gives you more localized control over the curvature of the sheet. When creating sheets, it is best to minimize the number of patches used to define the sheet. Limiting the number of patches improves the performance of downstream applications and produces a smoother sheet. Smart Bodies Smart bodies are bodies that "remember" their creation data (strings, tolerances and parameters). Any change to the geometry or expressions used to create a smart body cause the body to regenerate. Any solid features created from smart bodies are updated as well. Thus you can create multiple levels of associativity. For example, you can use sketch geometry to create a free form body, then use that resulting body to create a feature. You can then edit the feature by editing the original strings (that is, the sketch geometry). Information Options You can check the validity of a free form feature with the Analysis Examine Geometry options. Use Analysis Minimum Radius to find the smallest radius of curvature (including tiny hooks or reversals in the surface) in a face or collection of faces. You can use Information Feature and Information Object to display information about a free form feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Sheet vs. Solid Creation

15

When using the Swept, Through Curve Mesh, Through Curves, Ruled and Section free form feature creation options, the type of body (solid or sheet) created depends on the Body Type modeling preference. For example, if the Body Type is set to Solid Body, and the selected section strings form closed loops, and the first and last section string are planar, a solid body is created. When you create a free form feature, the type of body created is displayed in the Status line. Note If the Body Type is set to Solid Body, but one or all of the selected section strings do not form a closed loop, or one of the end section strings is not planar, a sheet body is created. Boolean Operation If another body already exists (whether a sheet body or a solid body) and you create a free form feature, you must specify the Boolean Operation used to combine the two bodies - Create, Unite, Subtract or Intersect. There are two restrictions when it comes to Boolean operations:

You cannot split a target body into two pieces by subtracting another body. You cannot create a nonmanifold solid body by, for example, attempting to Unite two sheet bodies.

a. Horizontal Reference, Parameter Values, Positioning Features, Associativity Rules Horizontal Reference Some features require a horizontal reference, which defines the XC direction of the feature coordinate system. You can select an edge, face, datum axis, or datum plane as the horizontal reference. The horizontal reference defines the length direction of those features that require a length, including Slot, Pocket, and Pad. Note For these options, you are not required to select a Horizontal or Vertical Reference during the positioning of the feature - it is already defined. Parameter Values Each feature type requires you to enter values which define the dimensions necessary for that particular feature. These are sometimes referred to as the feature's parameters. Positioning Features You can position a feature (or a sketch) relative to existing solid body geometry or datum planes. This is done by creating positioning dimensions (sometimes called dimensional constraints), that control the location of a feature relative to some existing solid body geometry or datum planes. You can complete a feature without constraining its location by choosing OK before choosing a dimension type. The feature can later be positioned or moved using options found under EditFeature. If it is necessary to position a feature using geometry that has been modified creating a conflict (e.g., a blended edge), you can:

Suppress the blend, using Edit Feature Suppress Feature. Create, position, and reorder the new feature to come before the suppressed blend. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

16

Unsuppress the blend, using Edit Feature Unsuppress Feature.

Associativity Rules The following associativity rules apply to the creation of features:

A feature created using the Thru option is associated to the faces selected as the thru faces. The feature remains a thru feature whenever the target solid is changed (see the figure below).

Positioning dimensions create an associativity between the feature and the target solid. The dimensions lock the feature at a desired location. The location of the feature can be changed by simply editing the positioning dimensions that constrain the feature (see the figure below).

Note Editing the solid body does not change the location of a feature. You can change the feature's location by:

Editing the feature's positioning dimensions, Moving an unconstrained feature, drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

17

Controlling positioning dimension values with expressions.

2. Positioning Methods
When you are creating features and sketches, there are times when the Positioning Method dialog displays, to let you position the feature or sketch relative to other geometry. Note You only see those positioning methods that are valid for the feature operation on which you are currently working. Note For Boss features, the Perpendicular positioning method is the default. For Boss features, you can edit and rename the positioning dimensions directly on the Positioning dialog. a. Position a feature or sketch You can position a feature or sketch relative to existing curves, solid geometry, datum planes, and datum axes. This is done by creating dimensional constraints, known as positioning dimensions, that control the location of a feature or sketch relative to some existing curves, solid geometry, datum plane, or datum axis (see the figure below).

Note The types of curves that are selectable may be limited, based on the type of positioning dimension being defined. Positioning dimensions are associated to the geometry used to create them. If you move or delete geometry, the associated positioning dimension is also moved or deleted. To position a feature or sketch, you must: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose the positioning dimension type. Select the objects to dimension. Enter the new value for positioning. Choose OK to reposition the feature or sketch.

There are nine dimension types that can be used to constrain the location of a feature. When selecting the objects to dimension, you must select one of the objects from the target solid, curve, or datum and the other from the feature or sketch. When you position a boss or hole, the system automatically selects the object on the feature (the arc center) for you.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

18

Selection of objects varies with the type of dimension you wish to create. For example, if you want to use edges for a horizontal dimension, you must select their endpoints. When specifying an endpoint, you must select an edge that connects with that point, between the edge's midpoint and the intended point. For example, in the figure below:

If you select the edge (bold) between the midpoint and point A, point A is selected. If you select the edge (bold) between the midpoint and point B, point B is selected.

For those positioning dimensions that require the selection of points, the points must be part of the solid body (i.e., midpoints, endpoints, arc centers, tangency points). If it is necessary to position a feature using geometry that has been modified, creating a conflict (such as with a blended edge), you can:

Suppress the blend, using Edit Feature Suppress Create, position, and reorder the new feature to come before the suppressed blend Unsuppress the blend, using Edit Feature Unsuppress

Once you have added all the constraints needed to locate the feature or sketch, the feature is repositioned. The positioning dimension can be edited, allowing you to change the location of the feature at any time. For more information, see the section on Edit Feature Edit Positioning Dimension. Identify Solid Face In some cases when using points for positioning, you can dimension to a cylindrical, conical, or toroidal face by first choosing Identify Solid Face. Horizontal or Vertical Reference When creating horizontal and vertical dimensions, you may be required to define a Horizontal or Vertical Reference by selecting a linear edge, a solid face, or a datum axis or datum plane. A Horizontal Reference defines the horizontal direction for dimensioning the feature's location. A Vertical Reference defines the vertical direction for dimensioning the feature's location. When using a face or datum plane for a Horizontal or Vertical Reference, the reference is formed by the intersection (a curve) of the selected face or datum plane and the selected planar placement face.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

19

If the system determines that no references can be selected as a Horizontal or Vertical Reference, it constructs a default reference. If you are positioning a sketch, the Horizontal or Vertical Reference has already been selected and is not requested at this time. Note Whenever a feature whose edge/face was used as a horizontal or vertical reference is deleted, any Horizontal or Vertical positioning constraints associated with the reference are also deleted. b. Techniques for Positioning Methods Editing Edges Used For Constraints When you select an edge of the target solid to constrain the feature to it, the system creates a curve that matches that edge. This curve is linked to the target solid. If you modify the edge (for example, by adding a blend), the constraint is maintained to the original edge (see the figure below).

If you create a blend and then suppress it, the edge that was blended is redisplayed. If, after suppressing the blend, you position a feature relative to that edge and try to unsuppress the blend, you will get a warning that the positioning dimension will be deleted. You should cancel the unsuppress operation, reorder the blend after the feature that is positioned relative to the edge (with Edit Feature Reorder), and then unsuppress the blend. Note You cannot position solid primitives using positioning dimensions. Directional Axis (Machining) When positioning a feature or sketch on a datum plane, a machining (tool) direction axis is displayed. You can accept the viewed direction or flip it. This accepts the current state of the feature or flips the feature to the other side of the datum plane. In the figure below, you can see a thru hole being created from the datum plane to the outer face of the cylindrical pipe. The system displays the tool direction (#1). If you accept the displayed tool direction, the thru hole is created as shown by the solid lines. If you choose to flip the displayed tool direction (#2), the thru hole is created as shown by the dashed lines.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

20

Positive Direction of Constraint Once you have selected the geometry for a constraint, the positioning dimension is created and displayed. The initial dimension indicates the positive value direction for the constraint.

Full Constraints When creating positioning dimensions for use in relative positioning, you may need to use more than one constraining dimension to fully constrain the location of a feature or sketch. A feature or sketch can be constrained using any combination of dimensions. You should decide which dimension best suits your design. Note NOTE: When constraining a feature, you should consider the relationship of the feature to the target solid. Those relationships that need to remain constant or be controlled should be constrained. In other words, the location of the feature to the target solid can be controlled using positioning constraints. For example, in the figure below, the feature's location is constrained using two dimensions. If the solid body is edited, the feature's location relative to the selected target edge is maintained.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

21

Position to a Datum When positioning a feature or sketch to a datum plane or axis, you cannot use positioning dimensions that constrain a point to a point, such as a Horizontal, Vertical, and Parallel dimensions. You can only use dimensions that constrain a line to a point, such as a Perpendicular dimension or a line to a line, such as a Parallel at a Distance dimension. If a datum plane is selected, the system projects the datum plane until it intersects with the planar placement face of the target solid. The intersection between the datum plane and the target face forms a line, which is used to constrain the feature or sketch. Position to a Curve When prompted for the target edge, in many cases you can select an existing curve. Positioning to a curve can be useful when you want a feature's position to remain relative to another feature's position on a different part. For example, if you wish the position of a boss on one part to match a hole's position on a second part, first create an EXTRACTED_CURVE feature from the circular edge of the hole, then project the curve onto the first part. Create the boss and select the curve as the target edge for a Point onto Point positioning dimension (see the figure below).

Position by Feature Centerlines Slots, grooves, and rectangular pads and pockets can be positioned by their centerlines as well as by their edges. The centerlines appear only when the feature can be positioned or repositioned (for example, just after feature creation or after choosing Edit Feature and selecting the feature). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

22

If the feature is modified or reattached, its centerlines are automatically updated. Centerlines are considered part of the feature, and are deleted when the feature is deleted. A single circular centerline appears for a groove. It is located halfway between the top and bottom edges of the groove, and is equal to the diameter of the groove. Each of the other features has two centerlines, one horizontal and one vertical. To position to a centerline, select the target solid edge and then the centerline. See the figure below for an example. Note You can also select an existing curve, on or off the same part, when prompted for the target edge.

Position a UDF Positioning a user defined feature (UDF) works the same as positioning any other feature, except you have an additional option: Reverse Normal, which flips the user defined feature about its placement tool face 180 degrees. Note A user defined feature must be created using one of the Boolean operations under Attachment Method in order for Add Positioning Dimension to be available when the UDF is imported. Position a Thru Slot When positioning a thru slot, do not dimension to the end arcs of the slot. Position a Groove When positioning a groove, you only have to position the groove along the axis of the cylindrical target solid. No positioning dimension menu appears. Instead, you only need to specify a horizontal dimension along the axis, as shown in the figure below. This is done by selecting a target solid edge and then a tool (i.e., the groove) edge or centerline. Note You can also select any existing curve, on or off the same part, when prompted for the target edge.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

23

c. Horizontal The Horizontal method creates a positioning dimension between two points. A Horizontal dimension is aligned with the Horizontal Reference, or is 90 degrees from the Vertical Reference.

d. Vertical The Vertical method creates a positioning dimension between two points. A Vertical dimension is aligned with the Vertical Reference, or is 90 degrees from the Horizontal Reference.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING e. Parallel

24

The Parallel method creates a positioning dimension which constrains the distance between two points (e.g., existing points, entity endpoints, arc center points, or arc tangent points) and is measured parallel to the work plane. In the figure below, a pad is dimensionally constrained on a block. You can imagine a parallel dimension as a rope joining two points at a specified distance. It takes 3 "ropes" to locate this feature.

When you create a parallel or any other linear type dimension to a tangent point on an arc, there are two possible tangency points. You must select the arc near the desired point of tangency.

f. Perpendicular The Perpendicular method creates a positioning dimension which constrains the perpendicular distance between an edge of the target solid and a point on the feature or sketch. You can also position to a datum by selecting a datum plane or datum axis as the target edge, or any existing curve (which need not be on the target solid). This constraint is used to dimension linear distances that are not parallel to the XC or YC axis. It only locks the point on the feature or sketch to the edge on the target solid, or to the curve, at the specified distance.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

25

Note For Boss and Hole features, the Perpendicular positioning method is the default. In addition, for these features, you can edit and rename the positioning dimensions directly on the Positioning dialog. g. Parallel at a Distance The Parallel at a Distance method creates a positioning dimension which constrains a linear edge of the feature or sketch and a linear edge of the target solid (or any existing curve, on or off the target solid) to be parallel and at a fixed distance apart. This constraint only locks the edge on the feature or sketch to the edge on the target solid or the curve at the specified distance.

h. Angular The Angular method creates a positioning constraint dimension between a linear edge of the feature and a linear reference edge/curve at a given angle.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

26

Be sure to select the lines to dimension at the proper location. Each line has three control points, one at each end and one at the exact center. The angle created depends on which side of the center control point you select. The figure below shows two lines with their center control points highlighted by asterisks (*). The 33_25' angle was created by selecting the lines at the positions indicated by A. The 146_36' angle was created by selecting the lines at the positions marked B. As you can see, selecting the smaller line at a position left of the center control point creates the complementary angle.

i. Point onto Point The Point onto Point method creates a positioning dimension the same as the Parallel option, but with the fixed distance between the two points set to zero This positioning dimension causes the feature or sketch to move so that its selected point is on top of the point selected on the target solid.

j. Point onto Line The Point onto Line method creates a positioning constraint dimension the same as the Perpendicular option, but with the distance between the edge or curve and point set to zero Note The selected point must be on the feature and the line must be on the target solid as an edge, curve, or associated datum plane. This positioning dimension causes the feature or sketch to move from its selected point, normal to the edge or curve selected on the target solid, until the point is on the edge. This constraint only locks the point on the feature or sketch to the edge on the target solid. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

27

k. Line onto Line The Line onto Line method creates a positioning constraint dimension the same as the Parallel at a Distance option, but with the distance between the linear edge of the feature or sketch and the linear edge or curve on the target solid set to zero. Note If you choose a curve when prompted for the target edge, the curve must be linear and must be on the target solid. This positioning dimension causes the feature or sketch to move from its selected edge perpendicularly to the edge or curve selected on the target solid. This constraint only locks the edge on the feature or sketch to the edge/curve on the target solid.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

28

3. String Selection
Several of the free form feature creation options require that you select curve outlines known as strings. A string can consist of one or more objects. Each object can be a curve, solid edge, solid face, endpoint of a curve, or point. The maximum number of objects in one string is 5000 and the maximum number of strings in one free form feature is 150 with the exception of the Ruled body, where it is 2 strings. By default, if one curve of a sketch or projected curves are selected, the system selects the entire sketch or projected curves. You can mask the selection of the objects using any of the following: Solid Face Solid Edge Curves Chain Curves Lets you select all the edges of a face at once as objects of a string. You can use this option to create a bridged free form feature between two existing solid bodies. Lets you select single edges of a solid body as objects of a string. Lets you select single curves, sketch and non-sketch curves alike, as objects of a string. Lets you select a chain of sketch or non-sketch curves. For certain functions in Curve and Feature creation, Chain Curves also support the added following features:

You can use Chain Curve to select not only curves but edges for selection profiles. You can also select edges from different faces for the chain. When a chain encounters multiple edges at vertices, the direction of the chain proceeds along the path with the least angle. You can auto-chain an entire profile by double-clicking a segment of the chain of curves or edges.

These special features for Chain Curves are available with Join Curve, Offset Curve, Swept, drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

29

Point

Ruled Surface, Through Curves, Through Curve Mesh, Section, Extrude, Revolve, Tube, and Sweep Along Guide. Lets you select a single point as a string.

Chain Curves lets you select a chain of sketch or non-sketch curves. You can select a contiguous chain of curves without selecting the end of the chain by selecting the start curve and choosing OK. This can be helpful in determining whether a set of linked curves actually are connected without gaps. Note The system stops selecting chained curves if there is a gap between any of the curves. Point lets you select a single point as a string. During the selection for f'irst and/or last primary strings of Through Curve Mesh option, or the first section string of the Ruled option, you can select an existing point, or endpoint of a curve, as an entire string. When you select a point as a string, the system automatically continues to the next string selection. Point selection is available for Ruled free form feature creation only if the Alignment Control is set to Parameter or ArcLength. Selecting Section Strings As each section string is selected, a direction vector is displayed, indicating the start of the string selected. The direction vectors are used to line up the section strings, to prevent the resulting body from twisting (see the figure below).

You must start selecting all the section strings from approximately the same location (from the same end), as shown in the figure below.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

30

Objects in each section string can be selected in an arbitrary order. The selected objects are sorted and ordered based on the first object selected. After you have selected all the objects for the desired string, choose OK. A direction vector is displayed to signify the starting object (the first object selected in the string). When selecting faces as section strings, the starting object is the edge of the face closest to the location where you selected the face, as shown in the figure below.

Note The starting location of each section string is point aligned. To terminate the selection of a string, you can do one of two things:

You can respecify the starting object of the previously selected string by simply selecting an object within that string. If you choose to respecify the direction vector, the system erases the old vector and displays the new direction vector. You can start selecting new objects for the next section string.

For Swept, Through Curves, and Ruled free form feature options, if the selected section strings contain any sharp corners, it is recommended that you use the By Points alignment at the sharp corners to preserve them. The system will create separate faces joining at the edge formed by the sharp corners. You can also define the tolerance to be 0.00 for an exact fit of the free form feature to the sharp corners, which is convenient for section string of similar shape (for example, rectangular section string to rectangular section string). Otherwise, a high curvature, smoothed corner body is created to approximate these sharp corners. Any subsequent feature operations performed on these corners or faces (e.g., blends, hollows, or Boolean operations) may fail due to the curvature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Error Messages The following error messages may be displayed during string creation.

31

All the selected objects in a string must be contiguous and all inner loops are ignored except with the Bounded Plane option. Otherwise, the following error message is displayed.
Gaps in String or Multiple Loops

The following message is displayed if the selected faces/edges contain split edges - such faces/edges cannot be used as strings.
Split Edges are Found

The following error is displayed if a face(s) selected as a string is missing during updating.
Missing Face Referenced by String Object

The following error is displayed if an edge(s) selected as a string is missing during updating.
Missing Edge Referenced by String Object Unable to Reference Edge

The following error is displayed if, for certain V direction strings (i.e., guide string and cross strings), tangent objects were required but not defined.
Tangent Objects Required For V Direction String

The following error is displayed if you are using By Points alignment and the number of objects in a string is not greater than one.
Aligned By Points Required More Than One Object In A String

The following error is displayed if the selected string is not coplanar (this is required for Bounded Plane).
String Objects Not Coplanar Coplanar String Objects Required With Inner Loop

The following error is displayed if the selected string does not form a closed loop (this is required for Bounded Plane).
String Objects Not Closed

The following error is displayed if the starting object (i.e., the first object selected in the string) on the outer loop is too close to an inner loop (string). Try reselecting the outer loop in another location away from the inner loop.
Invalid Starting Object On Inner Loop Of A String

The following error is displayed if invalid string objects are detected. Such objects may split the string into multiple pieces.
Invalid String Objects

The following error is displayed if a string does not contain at least one object or because the tolerance is greater than the string length. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


String Contains No Object

32

The following error is displayed if the selected starting object of a string is a sketch reference line/arc.
Starting Curve Cannot Be A Reference Object

a. Snap Point options Snap Point options are found on the Selection Bar to aid you in specifying points and point locations during the creation and editing of geometric objects. For full details, see Snap Point options on the Selection Bar in the NX Fundamentals help.

4. Selection Intent in Feature Modeling


Selection Intent is a Selection Bar tool that lets you select and group multiple curves, edges and faces into collections with rules defining how a feature can use them. You choose which rules to use based on what you intend the feature to do. All Modeling commands that use Selection Intent have customer defaults for the initial Selection Intent rules. Note For full details on Selection Intent rules, see Selection Intent rules and options on the Selection Bar in the Fundamentals help. Selection Intent makes selection more efficient, and increases the robustness of updates during edits by relying on higher level objects that capture your intent (instead of low level curves and topology). If you later change the members in a collection during an edit, its rules remain intact, letting the feature update properly. The following figure shows a model with a draft that was created with the Selection Intent Tangent Faces rule. The left view shows the original model, and the right view shows the model after material and new faces are subsequently added. Even though some of the original faces were replaced, the draft still updated successfully, because it followed the Tangent Faces rule.

When Material is added to the model on the left, the draft still updates correctly (right) If the draft had been defined with single-selected faces instead of the Tangent Face rule, the draft would have failed to update during this edit. The following figure shows a second example where Selection Intent allows a draft feature and a hollow feature to both update successfully when the model is edited. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

33

Selection Intent allows successful update after changes to the model (before - left, after - right) Where do I find it? Selection Intent options appear on the Selection Bar for commands that support it. a. Use Selection Intent during object selection 1. Open the creation or edit command for a feature that supports Selection Intent. 2. Choose the rule for the collection needed by the feature you are creating (such as Face Rule or Curve Rule). If the rule is for a chain, select the base or seed object first, and then the objects that relate to it. b. Selection Intent available with option and type settings Selection Intent is available from within a command for certain option and type settings.

Specify Point option, when the type is set to either of the following:
o

Point on Curve/Edge

o Intersection Point Specify Vector option, when the type is set to: o On Curve Vector Specify Plane option, when the type is set to: o

Tangent Plane

c. Simple use of Selection Intent In this simple example, the Connected Curves rule is used to select a connected string of non-associative curves in one step for the section of a Sweep Along Guide feature.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

34

Connected Curves rule selects a string of curves for the section The Tangent Curves rule is used to select 3 spline curves for the section guide.

Tangent Curves rule selects 3 spline curves for the section guide This results in the Sweep Along Guide feature shown below.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

35

Resulting Sweep Along Guide feature If you edit the section or guide curves used by this feature, it will still update correctly. For example, trimming away the curve fillets from the section and one of the splines from the guide results in a successful update.

Result after trimming away the section fillets and removing one guide spline d. Selection Intent collection building When you need to use chaining to build a section or collection of curves or edges for the feature you are creating: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


36

The Curve Rule is available for collecting and section building. The Type filter on the Selection Bar changes to Curve, Edge or Any, based on the needs of the feature. The cursor changes to Curve Collecting to show you are in wireframe collection mode. On selecting a curve or an edge, Selection Intent begins building the profile or section based on the currently specified Curve Rule and More options.

When you start a chain, the first selected curve or edge becomes the seed object. The chain includes all curves and edges currently visible. Chaining proceeds until no other chaining candidates can be found or, multiple directions are encountered and the chain stops, letting you choose the next segment of the chain. Complete the chain using the middle mouse button. For examples of using Selection Intent to build a section profile, see Selection Intent - Building A Section. Selection Intent smart deselection Once a chain is selected with a specific rule, you can deselect specific objects from the chain. Smart deselection captures the intent of deselecting the chain. This ensures that during an update the chain can honor the deselections with similar intent. Smart deselection works for all curve and face rules, except for the Tangent and Connected curve rules. Depending on the context, smart deselections are inferred in the following ways:

For face chains and direct edge chains, if you deselect objects while editing a chain, it is inferred that you want to remove these specific items from the chain. During subsequent updates, if the objects are captured again, they are removed from the chain. For merged chains, any object that you deselected in the earlier chain is removed, unless you select it while creating another chain. The detailed view of the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator shows the removed objects in the Removed Objects folder, in the Chain folder, under Section. In every subsequent update, normal rule propagation is done and the stored deselected objects are removed from the section after updating the chain.

For sections using the Stop at Intersection or Follow Fillet, if you deselect a single object, the entire chain is deselected. The detailed view of the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator shows the start and end limits for Stop at Intersection in the Intersection Limits subfolder, in the Chain folder under Section.

For more information about the representation of Selection Intent in the detailed view of the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator, see Dependencies panel. e. Specify a region with Selection Intent The following example shows how regions can be used with Selection Intent to create a Draft feature. Note For specific procedures on creating a draft see Draft procedures. 1. Open the Draft dialog box and do the following: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

37

a. For the Type, select From Plane. b. Select a Stationary Plane for the draft, one that will not move and from which the draft will propagate. In this example, we select the top, horizontal face. 2. Set the Face Rule to Region Faces and select a seed face, as shown below.

Note For an explanation of Face Rules, see Selection Intent options on the Selection Bar. 3. Once you specify the seed face, Selection Intent switches the Face Rule to Single Face, to let you select one or more region boundary faces. In the figure below we select three boundary faces.

4. Click the middle mouse button to complete the region, from which the draft faces are automatically selected.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

38

5. Click OK or Apply to create the Draft feature.

If you later edit, add, or delete any of the faces, the original Selection Intent rule remains effective, and the draft updates correctly, as shown below when the source faces are changed.

f. Building a section in Selection Intent This page shows some simple examples of how to build a section using Selection Intent's section builder options. See Selection Intent rules and options and Selection Intent Collection and Section Building for more information. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Draft example

39

In the figure below we use the Curve rule, Tangent Curves to add four collections of curves (1 through 4) to the section (shown below in red).

Tangent Curves rule to select a profile of curves The collection of section curves produces the draft body shown below.

Draft body feature If we edit, add or delete any of the section curves, the tapered body still updates correctly (below).

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

40

Editing the section curves later (1) allows the draft body to update successfully Extrude example Following is a simple example of how you can build a section with Selection Intent's section builder to create an extrusion. In the figure below we use the Curve ruleTangent Curves with the Stop at Intersection option to add four collections of curves (1 through 4) to a section (shown below in red). Each collection stops at an intersection, giving you the opportunity to specify which way the section should go next.

Tangent curves rule to select a collection of curves g. Modifying Selection Intent collections and sections You can modify members of a Selection Intent collection the same as you would a list of selected objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Shift/Click click Deselects Intent objects and removes them from the collection. Selects objects and adds them to an Intent collection.

41

Shift/Delay/Click Opens a QuickPick cursor and a dialog box to let you select between the object and the collection that includes that object (All of Intent). Removing objects from a collection causes the loss of the rule and the collection becomes a simple list of objects. If you edit a collection that is used by a feature, the old objects may not map properly to the new. In that case, the Replacement Assistant may appear to let you resolve the new mappings. Using right-click to redefine a collection You can right-click an object in a collection that you have selected with Selection Intent and redefine the collection's intent rule. For example, when you select an initial edge with the Face Edges rule you build a collection of faces using that rule and based on that first edge. If you then right-click one of the selected objects in that collection and change the rule to Tangent Curves, the initial collection is replaced by a new one that uses the new rule, with the new object becoming the seed. Using right-click option menus to change the intent method also changes the currently active method in the toolbar. The intent rules on the right-click option menu will not always match those on the selection toolbar, due to rules requiring multiple object selection. h. Selection Intent cursors As you initiate a Selection Intent action, the cursor changes to signal the collection mode and the current operation. Curve Collecting Face Collecting Region Specification Chain Between - Start Chain Between - End

5. Replacement Assistant
If you edit a collection of objects that is used by a feature, the software may not always be able to map the old objects into the new without possibly breaking associativity to dependent objects. In these cases, the Replacement Assistant may appear to let you may map the objects during the modification. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

42

Use the Replacement Assistant to define the equivalences between faces and edges of the current object and the replacement object. For example, if you edit the section of an Extrude feature and the software determines that the new section objects may need to be identified in relation to the objects they are replacing, the Replacement Assistant appears at the conclusion of the edit.

A Selection Intent Mapping with Extrude The original Extrude created with a number of collections using the selection intent Connected Curves rule and the Stop At Intersection option. Two selection intent Connected Curves collections deselected during edit. Two new Connected Curves collections selected. The new extruded body, after the mappings are completed using the Replacement Assistant. The Replacement Assistant is also used during interpart and WAVE modeling. Where do I find it? The Replacement Assistant dialog box appears automatically when your edit of features clarification of how new objects introduced in the edit are to replace old removed objects. a. Map objects during modification When you click OK to complete the editing of a Selection Intent section for a feature that supports the Replacement Assistant, an information dialog box may display stating that your edit has the potential of affecting downstream features, and you are asked if you want to provide the mapping between the old and new sections. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

43

If you decide to do the mapping, the Replacement Assistant dialog box opens, and a two-view display shows the original section displayed on the left and the new section on the right. in other cases, the Replacement Assistant may appear automatically at the conclusion of an edit. 1. Select the objects you want to map in the left view (old-section view). For each object you select, an entry is added to the Replacement Assistant with a question mark next to it. 2. Select the objects you want for the new mappings in the right view (new-section view). For each new object you select, a question mark in the Replacement Assistant changes to a green check mark. You can map as many of the objects as you want (you do not have to map all objects). 3. Click OK to complete the mapping of objects from old to new. Note For details and more information, see Replacement Assistant in the Assemblies Online Help.

E. Expressions
Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that define some characteristics of features. You can use expressions to control the relationships between the features of a part, or between parts in an assembly. For example, you can express the thickness of a bracket in terms of its length. If the length of the bracket is altered, the thickness automatically updates. You can use expressions to define and control many dimensions of a model, such as the dimensions of a feature or a sketch. The formulas within expressions can include a combination of variables, functions, numbers, operators, and symbols. You can insert expression names in the formula strings of other expressions. There are two basic kinds of expressions:

User expressions, those you create (also known as user defined expressions). Software expressions, those the software creates.

User expressions can have plain language names. Expressions created automatically by the software are named with a number, preceded with a lower case "p", such as "p53". Here are some examples of expressions, their formulas, and their resulting values: Expression name Additional software expression name width length p39 p16 Where do I find it? drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 Formula 22 5*width Value 22 110

(Flange(6) Bend Allowance Formula) (p26+(p64*0.44))*rad((-p24)) 18.849537 (Extract Region(7) Angle Toler) 45.0 45

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Menu Part Navigator

44

ToolsExpression Right-click an expression in the Part Navigator, either in the Main panel or Details panel, and choose Edit in Expression Editor and choose

From supported Modeling dialog boxes, click parameter entry options Dialog boxes Formula.

1. User expressions
User expressions are any expression that you create yourself with the Expressions dialog box. For example, you could create an expression named "width" with a formula string of "5.0". You could then use this expression to define the dimensions of a block by entering "width" in the appropriate parameter entry field. You can create expressions based on measurements and interpart references. Here is a sample of some user-defined expressions: Expression Name Formula width 22 length 5*width diameter width/3 position if (width<=2)(0.5*width) else (2) base_block_height 16 base_block_length 1 base_block_multiple 8 base_block_width base_block_height*block_multiple (base_block_length/2)*a_multiple block_heighta block_length block_multiple BLOCK(6):Size X div aln railwidth a_multiple/2 base_block_width*block_multiple block_length 3+sqrt(aln) 5.4 2*aln // forechain

By editing the formulas, you can edit your model parameters. Note If you compare the results of your expressions you may in some cases see apparent inaccuracies between known values. This may be due to normal system rounding and the nature of floating point arithmetic when used with double precision values.

2. Software expressions
Expressions created automatically by the software are named with a number and are preceded with a lower case "p", as with "p53".

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

45

The Expression dialog box may display additional parameter text for system expression names, but it is not part of the actual name. This additional text follows the name and describes the feature and parameter option it is associated with. For example, the system expression p5, shown below, is for the diameter of a simple hole feature with a time stamp of 4: p5 (SIMPLE_HOLE(4) Diameter) System expressions are automatically created during many Modeling operations:

Sketch Dimensioning - An expression is created for each dimension (i.e., p2=3.5436). Positioning of a Feature or Sketch - An expression is created for each positioning dimension. Feature Creation - Expressions are created for the creation parameters of many features (such as extrusion start and end limits, revolution angle, and hole depth). Creation of Mating Conditions or Assembly Constraints.

Here are some examples of system expressions: Expression Formula p28 (Extrude(14) Start Limit) 15 p3 (Bridge Curve)(6) Match Point 2) 21 p6 (Studio Surface 2X2(11) Angular Tolerance) 0.5 You can rename system expressions.

3. Expressions options
Listed Expressions Categories Lets you choose a category to filter the expressions displayed in the list window. Expression names are shown in the list window with no regard to case. Select from the following categories: User Defined Shows only expressions that you have created yourself. Named Shows only expressions that you have created and those you have not created but have renamed. Unused Expressions Shows only those expressions that are not being used by any objects in the part file. Object Parameters Shows only those expression parameters for a feature selected in the graphics

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING window or Part Navigator. Measurements Shows all measurement expressions in the part file. Filter by Name

46

Used with the adjoining filter box to let you enter or select a string of characters to show a subset of expressions by their names. Filter by Value Used with the adjoining filter box to let you enter or select a string of characters to show a subset of expressions by their values. Filter by Formula Used with the adjoining filter box to let you enter or select a string of characters to show a subset of expressions by their formula. Attribute Expressions Shows all part and object attribute expressions present in the part file. All Shows all expressions in the part file. Filter box Lets you enter a filter string. The string is evaluated based on the filter category type (that is, Filter by Name, Filter by Value, or Filter by Formula) You can enter an asterisk wild-card to filter the list further. Transfers control to the NX spreadsheet function, which you can use to edit expressions. When control is transferred to the spreadsheet function, NX is idle until you exit from the spreadsheet. Note

Spreadsheet Edit

Legacy parts with Geometric expressions are not listed in the spreadsheet. The spreadsheet substitutes the string q... for each quote (), and a question mark (?) for each colon (:) it encounters. You may therefore wish to avoid using this option with interpart expression filenames that contain these characters. For example, an interpart expression with the formula mypart::myexpression would appear in the spreadsheet as q...mypartq...??myexpression.

Reads a specified text file containing expressions into the current part file. Import Expressions from File There may be times when you have expressions in the text file that have the same name as expressions already in your part file. When this conflict occurs, the system either keeps the existing expression or replaces it with the expression in the text file. You control how expression name conflicts are handled with one of the options shown drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING below. Replace Existing

47

Supersedes the existing expressions that have the same name with expressions contained in the text file. Keep Existing Choose if you do not wish to replace the existing expressions by any expression that has the same name in the text file. This setting lets you import only those expressions that do not conflict (do not exist in both files). When you use the Keep Existing setting, the system reads the specified text file and attempts to add each expression to the list. If there are conflicts (expressions with the same name) found during the transfer, an error message appears. After the transfer is complete, you can choose Accept to keep the new list or Undo to restore the original set of expressions. As an example, if an expression of the same name exists in your active part and in the text file being imported, one of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose Replace Existing, the expression in the imported text file replaces the existing expression in the active part. If you choose Keep Existing, the expression in the active part is kept and the expression in the text file is ignored.

Delete Imported The Delete Imported option lets you remove multiple expressions from your part file. When you choose this option, the system looks at a text file that contains a list of expressions and deletes any expression in the part file that has the same name. This option may be used in one of the following two ways:

Export the list of expressions to a text file. In the text file delete all of the expressions that you want to keep. Import the list using the Delete Imported option. Create an empty text file. Enter into the text file all of the names of the expressions that you want to delete. (You do not have to enter the entire expression; just the name). Import the list using the Delete Imported option.

With either of these methods, the expressions may be listed in any order. Each expression that is encountered in the text file is deleted from the Expressions List in the part file. Note If the expression is used by the model or by another expression, it is not deleted. Note Legacy parts with Geometric expressions, such as p0=distance(40), drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING cannot be imported.

48

For additional information and format rules, see Expression Text File Format. Lets you write the expressions in the part to a text file. Choosing this option displays a file dialog prompting you for the name of the text file. You can choose what expressions to export using the following options:

Export Expressions to File Work Part

Exports all the expressions in the work part. All in Assembly Tree Exports all the expressions in the work part plus all of its components (the assembly tree). All Parts Exports all the expressions in all parts in the session. All files used for importing/exporting expressions possess the file extension ".exp". Note Legacy parts with geometric expressions in a file that is being exported will become "dumb" expressions (for example, an angle expression, p0=angle(12) that evaluates to 90.0 will become p0=90.0 in the exported file). For additional information and format rules, see Expression Text File Format. Expressions list box The list box displays a detailed, sortable list of the expressions in the part file. You can filter the expressions that appear in the list using the Listed Expressions drop-down menu and by entering filterstrings. You can browse the graphics window and Part Navigator, selecting features to display their expressions in the list. Columns The Expressions list box is divided into the following columns:

Name - The name of each expression or measure. Formula - Shows the unevaluated right hand side of the expression formula for each expression. If the expression is a measure the label (Measure) displays. Value - Shows the value derived by the formula or the measure data. If the formula uses a different unit than the expression, the value is converted to the expression unit. If the Type is set to Number, the value is a number. If the Type is set to String, the value is a string. Units - Shows the units for the expression or measure, if they exist. Type Shows the expression type, as defined with the Type option. Comment - Shows the comment for an expression if one has been added by right-clicking and choosing Edit Comment, or by double-clicking the Comment column. Note Comments are not included when an expression is linked to another part drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING through an Interpart Reference (an interpart expression).

49

You can sort the listing by the contents of a column by double-clicking MB1 on a column title. Icons An icon may display with an expression or measure:

A Lock icon appears next to an expression that is locked, which only occurs when an overriding expression has been loaded in the session. A Read-only Icon appears if the expression is read-only. A Measures icon appears if the expression is a measure. The Knowledge Fusion adoption icon appears if the expression is bidirectionally controlled from the Expression editor and Knowledge Fusion.

For all expressions with icons except Lock and Knowledge Fusion, the expression text is shown in light blue and the expression formula is not editable. Create, edit, special functions, and controls Use these fields to create, edit and query expressions and measures. Type Specifies the expression data type. Number Creates expressions using a numeric data type. When Number is the selected Type, the Dimensionality options list to the right of the Type box becomes available. Dimensionality Use Dimensionality options to specify the kind of dimension to use for new expressions. All types of dimensions specified by the Units Manager are shown in the Dimensionality options list. The most common types of dimensions used with Modeling expressions are:

Length Distance Angle Constant (that is, dimension-less, as with the number of holes in an instance array).

Both the dimensionality and the units you specify for an expression formula must be correct with regard to the input and the expected output. For example, if you create a new expression formula named C that multiplies together two existing length expressions (A and B, created in millimeters) to get an area (C=A*B), you would set the dimensionality of C to Area and the units to mm^2. Otherwise, you may get a units inconsistency error. You must also make sure that the function arguments in your expressions have the correct dimensionality. The sqrt function, for example, fails with the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

50 argument sqrt(x) when used with the Length dimensionality, because the software cannot calculate the square root of a Length dimensionality unit. But, if you write the function as sqrt(x*in) for inches or sqrt(x*1mm) for millimeters, the function succeeds. (Note that sqrt(x) succeeds when the dimensionality is Constant instead of Length.) You cannot change the dimensionality of a system generated expression. See Units Manager in Advanced Simulation Help for further information.

String Creates an expression using a string data type. String expressions return a string instead of a number, and are defined as double-quoted sequences of characters. The formula for a string expression can be constant, such as Text entry, or it can be calculated. For example, the following string expression:
NAME mick FORMULA y2k+lg+yr+prep+terra

When used with these string expressions:


NAME lg prep terra y2k yr FORMULA Light from Home 2000 Years VALUE Light from Home 2000 Years

Yields this value:


2000 Light Years from Home

The string expression's formula can contain any combination of function calls, operators, or constants that result in a string when the formula is evaluated. You can use string expressions to direct a part's non-numeric values, such as a part description, a vendor name, a color name, or other string attributes. Boolean Creates an expression to support alternate logical states using Boolean values of true or false. Use this data type to represent an opposing condition, such as the suppression status for the Suppress by Expression and Component Suppression commands.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Integer Creates an expression using a numerical count without units.

51

Use the this data type in commands that require a numerical count or quantity, such as Instance Geometry. Point Creates an expression by defining a position using X, Y, and Z dimensions. Formula syntax:
Point(0,0,0)

Use this data type in commands that require the specification or reference of a position by expression. For example, you could parametrically control a Revolve axis location, or the minimum distance location of an associative Measure Distance. Vector Creates an expression by defining a direction using Cartesian I, J, and K coordinates. Formula syntax:
Vector(0,0,0)

Use this data type in commands that require either the input or the output (measurement) of a direction. For example, you could parametrically control an Extrude direction or a Revolve axis direction. List Use this data type to streamline NX DesignLogic interactions and provide additional functionality capable of handling a wider variety of design tasks. You can use the Extended Text Entry option to conveniently specify list expressions with comma separated values of any DesignLogic data type as list expressions using braces {}. Name Lets you specify a name for a new expression, change a name for an existing expression, and to highlight and display an existing expression for edit. Expression names must begin with an alphabetic character, but can be composed of alphanumeric characters. Expression names can include embedded underscores. You cannot use any other special characters in an expression name, such as -, ?, * or !. Note

Expression names are not case sensitive, except under certain conditions. See Expressions name case sensitivity for details. Expressions names can be in the users supported international language (locale). Both the left hand side (LHS) and the right hand side (RHS) of drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

52 an expression support internationalized name strings, as well as DesignLogic functions and interpart expressions. Note that file names are not internationalized in NX.

Unit

Available only when the Type is set to Number and the Dimensionality to something other than Constant. Specifies the unit for the selected dimensionality. If you change the dimensionality type, the unit also changes.

Formula

Use this field to edit the formula for an expression selected from the list, enter the formula for a new expression, or create a reference for an interpart expression. You can fill the Formula field the following ways:

Enter an expression formula using the keyboard. Select an expression from the list window to display its formula, and rightclick Insert Formula. Click the Functions button to insert a function. Click one of the Measurements buttons to specify an object measurement from the graphics window and insert it into an expression. Click the Create Interpart Reference button to insert an expression from another part.

You can enter simple units in a formula, such as "3mm". Any necessary unit conversions display in the Value column of the list window. If you use different or inconsistent dimensions in the formula, a warning message displays. You can also enter statements in scientific notation. The value you enter must contain a positive or negative sign. For example:
2e+5 for 200000 2e-5 for 0.00002

Note When you open the Expression dialog box from a function's parameter entry option, you can only edit the formula of the expression you are presently creating. You cannot use the editor to change existing expressions, although you can create new ones. Tip Expressions created for Symbolic Threads that have the Manual Input option off are restricted in the Expressions dialog box, and are unavailable for change. You can still edit these expressions by using Edit Feature Parameters, bypassing the Manual Input option. This level of protection has been put in place to maintain standard values taken from the thread lookup tables. Opens a window where you can edit expression strings and add Insert function and Insert Conditional statements. Extended Text Convenient when specifying list expressions with comma separated values of any Entry DesignLogic data type as list expressions using braces {}. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

53

Accept Edit

Creates a new expression or finalizes the results of an edit on an existing expression. Clicking this button accepts the creation or edit changes. The expression and its value are updated in the list box. Cancels the edit or creation operation and clears the Name and Formula boxes.

Reject Edit Reduces the size of the Expressions dialog box and simplifies it by removing the expressions list box, and the Listed Expressions, Spreadsheet Edit, Import Expressions from File, and Export Expressions to File options. Presents the entire Expressions dialog box, including the expressions list box and all options. More Options Opens the Knowledge for Designers Insert Function dialog box. This is the same dialog used by Knowledge Fusion. You can Insert functions into your expressions at the cursor position in the Formula box. Insert Function Use this dialog box to find the standard or user-defined function you want to insert into your expression formula.

Less Options

Functions

You can enter a keyword and use the Find button to search for a function name. You can also choose a category from the drop-down menu to display a list of functions in a category, and then select the desired function. After selecting a function you can get two levels of help on the function: Simple definition help displays for the function at the bottom of the dialog. You also can click the Help About Selected Function button to open the help page for the function from the NX Knowledge Fusion Language Reference.

Function Argument Dialog When you find the function you want in the function list, double-click it or use the OK button to open the Function Argument dialog, where you can specify a parameter for the function. The function and any parameter value you assign to it are inserted into your expression formula. Caution Note that when you use string categories in your formula, the result of evaluating the formula must be a number. You can separate functions in the Formula field with standard mathematical operators. For detailed information on the Function Argument dialog, see Insert drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

54 Function / Method and Function Arguments Dialog in the NX Knowledge Fusion Dialogs Help. See the Math Functions and Legacy Functions topics in the Knowledge Fusion Help and Best Practices for details on functions.

Obtains measurement values from objects in the graphics window for your expression formulas. Measurements When you obtain a measure, an expression for it is created and inserted at the cursor position of the expression formula you are editing. Measure Distance - Uses the Analysis Distance function to measure the minimum distance between any two NX objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and faces. The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the twodimensional distance relative to the XC, YC plane. In addition, it returns the closest point on each object and the delta distances in absolute and work coordinate systems. If you use this option to create a distance measure while specifying a feature parameter (for example, using the Parameter Entry Option menu), the measure becomes embedded within the expression for the feature parameter. See Query an embedded distance measure expression for instructions on how to query an embedded measure expression. Measure Length - Uses the Analysis Arc Length function to measure the arc length of a curve or line. You can use selection intent and section building to measure the length of a set of curves between intersection points. Measure Angle - Uses the Analysis Angle function to display angle measurements between two curves, between two planar objects (planes, Datum Planes or Planar Faces), or between a line and a planar object. Measure Bodies - Uses the Analysis Measure Bodies function to obtain volume, mass, radius of gyration, centroid and surface area of solid bodies. Measure Area - Uses the Analysis Measure Faces function to calculate area and perimeter values of body faces. The system creates multiple expressions for area and perimeter. For detailed help on any of these measurement options, see the NX Analysis help. Lets you create attribute expressions, which you can use to reference part or object attributes. If the part or object attribute is later modified the expression is updated automatically. Use attribute expressions when you need to refer to a part or object attribute as a dynamically updated expression. If you select an existing attribute expression from the list, the Formula box is drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Reference Expressions

[NX8 HELP] MODELING unavailable.

55

You can remove attribute expressions using the Delete option, unless it is being referenced by an expression, in which case you will have to first remove the referencing expression. Reference Part Attribute - Opens the attributes dialog box showing the models part attributes. You can select a part attribute and edit its input for the right hand side of the expression (RHS). Reference Object Attribute - Opens the attributes dialog box. If an object was already selected before clicking this option, object attributes appear in the list. If no object was selected, the object attribute dialog box is empty, and you will need to select an object to populate the list. Select Object - Lets you select an object for the attributes dialog box. As with the part attributes, you can select an object attribute of the model and edit its input for the right hand side of the expression (RHS). Note For more information on attributes and the attributes dialog box, see the topics in the Work with Objects section of the Fundamentals help. Lets you create an interpart reference. When you choose this option, the dialog lists the parts available in your session. You can either select from this list, select a part from the graphics screen, or use the Choose Part File option to select a part from disk.

Create Interpart Reference Once you have selected a part, all of the expressions in that part are listed. Select an expression from the list and choose OK. A reference to the expression is then inserted in the formula text field at the cursor location, using the following syntax:
<part>::<expression>

If the part to which you are referring contains different units from the work part, the reference automatically inserts the units operator around it. For example, if a metric part refers to an inch part, it adds "in(inch_part::length)" to the text field. You can control this behavior using the option button on the Expressions List dialog showing the list of expressions in the part you have selected. You can also create an interpart expression by simply typing it into the text field (e.g. "x=comp::len"). You do not have to use the Create Inner-Part Reference option to create an interpart expression. For more information, see Interpart References. Lets you control the external references from a part file to expressions in other parts. You can change a reference to refer to a new part, delete a selected reference, or delete all references in the work part. Choosing this option displays a dialog containing a list drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Edit Interpart of all of the parts containing expressions referenced from the work part. References You have the following options to edit interpart references: Change Referenced Part

56

This option lets you change all expressions which refer to the part that you have selected to refer to a new part. For example, if you have the following expressions:
x=comp::leny=comp::widthx=other_comp::p12

Choose Edit Interpart References and select the part "comp". Choose Change Referenced Part. You are prompted to select a new part file to reference. Choose the part "comp_2". When you choose OK, the expression is updated to:
x=comp_2::leny=comp_2::widthx=other_comp::p12

This assumes that there are expressions named "len" and "width" in the new part. If there are not, a warning message is displayed stating that the system has substituted numeric values for the missing expressions. Delete Reference Use this option to delete the interpart references to a selected part. For example, given the expressions in the previous example, choose Edit Interpart References and select the part "comp". Choose Delete All References. The system replaces all interpart expressions with constant numeric values. The following would result:
x=10y=5.5x=other_comp::p12

Note that no update of the model occurs in this case. The value of the expressions involved does not change. Delete All References Use this option to delete all interpart references in the work part and replace them with constant numeric values. Lets you open any partially loaded parts in your session. Open Referenced Parts When you first open an assembly, the system does not load the full part file for each component part; to save memory, only the information needed to display the component part is loaded. When you change your work part, the system ensures that the full part file is loaded so you can make changes to the part file. When a part is partially loaded, you cannot change its solid bodies. When using interpart expressions, it is possible to change an expression that governs the solid model in a component part without that component being fully loaded. If you change an expression in a partially-loaded part, a warning message is displayed informing you that in order to see the full effect of the changes, you must use the Open Referenced Part option. Choosing this option displays a list of partially loaded parts that you can fully load. The contents of the list are controlled by the options at the top of the dialog. The All drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

57

Modified option lists all partially loaded parts whose expressions have been modified. The All Referenced option lists all partially loaded parts whose expressions are referenced by the work part. You can either select a single part from the list, or use the Load All Parts In List option to load all of the parts in the list box. You can also use the Assembly Navigator to ensure that parts are fully loaded. In addition, you can set a preference under Load Options to force all component parts to be fully loaded. Provides the following requirements options: Requirements New Requirement Starts the Ad Hoc Requirement dialog box that lets you create a user requirement. The user requirement is a conditional statement (for example, > 50). A check placed under this requirement specifies an expression to compare to that conditional statement (for example, p2 > 50). Note Requirements are not included when an expression is linked to another part through an Interpart Reference (an interpart expression). Choose Existing Requirement Starts the Check Requirements dialog box that lets you add a new check for an expression under an existing requirement. Note For further details, see the Check Requirements Help User Requirement overview. Updates the values of expressions that you may have made in an external spreadsheet. This option works with those ug_excel_*** functions that can be used in the Refresh Values Expressions dialog box. Because NX does not understand when you have changed any from External information in the spreadsheet, you can basically use this button to refresh those Spreadsheet expressions that read or write data to the spreadsheet. The functions specify which spreadsheet you will be using. You can have multiple spreadsheets that are referenced in the Expression dialog box. Lets you remove a selected user-defined expression. You can delete multiple expressions to by using the Control key with MB1 to select them. Delete You cannot delete an expression that is in use, such as by a feature, sketch, mating condition, etc. Note The software may automatically delete any expressions no longer in use. For example, if the software automatically creates the expression "p17" for the width of a slot, deleting that slot causes "p17" to be deleted as well. This only happens if "p17" is not used by any other expression. The software only deletes expressions that it automatically created.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

58

4. Create an expression
1. Choose ToolsExpression. The Expressions dialog box opens. 2. In the Type box, choose the type of expression to create, either Number or String. 3. In the Name box, type a name for the expression. 4. If you chose Number for Type, you can: o Choose a Dimensionality for the expression. o Choose a Unit type for the expression. 5. Type a value or formula string in the Formula box. 6. To create the expression, press Enter or click Accept Edit The expression is added to the Expressions list. .

5. Edit an expression
1. Choose ToolsExpression to open the Expressions dialog box. 2. Click the expression to edit in the list box. The expression's name and formula appear in the Name and Formula boxes. If you know the name of the expression to edit, you can type it in the Name box and tab to the Formula box. The current value/formula automatically displays, and the expression is ready to edit. 3. Make your edit changes. You can do any of the following: o Rename the expression by editing the existing name or typing a new name in the Name box. o Edit the expression formula by inserting or typing new values or formula strings in the Formula box. o Right-click another expression in the Expressions list box and choose Insert Formula to insert that expression's formula at the cursor position in the Formula box. o Right-click another expression in the Expressions list box and choose Insert Name to insert that expression's name at the cursor position in the Formula box (you can also double-click an expression name in the list box to do the same thing). o Change the dimensionality and units of user-defined number expressions.
o

Cancel the edit by clicking Reject Edit

4. To finalize the edit, click Accept Edit The expression updates in the list box.

or press Enter.

6. Access data from an external spreadsheet


This example shows how to use a function to access data from an external spreadsheet. The value in cell B3 in the following spreadsheet is assigned to an expression named thickness. A B 1 Maximum Length 75 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 2 Width 3 Thickness 15.5 2.5

59

1. Choose ToolsExpression. 2. In the Expressions dialog box, in the Name box, type thickness. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click Functions . In the Insert Function dialog box, from the Or Choose a Category list, select spreadsheet. From the list of functions, select ug_cell_read. Click OK. .

7. In the Function Arguments dialog box, click Specify a spreadsheet 8. Navigate to your spreadsheet and click OK. 9. In the Specify a Cell box, type B3 10. Click OK.

The Expressions dialog box is displayed and the function appears in the Formula box.
ug_cell_read( "D:\spreadsheets\size_data.xlsx", "B3" )

11. Verify the value of the expression and click OK. In this example, the value of the expression is 2.5. Note If the spreadsheet is modified, you can update the expression by clicking Refresh Values from External Spreadsheet in the Expressions dialog box.

7. Undo an expression operation


Click Undo on the Standard Toolbar to undo any of the following types of changes you may have made while working in the Expression dialog box:

Update a model Delete an expression Create an expression Any edit done on an existing expression

Undo reverses all of the changes made back to whichever of the following occurred last:

The first edit A model update All edits after a model update Choosing OK (only for Tools Expression)

For example, if you made five expression edits, updated the model, and then made three more edits, clicking Undo once would reverse the last three edits.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING If you made five edits and then updated the model and the update failed, clicking Undo reverse the five previous edits.

60 once would

You may continue to undo changes until the expression list is in its original state when you started working on expressions.

8. Query an embedded distance measure expression


If you use the Expressions Measure Distance option to create a distance measure while specifying a feature parameter (for example, using the Parameter Entry Option menu), the measure becomes embedded within the expression for the feature parameter. You can query such a distance measure by selecting it in the expression string and clicking the Measure button. For example, in the expression:
P58 (Simple Hole(26) Depth) = distance62/2

distance62 is the embedded distance measure. 1. Highlight distance62 in the Formula box. 2. Click Measure .

The Measure Distance dialog box opens in the edit mode, and the ruler displays the original measure.

9. Using comments within expression formulas


You can add comments in expression formulas using double forward slashes "//" before the actual comment. The double forward slashes tells the system to ignore everything after. Comments continue until the end of the formula. Name longstrut Formula 2*bra // standard

10.

Listing expressions

You can list your expressions in the Expression dialog box by choosing All for the Listed Expressions option. You can list all expressions in the current assembly, including components, as well as expressions loaded in the current session by choosing InformationExpression.

11.

Expressions syntax operators

There are several types of operators that you may use in your expression formulas. Arithmetic Operators drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING The following tables list the arithmetic operators. Arithmetic Operators Addition Subtraction and Negative Sign Multiplication Division Modulus Exponential Assignment

61

+ * / % ^ =

Note The modulus operator is the same as the C programming language operator, whose operands and output are integers. Decimal places are ignored. Relational, Equality and Logical Operators The following table lists the relational, equality, and logical operators. Relational, Equality and Logical Operators > Greater Than < Less Than >= Greater Than or Equal <= Less Than or Equal == Equal != Not Equal ! Negate & or && Logical AND | or || Logical OR

F. Part Navigator
The Part Navigator displays various aspects of your part in a detailed, graphical tree. You can use the Part Navigator to:

Update and understand the part's basic structure. Select and edit the parameters of items in the tree. Arrange how the part is organized. Display features, model views, drawings, user expressions, reference sets, and unused items in the tree. Part Navigator Name History Mode Model Views Cameras User Expressions drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Model History Datum Coordinate System (0) Sketch (1) PROFILE (1) Extrude (2) Extrude (3) Unite (4) Revolve (5) Dependencies Extrude (2) Children Unite (4) Parents Sketch (1) PROFILE Details Parameter Start Limit End Limit Boolean Preview Where do I find it? Resource bar Menu Part Navigator tab ToolsPart Navigator Value 0.000[mm] 50.000[mm] None Expression p9=0 p10=50

62

No preview available

1. Open the Part Navigator


1. Click the Part Navigator tab on the Resource bar.

2. Pin the Part Navigator open, by clicking the pin icon in the upper left corner.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

63

You can open or display the Part Navigator from any NX application.

2. Part Navigator Main panel


The main panel of the Part Navigator provides a comprehensive view of your model. You can:

Get an overall view of your part. Select items for use in commands. Edit the parameters of objects in your part. Select and clear object check boxes to control their visibility. Use filters to customize what appears in the main panel and to show only the information that you want to see.

The expanded tree structure shows features that were used to create solid and sheet bodies, and you can view their parent features. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Datum Plane (6) Reference Sets Model Sheet Body Revolve (5) Revolve (5) Datum Coordinate System (0) Solid Body Extrude (2) Unite (4) Solid Body Extrude (3) Extrude (2) Sketch (1) PROFILE You can use the tree structure to view the following:

solid bodies sketches features dependent geometry

drawings user expressions quick checks

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

64 views

reference sets

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite Resource bar

Part Navigator must be open. Part Navigator tab

a. Timestamp order You can view the features in your work part in a timestamp order or by dependencies. The timestamp order is turned on by default. When the timestamp order is turned on:

All features in the work part appear in a history list of nodes in the order of their creation timestamp. You cannot expand or collapse feature nodes. You cannot view all node types.

Part Navigator Name Model History Datum Coordinate System (0) Sketch (1) PROFILE (1) Extrude (2) Extrude (3) Unite (4) Revolve (5) Datum Plane (6) Note The timestamp order view is not available in the History-free mode. When the timestamp order is turned off:

All bodies in the work part, along with their features and operations, are shown in the main panel. You can expand or collapse feature nodes. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Datum Plane (6) Reference Sets Model Sheet Body Revolve (5) Revolve (5) Datum Coordinate System (0) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Solid Body Extrude (2) Unite (4) Solid Body Extrude (3) Extrude (2) Sketch (1) PROFILE b. Switch between timestamp order view and design view

65

You can switch between the timestamp order view and the design view of the main panel of the Part Navigator . To enable the timestamp order view, do one of the following:

Choose ToolsPart NavigatorTimestamp Order. Right-click in the background of the Part Navigator or in the title bar, and select the Timestamp Order check box.

Find Current Feature Update to End Find Object... Clear Information Alerts Pack All Unpack All Timestamp Order . . .

To enable the design view, do one of the following: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


66

Choose ToolsPart Navigator and turn off Timestamp Order. Right-click in the background of the Part Navigator or in the title bar and clear theTimestamp Order check box.

c. Displaying items in the Part Navigator Displaying items


All bodies in the work part, with their features and operations, are displayed in the main panel. You can expand or collapse feature nodes. You can select or clear a red check box to show or hide an item and its children.

You can select or clear the green check box to display or suppress features.

You can use the check box to apply global results to a group of features

d. Selecting and moving items in the Part Navigator When you select an item in the main panel it is highlighted in the graphics window. You can select the following nodes in the Part Navigator as input to an open command: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


67

Body features as body input. Curve features as curve input (if the Feature Curves selection intent rule is available). Body features as face input (if the Feature Faces selection intent rule is available). Body objects as face input (if the Body Faces selection intent rule is available).

When the Select Object option is active in a command, you can select the following objects in the Part Navigator:

Point features as point input, when Point is available on the Selection bar Type filter. Datum CSYS features as CSYS input, when CSYS is available on the Selection bar Type filter.

Moving items You can drag and drop objects in the Part Navigator to restructure the constituent parts of your model. You can do the following:

Move objects out of their respective folders and add them to the model, a group or reference set. Reorder features before or after another feature.

Packing You can consolidate all identical nodes in the Part Navigator under a single node. Items are packed by default in the Part Navigator Note

For packing, the nodes must be on the same layer, have the same name, and be of the same type. You cannot pack an node that can be expanded (a node that has a plus sign).

In this example, six unused point objects are packed as a single node. Unused Items Point x 6 Shortcut menus You can access part-specific shortcut menus by right-clicking either the background area or individual nodes. e. Node types The Part Navigator main panel shows your model in a tree structure of nodes. The main nodes are show below. Part Navigator - Main Nodes History Mode /

Shows the current Modeling mode. You can right-click to change between History Mode and History-Free Mode.

History-Free See Modeling modes for details. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Mode Model History


68

Lists the features in the model in the historical order of their creation timestamps. This node appears only in History Mode and the timestamp order view.

See Timestamp Order for details. Model


Shows components of each model reference set. Solids and sheets shown are those that belong to that model reference set. This node does not appear in the timestamp order view.

See Model node for details. Reference Sets


Shows the reference sets for the part. This node does not appear in the timestamp order view.

See Reference Sets node for details. User Expressions

Shows user expressions that you have created in your model. Note You must create the expressions by choosing ToolsExpressions. The expressions that you created without using this method do not appear in this node.

See User Expressions node for details. Groups Unused Items


Shows groups that you have created in your model. Shows the construction geometry that is not part of, or associated with, a solid model in the part. This node does not appear in the timestamp order view.

See Unused Items node for details. Checks

Shows the check requirements and quick checks that you perform on objects.

See Checks node for details. Model Views

Creates and sorts your defined views and view sets.

See Model Views for details. Measures

Displays measurements you that have defined, along with their type, such as, distance, length, and angle, and the timestamp.

See Measures node for details. Cameras

Lists the available cameras.

For details on how cameras relate to the Modeling view, see Modeling View. Drawing

Displays drafting objects in your model, such as drawings or drafting views. The Drawing node is also known as the Drawing Navigator.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING See the Drafting Help for more information. Part Navigator - Object Nodes Sheet

69

Displays a drawing sheet in a model. This node is found in the Drawing Navigator. Displays a user-defined collection of views under the Model Views node. Displays a solid body within a model. This node is found in the Model node. Displays an expression in the model. This expression is displayed whether or not the expression affects any feature in the model. This node is found under the User Expression node. Displays a feature in your model. Displays a sketch in your model. If your sketch has groups, they are displayed here. Displays promoted bodies. Promoted bodies belong to components of the work part and not to the work part itself, so they cannot be referenced by groups or reference sets in the work part. The promoted bodies are displayed using a promotions icon. You can group promoted bodies.

View Set Solid Body

Expression

Feature Sketch

Promoted Body

Model node The Model node shows objects that belong to the 'model' reference set and their construction hierarchy. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Datum Plane (6) Reference Sets Model Sheet Body Revolve (5) Revolve (5) Datum Coordinate System (0) Solid Body Extrude (2) Unite (4) Solid Body Extrude (3) Extrude (2) Sketch (1) PROFILE drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


70

Datums, curves and positioning dimensions also appear in the Model node. Boolean operations display as features on the target body, with the tool bodies under the Boolean node and their construction history under their body nodes. Solid and sheet bodies can appear under other features if the solid or one of its edges or faces is referenced by that feature.

Unused Items node The Unused Items folder in the Part Navigator shows construction geometry that is not associated with a solid model. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Fixed Datum Plane (11) Fixed Datum Plane (12) Datum Coordinate System (15) Line Line (17) Lightweight Body

Legacy parts may show nearly all of their objects in the Unused Items folder. You can drag and drop items from the Unused Items folder to reference sets or groups, as necessary.

Reference Sets node The Reference Sets folder in the Part Navigator shows reference sets in the model. Part Navigator Name Reference Sets Lightweight Lightweight Body Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Reference Set CONST_GEOM Datum Plane (41) Datum Plane (40) Edit Show at Top Level Filter Delete Rename Properties

On the shortcut list, Show at Top Level moves reference sets from the Reference Sets node to the top level of the tree.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Show at Top Level Part Navigator Name Reference Sets Lightweight Lightweight Body Model Solid Body Reference Set 1 Show at Top Level Part Navigator Name Reference Sets Lightweight Lightweight Body Model Solid Body Reference Set 1

71

Clear Show at Top Level to move them back. Note The Reference Sets folder is not available in Timestamp Order. User Expressions node The User Expressions folder in the Part Navigator shows user expressions you have defined in your model. Part Navigator Name User Expressions D=N/P Hole_Dia=20 Key_length=2.5 Key_width=3.2 N=40 P=0.6 T=D*Sin(90/N) Thickness=10 hub_dia=35 hub_height=3.8 hub_offset=-((hub_dia-Hole_dia)/2) length=(hole_dia/2)+Key_length You can:

Double-click on an item, or right-click and select Edit, to edit an expression. Right-click and select Edit in Expression Editor to edit measurements and formulas. Right-click and select Rename to rename an expression.

Checks node The Checks folder in the Part Navigator shows requirements checks, quick check items, and their status. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING In this example, two checks were created using the Check Requirements validation tool. Part Navigator Name Checks Length.A Mass.p92.A

72

When the check meets the requirement, its icon has a green check. When the check does not meet the requirement, its icon has a red X.

See the Check Requirements Help or Quick Check Help for more information. Measures node The Part Navigator shows measurements in the Measures node. If you have defined measurements in your model, their types are shown (that is, Distance, Length, Angle), followed by their timestamp. Part Navigator Name Measures Distance Measurement (15) Length Measurement (16) Face Measurement (17) Arc Radius Measurement (18) You can edit a measurement in any one of the following methods:

Right-click and select Edit Parameters. Double-clicking on the node. Editing it in the Details panel. Editing it in the Expression dialog box.

Use the shortcut menu to perform other actions on measures, such as rename, copy, or reorder. Note Editing a feature with an embedded measure may give unexpected results. If downstream features modify geometry that has been used for measurement, the Part Navigator will show the value at the current timestamp. Upon accepting the measurement, the correct value is calculated at the timestamp of the edited feature. f. Edit feature parameters in the Part Navigator There are several ways to select and edit existing features directly in the Part Navigator. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Edit feature parameters in the main panel Do one of the following:

73

Double-click a feature in the tree list to open the feature's dialog box. Select a feature in the tree list, right-click and choose Edit Parameters or Edit with Rollback.

Edit expressions in the main panel To edit an expression

Double-click a user-defined expression in the User Expressions folder, or right-click the expression and choose Edit.

To edit all measurement and formulas

Right-click and choose Edit in Expression Editor.

To rename an expression

Right-click and choose Rename.

Edit parameters in the Details panel 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a feature item in the main panel. Open the Details panel to see the feature's expression parameters. Double-click an expression you want to change. Type a new parameter value and press Enter. Note For more information about editing values in the details panel, see Edit parameter values in the Details panel. g. Check boxes in the Part Navigator Red check box

Indicates the current Show/Hide status. o Select the red check box of an item to show it. o Clear the red check box to hide an item and its children.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

74

Not available when Timestamp Order is active.

Green check box


Only features have a green check box. The green check box enables, or disables suppression. o Select the green check box to unsuppress the feature. o Clear the green check box to suppress the feature.

h. Parent and child relationships in Part Navigator The different text colors for objects displayed in the Part Navigator indicate both their parent/child relationships and their Show/Hide status. Color Object relationship Red Parent Blue Child Gray Hidden drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


75

See Part Navigator Properties dialog box options for more information. For details on how to assign parent/child colors, see Change parent and child font colors in the Part Navigator.

You can also specify font colors by using Customer Defaults. Choose FileUtilitiesCustomer DefaultsGatewayPart Navigator to specify colors. i. Part Navigator column names and icons The Part Navigator comes with a standard set of columns. You can display or hide columns. except for the Name. You can reorder the columns, and add columns. For details, see Configure Part Navigator columns. Column name Name Description Shows the name of each feature in the work part. Note You cannot hide, or reorder, the Name column. The icon next to the name of the feature shows the type of feature and an icon shows the current state of the feature. If there is a detailed status message for the feature, it is displayed in the Status column (No text in the Status column) This is the normal state for a feature node. Suppressed Appears if you suppress a feature by clearing its check box, or by choosing EditFeatureSuppress. Suppressed by Expression Appears when you control a feature's suppression using an expression. See Suppress by Expression. If you suppress a feature using the Suppress by Expression dialog box, an equal sign appears over the feature's dotted check box. Modified Appears when you modify a feature and Delayed Update After Edit is selected. Inactive Indicates inactive features. When you make a feature current (see Make Current Feature), nodes listed after drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING that feature become inactive. Update Failed Indicates the feature that failed to be updated. Failed Inactive Indicates an inactive feature that failed to be updated. Active Wave Indicates a WAVE link that is active and can be updated. Inactive Wave

76

Indicates a WAVE link that is broken. This status can change to Active WAVE if the link is later restored. Displayed Indicates the currently displayed view in the Model Views node. Unloaded Appears in the Drawing Navigator when assembly components are not loaded. Out of Date Indicates features that have been rendered out-of-date. See the following description for Out of Date. Alive Indicates that the node is active. Missing Parents Indicates an unparented datum CSYS. See Datum CSYS editing tips for details. Broken Links Indicates that the linked feature is a broken link. Feature Type Shows the system name for a feature. Timestamp Shows the timestamp number of each object or feature. Objects with no timestamp are sorted as if their timestamp number is less than zero. Indicates the layer on which the feature resides. Displays a message regarding the current condition of the feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Layer Status

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


77

The message provides some detail to the status icon that appears next to the feature name. For sketches, the current constraint status appears. See Name for more information.

Out of Date

Indicates features that have been rendered out-of-date.


A feature may become out-of-date if a part on which it depends is frozen. Freezing parts, or otherwise delaying their updating, may be useful if you want to update them at a later time.

Created Modified Comment

Shows the creation date of the feature. Shows the modification date of the feature. Shows the feature's Comment attribute.

Adding comments and attributes to individual features lets you clarify their use, and adds to the overall display information. For details, see Add a comment for an object.

Requirement Refers to an index number that is applied to tolerances. ID You can change this to any unique number. See the Tolerance Feature Editor in the Product and Manufacturing Information Help. Value Used by the Product Definition Editor.

See the Product Definition Editor in the Product and Manufacturing Information Help.

Created By Shows the user name of the person who created the feature. Modified By Shows the user name of the person who modified the feature. Lists informational or pertinent messages that display while creating or editing features. Alerts Alerts are temporary and appear only once with the initiating event and usually disappear following another action, such as a Playback or a subsequent edit, even when the condition that caused the alert message remains. Displays the name of the part file in which the feature is created. Part Name j. Add a comment for an object You can add a comment for an individual feature or object in the Comment column of the Part Navigator. You can also edit the comments. To add a comment to an object or feature: 1. Select the object or feature in either the graphics window or the Part Navigator. 2. Right-click and choose Properties. 3. In the Properties dialog box, click the Feature Attributes tab. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

78

4. Create an attribute titled Comment of the required Type and enter values appropriate for the type. The value for an object or feature comment is displayed in the Part Navigator window under the Comment column. To edit the comment field in the Part Navigator: 1. Select the object or feature. 2. In the Comment column for the object, click to add or modify comments. k. Model Views Use the Model Views node in the Part Navigator to manage and organize the graphics views in your part.

Model views include the standard orthographic (canned) views. You can add your own user-defined views and view sets. You can filter all views using the standard system filters. You can make your own filters using Filter Settings. When you designate a view in a view set to be the base view, all the other views in that set update their orientations according to the base view's orientation. Part Navigator Name Model Views Back Bottom Front Isometric Left "Right Top Trimetric (Work) PMI Assembly Filters

Status

Displayed

Double-clicking a view in the Part Navigator switches the graphics window to that view and makes it the work view. If the Status column is enabled, it shows "Displayed" for the view currently active in the graphics window.

Model Views are especially useful with 3D annotations that depend on their view locations. Examples of 3D annotations are:

Dimensions Notes Symbols Geometric tolerance Product definition attribute display instances. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

79

Note To learn how to create and edit model views and view sets in the Part Navigator, see Model View procedures. Create a user-defined view You can create user-defined model views you can access to custom views using the Part Navigator. 1. Change the model view in the graphics window to the view you want. a. Double-click an existing model view to make it active in the graphics window. Part Navigator Name Model Views Back Bottom Front Isometric Left "Right Top (Work)

Double-click node to make it active

b. Change the configuration of the model in the graphics window as needed.

Original Top model view. The view you want to create. 2. Move the cursor over the Model Views node, right-click and choose Add View. Part Navigator Name Model Views Back Bottom Filter Add View Add View Set Visualization Preferences 3. Enter a new name for the view, or accept the default name, and press Return or Enter. The new view displays in the model views list and becomes the work view. Part Navigator drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Name Model Views Back Bottom Front Isometric Left "Right TOP_CLOSE_UP (Work) Top Trimetric PMI Assembly Filters Edit a user-defined view

80

1. Double-click the view you have defined to make it the active work view in the graphics window. Part Navigator Name Model Views Back Bottom Front Isometric Left "Right TOP_CLOSE_UP (Work) Top Trimetric PMI Assembly Filters 2. Change the view to the way you want it to appear.

Double-click view to make active.

Original user-defined view. Updated user-defined view to save. 3. Move the cursor over the selected view in the node list, right-click and select the Save option. Part Navigator Name Model Views Right-click, select Save.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Back Bottom Front Isometric Left "Right TOP_CLOSE_UP (Work) Save Top Reset Orientation Trimetric Copy PMI Assembly Filters Rename Properties

81

4. The view is updated with the new configuration. Note


o o

When you use Save you also create a preview object that is displayed in the Preview Panel when the view is selected. You can also rename the view using this procedure.

Create a view set A view set contains a list of interrelated orthographic views. 1. Orient and configure the view in the active graphics window to conform to the way you want the base view to appear for the new view set.

2. Right-click the Model Views node and choose Add View Set.

Find Current Feature drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Add View Add View Set... . . . 3. In the View Set dialog box, in the Name field, type a new name for the view set. 4. From the Base View list, select the view you want to be the base view. The base view determines how the other views relate to it and each other.

82

5. From the Add Views list, select the check box of each standard view that you want to add to the view set.

6. Click OK to create the view set. The view set is created, the base view becomes the work view, and the new view set is added to the Model Views node list. Part Navigator Name Model Views View Set SET_1 SET_1_TOP (Base, Work) SET_1_FRONT SET_1_BOTTOM SET_1_TRIMETRIC Example

Normal Top view.

Rotated Right view will be base Top view in new view set.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

83

View set: Top (Right), Front, Bottom, Trimetric Edit a view set Add views to a view set 1. Double-click the view set to which you want to add views. The View Set dialog box for that view set is displayed. 2. From the Add Views list, select the check boxes of the views you want. 3. Click OK to complete the changes to the view set. Note You can also right-click and choose Edit on the view set to open the View Set dialog box. Remove a view from a view set 1. Select the view in the view set that you want to remove. 2. Right-click and choose Delete to remove the view. Change the base view of a view set 1. With the view set list expanded, select the view in the view set that you want to make the base view. 2. Right-click and choose Make Base View. Change the orientation of the base view 1. Double-click the base view in the view set to make it the work view. 2. Change the orientation using standard view options, such as Rotate, or Orient View. 3. Right-click the view and choose Save. The base view now has the new orientation and the other views in the set are aligned accordingly. Rename user-defined views and view sets 1. Select the user-defined view or view set you want to rename. 2. Right-click the name and choose Rename. 3. Enter a new name and press Return or Enter. Note You can also click the name and rename the view or view set. Copy and paste views and view sets 1. Select a view or view set you want to copy. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 2. Right-click and choose Copy or choose EditCopy. 3. Right-click the Model Views and choose Paste or choose EditPaste.

84

A copy of the view or view set appears in the model views node list with an appended number next to the original name. To rename the pasted view, see Rename user-defined views and view sets. Delete user-defined views and view sets 1. Select a user-defined view or view set you want to delete. 2. Right-click and choose Delete or choose EditDelete.

3. Dependencies panel
Use the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator to:

View the parent and child relationships of feature geometry within your part. Investigate the potential impacts of a planned modification to your part. Select features and feature geometry to highlight them in the graphics window.

To see the dependencies of a feature, select it in the main panel of the Part Navigator, in the graphics window or by another selection method. The dependencies are shown in the Parents and Children folders.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

85

Dependencies Extrude (4) Children Solid Body Extrude (3) Parents Section Chain 1 Feature Curves Seed Sketch (4) SKETCH_001 Sketch Plane Face Face of Extrude (3) Chained Objects Loops Loop 1 (Closed) Direction Sketch (4) SKETCH_001 The Dependencies panel does not show dependencies for multiple selections. Where do I find it?

Prerequisite Resource bar Location in navigator

Part Navigator must be open. Part Navigator tab Expand the Dependencies group.

a. Dependency types Depending on specific interaction with the model, different dependency types are displayed in the Dependencies panel of the Part Navigator. Datum Coordinate System With Detailed View Dependencies panel. selected, information about the datum coordinate system is displayed in the

Dependencies Datum Coordinate System (10) Children Datum Axis (10) Datum Axis (10) Datum Axis (10) Datum Plane (10) Datum Plane (10) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Datum Plane (10) Point Datum Coordinate System (10) Parents Boolean The type of Boolean used to create solid bodies is shown in the Dependencies panel. The Detailed View shows the Targets and Tools used for creating the Boolean feature. Dependencies Subtract (14) Children Solid Body Extrude (13) Parents Targets Solid Body Extrude (13) Extrude (13) Tools Solid Body Revolve (11) Revolve (11) Selection Intent Selection Intent rules are included in the Detailed View of the Dependencies panel.

86

Dependencies Sheet Body Extrude (18) Children Parents Extrude (18) Section Chain 1 - Generic Chain 2 - Feature Curves Chain 3- Connected Intersection Limits Start Line Line 3 End Line Line 4 Chained Objects Edge Edge of Block (4) Loops

Under Section, selection chains are represented as Chain 1-<type>, Chain-2-<type> and so on. Inside the Loops folder, loops are designated as Loop 1 (Closed), Loop 2 (Open) and so on. If Stop at Intersection is used as part of selection, the Start and End limits are shown in an Intersection Limits folder. Deselected objects of a selection chain are shown in a Removed Objects folder inside the Chain drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Dependencies Children Parents Section Chain 1- Feature Curves Seed Chained Objects Removed Objects Line Line21 The deselection intent is remembered during subsequent updates. Circular Dependencies You will see a circular dependency icon is in another feature. b. Dependencies panel options Option Detailed View

87

node when two features have linked geometry whose source

Description Use this option to see dependency details for a selected feature or object. Detailed View disabled Default mode. Shows dependencies of the same type of object as that selected: Features that depend on features. Bodies that depend on bodies. Components that depend on components. o The Parents folder shows only parent objects or features. o The Children folder shows only dependent objects or features.
o o

Dependencies Extrude (4) Children Unite (6) Parents Extrude (3) Fixed Datum Plane (0) Fixed Datum Axis (2)

Detailed View enabled o Enhanced mode showing more detailed dependencies. o Parents folder shows the object or feature geometry and the expressions that the selected object depends on. o The Children folder shows the descendant geometry that depend on the selected object. Dependencies Extrude (4) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Children Solid Body Extrude (3) Parents Section Chain 1 Feature Curves Seed Sketch (4) SKETCH_001 Sketch Plane Face Face of Extrude (3) Chained Objects Loops Loop 1 (Closed) Direction Sketch (4) SKETCH_001

88

Use the Forward option in the following cases: Forward


When you have used the Back option, use the Forward option to return to your previous selection. When the panel does not show the dependencies of the current selection, the Forward option updates the panel. Resets the panel to the previous display and selection. You can use the Back option for up to 10 selections. Expands unexpanded children one more level. Does not open the Parents and Children folders themselves. Does not show duplicate information. If more than one node represents the same object in a folder, then only one node is expanded.

Back

Expand Next Level

4. Details panel
Use the Details panel in the Part Navigator to view and edit the feature and positioning parameters that belong to the currently selected feature. There are three columns: Parameter, Value, and Expression. You can sort the panel by any of the columns. Details Parameter Taper Angle Start Distance End Distance First Offset Value 0.000 [degrees] 0.000 [mm] 3.800 [mm] 0.000 [mm] Expression p16=0 p17=0 p18=hub_height p19=0

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Second Offset Boolean


89 6.150 [mm] Unite p20=hub_offset

Only parameters for a single feature are shown in the Details panel. If a feature is suppressed by an expression, the suppression expression is also displayed. You can export the contents of the Details panel to a browser or spreadsheet.

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite Resource bar Location in navigator

Part Navigator must be open. Part Navigator tab Expand the Details group.

a. Edit parameter values in the Details panel You can edit some parameter values in the Details panel if you are in the Modeling application: 1. In the Details panel, select the expression to be edited. The row for the parameter value highlights. 2. Use one of two ways to edit the value: o Edit the value directly in the Details panel: a. Double-click the parameter. b. Change the value of the parameter. c. Press the Enter key. o Edit the parameter in the Expressions dialog box: a. In the Details panel, right-click the parameters and choose Edit in Expression Editor. The Expressions dialog box opens with the expression highlighted. b. Enter a new value for the expression in the Formula field. c. Click OK. The new value for the expression triggers an immediate update. Tip

It is more efficient to use the Expressions dialog box if you are changing several expressions at a time. Editing of expressions does not support Delayed Update on Edit.

b. Details panel options Option Edit Description Highlights the parameter expression value and enters edit mode, letting you drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

90

Edit in Expression Editor Rename Export to Browser

change it directly in the Details panel. Opens the Expressions dialog box, where you can assign a new parameter value to the expression. Lets you change the name of the parameter expression. Export the contents of the Details panel display to the HTML browser defined for your computer:

If a browser is already running, the contents of the Details panel display appear in its window. If no HTML browser is running, your default browser is started. Exports the contents of the Details panel to a spreadsheet. You can use the spreadsheet tools to help analyze or publish the data.

Export to Spreadsheet

5. Preview panel
The Preview panel in the Part Navigator displays images of applicable preview objects. You can open and close this panel by clicking on its name. Examples of preview objects:

Model Views saved in the Part Navigator Preview

Drawing Sheets Preview

Where do I find it?

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

91

Prerequisite Resource bar Location in navigator

Part Navigator must be open. Part Navigator tab Expand the Preview group.

a. Create a preview of a model work view

In the main panel of the Part Navigator, right-click the work view and choose Save. Part Navigator Name Model Views Back Bottom Front Isometric Left "Right Top Trimetric (Work) Save Reset Orientation Copy Rename Properties

When you select that view node, the preview is displayed in the Preview Panel. Preview

Note Additional options for Model View previews are available on the Preview tab when you choose FileProperties.

6. Filters
Filters let you simplify the information that appears in the Part Navigator main panel. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING You can use filters to do the following:


92

Remove the features from display that you are not interested in. For example, construction geometry. Display only the feature types that you want to see. For example, extruded features in a complex model.

There are two types of filters that you can use:


System filters User-defined filters that you can create using the Filters dialog box options.

When a filter has been applied and is active in the Part Navigator, the Name label on the title bar changes to Name (filtered). You can see if any filters are affecting the current display of the Part Navigator main panel. Part Navigator Name (filtered) Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Extruded (0) Extruded (12) Where do I find it? Toolbar Menu Part NavigatorFilter Settings and Apply Filter

ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings and Apply Filter Right-click (on object) Filter (System filters)

Location in navigator a. System filters

Right-click (in Name banner) Filter Settings (User-defined filters)

System filters provide the ability to remove collections of general types of objects from the display in the Part Navigator. When you right-click on an object in the Part Navigator and choose Filter from the shortcut menu, you have access to the following system filters: Remove All of Type Remove All of This Category Remove All Selected Features Remove All Other Types Remove All of Other Categories Remove All Above Timestamp Remove All Below Timestamp

Object collection filters

Timestamp filters

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING This example shows the Remove All Other Types system filter. The first Extruded feature is selected. Part Navigator Name Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Extruded (0) Unite (2) Subtract (4) Subtract (6) Cone (9) Edge Blend (10) Extruded (12)

93

When you right-click and choose FilterRemove All Other Types, all other features other than extruded features are filtered out of the main panel of the Part Navigator: Part Navigator Name (filtered) Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Extruded (0) Extruded (12) If there are filters that affect the current display of the Part Navigator, you see filtered next to Name. You can use the arrow allows for sorting from top to bottom or bottom to top . After a filter is applied, you can right-click anywhere in a blank area in the Part Navigator and clear the Apply Filter check box in the shortcut menu to return to an unfiltered state. Apply Filter Delete Last Filter Remove Top Nodes Use Filter Filter Settings Part Navigator Name Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Extruded (0) Unite (2) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Subtract (4) Subtract (6) Cone (9) Edge Blend (10) Extruded (12) b. User-defined filters You can create user-defined filters for the Part Navigator using the Filters dialog box. You can access the Filters dialog box in one of these ways:

94

From the main menu by choosing ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings. From the Part Navigator toolbar by clicking Filter Settings . Using the shortcut menu in the Part Navigator by right-clicking a blank area or the Name banner and choosing Filter Settings.

The Filters dialog box has two tabs. Current tab You can specify a filter based on the inclusion or exclusion of any combination of the following types of geometry or data. The filter is available only during your current session unless you save it.

Information Category Name Attribute Selected Major Object

Feature Category Feature Type State Timestamp

Model Views PMI Alerts

Include includes a specified geometry/data type to a filter. Exclude excludes a specified geometry/data type to a filter. Save saves the specified filter. In the following example, a filter was created to filter out all but Rectangular Arrays from the Part Navigator display. Everything Datums Sketches All of type Circular Array All of type Instance All of type Edge Blend All of type Extruded Form Features drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING The Part Navigator is updated to reflect the effects of the filter. Part Navigator Name (filtered) Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Rectangular Array (10) Rectangular Array (12) Rectangular Array (14) Rectangular Array (16) Saved tab

95

After you define a filter, name it and save it, it appears on the list of saved filters on the Saved tab: Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features rect_array_filter From the Saved tab, you can apply or delete a saved filter. c. Create and save a filter In the following example, a filter is created to isolate just the Rectangular Arrays in a model. 1. Choose Tools Part Navigator Filter Settings, or right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator and select Filter Settings. 2. In the Filters dialog box, in the Current tab, from the Add Filter By list, select Feature Type. 3. Specify all objects other than Rectangular Arrays to exclude using the menu list that appears below the Add Filter By option. Circular Array 4. Click Exclude to specify objects to be excluded.

The definition appears in the list box. Saved Current Everything All of type Circular Array 5. Repeat this process until all objects other than Rectangular Arrays have be excluded. Saved Current Everything All of type Circular Array drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING All of type Datum Plane All of type Edge Blend All of type Instance All of type Extruded All of type Rectangular Pocket 6. The Part Navigator is automatically updated according to the specified filter. Part Navigator Name (filtered)

96

Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Rectangular Array (10) Rectangular Array (12) Rectangular Array (14) Rectangular Array (16) Caution The definitions of the filters are applied from top to bottom, which means that the definitions lower in the list may override the definitions higher in the list.

8. Click Save.

to copy the filter for later use.

The Saved tab is displayed with default filters and any filters filed with the part. The new filter appears in the list with a default name. 9. (Optional) Rename the saved filter. Current Saved

Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features rect_array_filter 10. Applying any filter from the Saved tab makes that filter current so the Current page filter list box is updated with this filter's definitions. d. Apply a filter You can apply the filters to control the display of items in the Part Navigator. Apply a system filter 1. In the Part Navigator, select the object. 2. Right-click the object and choose Filter. 3. Select a system filter from the list. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Remove All of Type Remove All of This Category Remove All Selected Features Remove All Other Types Remove All of Other Categories Remove All Above Timestamp Remove All Below Timestamp Apply a user-defined filter

97

Object collection filters

Timestamp filters

1. Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Use Filter from the shortcut menu. 2. Select the filter from the list of defined filters. Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features rect_array_filter hole_pattern_filter Apply a saved filter from the Filters dialog box 1. Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings to open the Filters dialog box. 2. Click the Saved tab. 3. Select the required filter from the list. Current Saved Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features rect_array_filter 4. Click Apply. Part Navigator Name (filtered) Model Solid Body Extruded (0) Rectangular Array (10) Rectangular Array (12) Rectangular Array (14) Rectangular Array (16) The Filters dialog box displays the definitions of the newly-activated filter in the list box on the Current tab. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Saved Current Everything All of type Circular Array All of type Datum Plane All of type Edge Blend All of type Instance All of type Extruded All of type Rectangular Pocket Apply the current filter You can use Apply Filter to apply the last-used filter or the one that is currently active. Select the Apply Filter option in one of the following ways:

98

Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Apply Filter from the shortcut menu. Find Current Feature Update to End Find Object... Clear Information Alerts Pack All Unpack All Timestamp Order Apply Filter . .

Choose ToolsPart NavigatorApply Filter. Note You do not need to have the Part Navigator open to apply the filter.

e. Edit a filter 1. Open the Filters dialog box in one of these ways: o Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings from the shortcut menu. o Choose ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings. Note You can also edit a filter from the Saved tab.

2. To delete a definition in the filter, select it from the list and click Delete . 3. You can also add more definitions to your filter by specifying the Add Filter By options that you want, and then pressing Include New definitions appear in the list. You can insert new definitions above other selected definitions. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 , or Exclude .

[NX8 HELP] MODELING If nothing is selected, the new definition is placed at the bottom of the list. 4. You can move a selected definition higher or lower in the list using Up Note Definitions are applied from the top to the bottom in the list. f. Rename a filter

99

, and Down

1. Open the Filters dialog box in one of these ways: o Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings from the shortcut menu. o Choose ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings. 2. Click the Saved tab. 3. Click the name of the filter you want to rename. 4. Type a new name. 5. Press Enter or Return. g. Delete a filter 1. Open the Filters dialog box in one of these ways: o Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings from the shortcut menu. o Choose ToolsPart NavigatorFilter Settings. 2. Click the Saved tab. 3. Click the name of the filter in the list that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete . 5. (Optional) If you need to clear the filter from the Current tab: o Click the Current tab.
o

Click Clear Filter

h. Filters dialog box Current You can use the options in the Current tab of the Filters dialog box to create new Part Navigator filters, or you can edit existing filters. Current tab

Current filter definition list

Lists the definitions of the filter that you are creating, or the filter that you activate (from the Saved tab). Any modifications you make to the current filter does not affect saved filters. You cannot remove the Everything filter. This filter enables all definitions. You can edit the current list by including and excluding definitions from the Filter Settings dialog box. You can specify more than one definition for a filter. Moves the selected definition up in the list. If the Part Navigator is active, it is updated.

Up

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


100

Down

Moves the selected definition down in the list. If the Part Navigator is active, it is updated.

Deletes the selected definition. If the Part Navigator is active, it is updated.

Delete Warning You cannot undo a delete operation. Clear Filter Save Lets you specify the category of objects that you want to use in your filter. After you choose an option, additional options are available to further define the objects. The available options are: Information Category Choose from the following categories:

Removes all items from the filter, except Everything. Saves the filter with the current definitions.

Drawing (for Drafting nodes) Checks (for Quick Check feature nodes) User Expressions Model History (for Modeling nodes) Unused Items Reference Sets Model Views

Add Filter By Name Lets you enter a name (or the partial name with the wildcard symbol *) to include or exclude features with the same name or partial name. Attribute Creates a filter that will include or exclude features based on the specified attributes that you define. Selected Major Object Creates a filter based on objects that you select. Feature Category Lets you select from the following options: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


101 Datums Curves Sketches Solids All Features

Feature Type Creates a filter based on one of the types of features that is in your model.

State Displays the types you can choose from: Visible, Suppressed, Unsuppressed, Suppressed by Expression, and Failed. Timestamp Specifies a timestamp based on Greater Than or Lesser Than a certain timestamp. Example: You can define a filter of all features whose timestamp is greater than the timestamp you specified.

Model Views Lists filter the nodes under the Model Views root node. You can use the following object types: o Displayed (filters all model views that are currently displayed) o Non Displayed (filters all model views that are not currently displayed) o Canned (filters all canned views)

Option menus and fields

Fields vary, according to the Add Filter By option selected. Let you further specify the objects to be used in the definition. Adds the object types that you specified in the Add Filter By fields to the filter. The Part Navigator immediately updates to reflect the change in the filter, if it is active. Removes the object types that you specified in the Add Filter By fields to the filter. The Part Navigator immediately updates to reflect the change in the filter, if it is active.

Include

Exclude

i. Filters dialog box Saved You can apply filters to the Part Navigator by activating them from the Saved tab of the Filters dialog box. Saved tab Shows the existing filters in your part, both the default filters and those that you have created using the Save option on the Current tab. Saved filters list The default filters include:

Only Suppressed Features drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

102

No Suppressed Features

Up

Moves the selected filter up in the list.

Down Moves the selected filter down in the list. Applies the selected filter.

Apply

If the Part Navigator is open, the tree changes to show the effects of the filter. Activating a filter populates the list box on the Current filter page. Any changes you make to the Current filter do not affect the saved filters.

Deletes the selected filter. Delete Warning You cannot undo this delete operation. Once a filter definition is deleted, it cannot be recovered.

7. Part Navigator shortcut menus


Shortcut menus provide you accelerated access to the general commands when you choose ToolsPart Navigator or to specific commands of a selected feature. The general or feature commands are displayed in the shortcut menu depending on:

The location of your cursor in the Part Navigator when you right-click to display the shortcut menu. What you select in the Part Navigator tree.

The commands you see depend on whether you select one of more of the following:

Features Model Views PMI Expressions Cameras

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite

Part Navigator must be open. Right-click (in column header) shortcut menu (general options)

Location in navigator

Right-click (selected object) shortcut menu (specific options)

a. Access Part Navigator shortcut menus Access general shortcut menu commands

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

103

1. On the Resource bar, click Part Navigator . 2. With nothing selected in Part Navigator tree, and with the cursor over any column header (or in an empty area of the Part Navigator), right-click. The general shortcut menu appears.

Note Many of the commands on the general shortcut menu are also available when you choose ToolsPart Navigator. Access specific shortcut menu commands 1. On the Resource bar, click Part Navigator . 2. In the Part Navigator tree, select an item, and right-click. The shortcut menu containing specific commands for the item selected appears.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Feature shortcut menu commands The commands available in the feature shortcut menu depend on the following:

104

The feature you select. If you select more than one feature If Timestamp Order is on or off. If you are in History Mode or History-Free Mode. Description Opens the Feature Group dialog box to let you add and remove features from a feature group. See Feature Group procedures for more details. Available only with certain nodes, such as Model Views and Drawing. Lets you expand certain nodes so you can see the contents of sub-containers. A plus sign indicates that you can expand additional sub-containers. Available only with certain nodes, such as Model Views and Drawing. Lets you collapse certain nodes so you can see only the root node containers. Displays the parameter values of a selected feature. The values remain displayed until you refresh them. Lets you show or hide feature and body objects. Items that you hide are still displayed in the Part Navigator, but in a gray text font. Hide Parents Hides all parents (which can be displayed) of the selected feature. Show Parents Shows all the parents (which can be displayed) of the selected feature. Examples:
o o o

Command Add/Remove Members

Expand

Collapse

Display Dimensions Show/Hide

If the parent curve belongs to a sketch or feature curve, show all output curves of the sketch or feature curve. If the parent is an edge or face, show the solid that contains this edge or face. Only those commands applicable to the currently selected feature are available.

Note The Action on Show Parents in the Part Navigator customer default affects how this command reacts with objects on different layers. See Customer Defaults for more details. Set WCS at CSYS Make Current

Available for CSYS objects, Datum CSYS features, and their components. Lets you set the WCS at the CSYS or the CSYS of the Datum CSYS. The selected feature assumes the highest timestamp allowing you to insert a drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Feature


105 feature into your model at that point. All other features with higher timestamps than the selected feature's timestamp are made inactive. The selected feature and/or the feature's objects are always visible with this command. o Any hidden objects are now shown. o If they are on invisible or visible layers, the layer status is changed to selectable. This command is not available if Delayed Update after Edit is selected. Available for Boolean nodes only. The command reviews all the tools below the selected Boolean node, and makes the tool with the latest timestamp, the current node. The Make Current Tool Feature command is available whenever the Isolate Tool Body command is available.

Make Current Tool Feature

Extract Body Here Select Tool Features

Extracts an associative copy of the body as it exists following the selected feature (in time stamp order). Available for Boolean nodes only. Selects all the tool features of the selected Boolean including tools of all Booleans nested below the selected Boolean.

Changes the selection to include all the nodes with earlier timestamps than the Select Whole selected node of the same body. Branch Available for Boolean nodes only. Isolate Tool Body Reviews all the tools below the selected Boolean node, makes the tool with the latest timestamp, the current node, and displays only that body in the graphics window. Available only for single Boolean node selections. Bodies and Booleans

Available only when Timestamp Order is off. Displays only the selected body and the Boolean features of that body in the Part Navigator.

Filter

Lets you apply a system filter to the Part Navigator display tree.

System filters are based on the objects currently selected in the Part Navigator. These filters are context-specific, so only those that are applicable to the selected objects appear in the list.

Available commands for selected features in a body:

Remove All of Type Removes all occurrences of the type of feature selected. Example: If you use this command on a blend feature, all blend features are removed from the Part Navigator tree display.

Remove All of This Category Removes all occurrences of the category of drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING the selected feature. The categories are:


o o o o

106

Datums Curves Sketches Solids

Example: If you use this command on a blend feature, all Features of which blend is a part, are removed from the Part Navigator tree display.

Remove Selected Features Remove All Other Types Remove All of Other Categories Remove All Above Timestamp Remove All Below Timestamp Remove all Outside Range Available for multiple features selected in a body.

The following commands are available for selected root nodes:


Remove Item Remove All But Item Remove Non-Displayed Remove Displayed Available for the root node of Model Views only. Remove Canned Available for the root node of Model Views only. Opens the Edit Object Display dialog box, where you can change base display parameters for the selected object.

Edit Display

Edit Parameters Lets you edit the feature's parameters.


Enter the Edit Parameters mode for most features by double-clicking the feature. The selected feature and its parent objects are always visible during edit. If the objects are hidden, they are temporarily shown. If objects are on invisible or visible layers, they are temporarily moved to the work layer. If you change the display status of these objects during edit, the changes are retained. Objects that were unchanged during the edit are returned to their previous state. Reopens a feature's creation dialog box and rolls the model back to its condition just before the feature was applied. If you apply this command to a feature that follows the current feature, the model rolls forward to the insert point of that feature before editing. See Edit with Rollback for more details. Available only in History-free mode. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Edit with Rollback

Recreate

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

107 Recreates a feature using its original size or location parameters. Lets you edit the feature's positioning dimensions. This command works the same as the Edit Positioning Dimension function used to edit features. Lets you move reference sets out of the Reference Sets folder and to the top level of the tree. You can use the same command to move them back.

Edit Positioning

Show at Top Level

Suppress / Unsuppress

Suppresses, or unsuppresses the selected features.


You can perform the same function by clearing or selecting the green check boxes of selected features. When you choose Suppress, the feature is suppressed and an immediate update is done on the model. Note This command is not available if Delayed Update after Edit is selected.
o o

The check boxes for the suppressed feature and its children are cleared. The shortcut menu changes to Unsuppress, which you can use to unsuppress the feature.

Note When you unsuppress a feature, its children are not automatically unsuppressed. To unsuppress the children, you must select the feature's children, right-click and choose the Unsuppress command. These commands work the same as the Suppress and Unsuppress on the Edit Feature menu. Reorder Before / Lets you reorder the selected features before or after another feature. Reorder After Similar to the Reorder Feature command. A feature to be reordered is selected from the Reorder Before or Reorder After lists. If any selected features cannot be reordered, a warning message is displayed. When you use reorder, the timestamps of the affected features are changed. Note You can also reorder a feature by dragging it to the desired location in the Part Navigator. New Group Lets you create a new group consisting of the currently selected objects.

Not available in timestamp order mode. Groups are displayed as items in the Part Navigator tree. You can edit groups or the objects you add to them from elsewhere in the tree. You can add the same object to multiple groups. You can use the group property page (by choosing Properties on the shortcut menu) to specify that a group should appear at the top level in the tree of the Part Navigator. You can also include sketches in a group. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

108 See Group in the Managing a Part Help for more details Available for body nodes only. Expands the selected body to show all nested Boolean feature nodes. Show both the tool body node and first level tool features below the tool body node. Shows all the non-Boolean feature nodes that exist at only the first level below the selected body node. Available for bodies, datums, and curve features. Lets you move selected objects between layers.

Expand All

Move to Layer

Group

Lets you organize features into feature groups from within the Part Navigator.

Use this command on features selected in the Part Navigator to display the Feature Group dialog box. o Here you can add additional features. o You can provide a name for the new feature group. Feature groups are displayed as separate items in the Part Navigator tree. You can drag and drop items to add them in an existing feature group in the Part Navigator. You can select the Add/Remove Members command on the shortcut menu, to reopen the Feature Group dialog box and edit the feature group. See Feature Group for more information.

Replace

Lets you replace one or more features on a body with another set of features from other bodies in the part.

The children of the original features are reparented with the replacement features. This command is not available if Delayed Update after Edit is selected. See Replace Features of more details. Opens the User Defined Feature Library Browser to let you replace the selected user defined feature with one from the browser. See Editing a UDF in a part for more information.

Replace User Defined Feature

Variable Operations

You may see additional commands on the shortcut menu that are specific to the object type. For example:

If you select a datum plane, you may see Datum Plane Grid on the shortcut menu. If you select a solid body, you may see Assign Material on the shortcut menu.

Show/Hide Body Shows or hides the selected object. Cuts the selected object. Cut Copies the selected object (feature, view, view set, and so on) to the clipboard. Copy Lets you assign names of your choice to Rename o Features drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


o o o

109 Free form features User-defined views View sets. The new names replace system-assigned feature names, such as BLOCK(1), in Modeling dialog boxes. You cannot rename canned views.

Delete

Deletes the selected feature, user-defined view or view set.


If deleting a feature would break interpart links, a message appears to confirm or cancel the delete operation. You can click Information for more details about the links that the operation would break before deciding whether to continue or cancel the operation. See the Assemblies Help for more information about WAVE and interpart links. You cannot delete canned views, or work views.

Object Dependency Browser

Opens the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.


You can browse through information about the objects in the selected feature. You can choose to list either the child or parent objects, and you can get additional information about selected objects, including a list of the features that use them.

Information

Opens the Information window with data about the selected features.

This is the same data listed in the Feature Browser dialog box which opens when you choose InformationFeature.

Properties

Opens the Feature Properties dialog box.


You can add, edit, view and delete feature comments and attributes. Use the Properties dialog box to rename features and view the feature creation and modification information. If a view set or a model view is selected, this command opens the View Set Properties or the Modeling View Properties dialog box.

c. Model Views shortcut menu commands The commands you see depend on whether you right-click the Model Views node or you right-click a view. Command Add View Description Available only when the Model Views root node is selected. Creates a new user-defined model view based on what is currently displayed in the graphics window work view. Click the name of the new view to rename it. See Creating a User-Defined View for more information about user defined views drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Add View Set


110 Available only when the Model Views root node is selected. Opens the View Set dialog box where you can create a new user-defined model view set consisting of your own selected views. See Creating a View Set for more information about creating a view set.

Paste Visualization Preferences Edit

Pastes the view or view set from the clipboard to the Model Views node list. Opens the Visualization Preferences dialog box. Use this option to set the visualization preferences for the selected view.

Lets you edit an existing model view set. See Editing Model View Sets for more information about editing model view sets. Saves the selected view's orientation and parameters The selected view must be currently displayed in the graphics window. Reset Orientation uses the saved configuration to restore user-defined views to their saved state. A saved view can also be displayed in the Preview panel. Not available if the selected view is already the work view. Changes the view in the graphics window to the selected view and make it the work view. Not available if the selected view is not in a view set, or if it is already the base view. Lets you change the base view to the selected view within a view set.

Save

Make Work View

Make Base View

Opens the selected view in a new graphics window. Open in New Window Available only when the selected view is displayed in the graphics window. Reset Orientation Restores the orientation of the view in the graphics window to its saved configuration. For canned views, this command restores the view to its default orientation instead of the saved configuration. Navigate to Base View

Switches the view in the graphics window to the base view of a view set. Another member view of the view set other than the base view must already be displayed in the graphics window for this option to appear.

8. Part Navigator Properties dialog box


Use the Part Navigator Properties dialog box to change the appearance of the display panels of the Part Navigator. You can do the following:

Enable automatic scrolling. Assign different font colors for parent and child objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


111

Specify the name display preference. Reorder the columns that appear in the Part Navigator. Add or delete your own columns. Enable or disable the display of columns.

In the Part Navigator Properties dialog box, settings are organized under the General and Columns tabs.

The General tab deals with display properties of the Part Navigator, such as font color and name. The Columns tab allows you to add, delete, and manipulate Part Navigator columns.

Where do I find it? Prerequisite Location in navigator The Part Navigator must be open. Right-click (column header) Properties

a. Part Navigator Properties dialog box options The properties and settings of the Part Navigator are organized under the General and Columns tabs. General Tab Option Automatically Scroll to Selection

Description When selected, highlights that feature node in the listing window when you select a feature in the graphics window. You can set this option in the Customer Defaults dialog box for the Part Navigator Shows parent-child relationships of selected objects.

Font Colors

You can specify defaults for the colors and for the Font Colors options in the Customer Defaults dialog box for Part Navigator.

Name Display

Lets you specify what appears in the Name column of the Part Navigator for features that you have named. You can select from the following options:

System and User The Name column includes both the user-defined name and the feature type, such as SKETCH "CAR_DOOR_SKETCH". System Only The Name column shows only the feature type, such as SKETCH. User Replaces System The Name column shows only the user-defined name, such as "CAR_DOOR_SKETCH". If there is no user-defined name, the feature's type is shown.

Note Features that have no user-defined names are not affected by the Name Display option. For these features, only their type (along with the timestamp) is shown. Columns Tab Option Description drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Columns list


112 Displays a listing of available default column categories. You can select or clear corresponding column check boxes to include or exclude columns in the display.

Rearranges the display order of the columns. Move Up Move Down Delete Attribute

Deletes user-defined columns. Lets you name a user-defined column. User-created columns appear in the listing with a tag icon next to them. Any features with the same attribute name display their value for the attribute in that column. Creates the user-defined column.

Create b. Change the Part Navigator display settings 1. Move your cursor to a clear area or to the title row in the Part Navigator.

or

2. Right-click to open the shortcut menu. See General shortcut menu commands for more information.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


o

113

From the shortcut menu, choose Columns to select the columns that you want to display in the Part Navigator. See Configure Part Navigator columns for details about configuring columns.

Choose Properties to open the Part Navigator Properties dialog box and specify the options you want. See Part Navigator Properties dialog box options for more information about the Part Navigator properties.

c. Configure Part Navigator columns Use the Columns command in the shortcut menu to do the following:

Enable or disable the display of columns in the Part Navigator. Sort the entries in the Part Navigator by the attributes that appear in the columns.

1. With nothing selected, move the cursor to the title bar or to a clear area in the Part Navigator window, and right-click to open the shortcut menu.

2. Choose Columns from the shortcut menu. 3. Select the check box next to name of the column that you want to appear in the Part Navigator. Note To remove a column, clear the check box. 4. Add or remove each column as needed from the Part Navigator display. For a list of the standard column names, see Part Navigator column names and icons. You can disable the display for all column names except Name. Reordering columns Use the Part Navigator Properties dialog box to reorder the columns in the Part Navigator. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

114

1. Right-click the title bar, or a clear area in the Part Navigator. 2. From the shortcut menu, choose either ColumnsConfigure or click the PropertiesColumns tab to open the Part Navigator Properties dialog box.

3. Use Move Up

or Move Down

to reposition the selected column in the list.

d. Change parent and child font colors in the Part Navigator 1. Move the cursor to a clear area on the Part Navigator Main panel, or to the title row. 2. Right-click and choose Properties to open the Part Navigator Properties dialog box. 3. On the General tab, in the Font Colors section, specify the colors you want by clicking the color swatches for Parent Objects and Child Objects . Font Colors Parent Objects Child Objects 4. Click OK for the new font assignments to take effect immediately. Note You can disable the option of having different colors for parent and child objects by clearing the Parent Objects and Child Objects check boxes. e. Undock or dock the Part Navigator Undock the Part Navigator Do one of the following:

Double-click the Part Navigator tab on the Resource bar. Right-click the Part Navigator tab and choose Undock.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

115

or

Dock the Part Navigator

Close the undocked window.

To dock the Part Navigator in different areas of the window: 1. Click the top black banner of the Part Navigator window and drag it to any edge of the screen. 2. Release to dock the Part Navigator.

Docked at top

Docked at right side

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING f. Customize the Part Navigator Resource bar To change how the Part Navigator works with the Resource bar:

116

1. Choose PreferencesUser Interface to open the User Interface Preferences dialog box. 2. Click the Layout tab. 3. In the Resource Bar group: o From the Display Resource Bar menu list, select the On Left or On Right option to specify the side of the session window on which you want the Resource bar to appear. o Select the Pages Automatically Fly Out check box to enable the Part Navigator to open and close automatically when you move the cursor over and off its selected tab on the Resource Bar. g. Customize Part Navigator X-Resources On non-Windows systems you can customize certain parts of the Part Navigator display that use X resources found in the Ugraf file. For details on examining and setting options in the Ugraf file, see the Graphics Configuration Guide for your workstation. To set the X resource for general background color for the Part Navigator:

Use the format: *Ugraf<release version #>Mnt*background; <color>. Example: *Ugraf600*Mnt*background: LightSteelBlue (version 6.0.0 used in example).

To set the X resource for the color of the lines drawn between the features in the Part Navigator:

Use the format: Ugraf<release version #>*Mnt*treeForeground: <color>. Example: *Ugraf600*Mnt*treeForeground: White (version 6.0.0 used in example).

Note Customization on Windows is done using the Customer Defaults and entries in the Windows registry.

G.

Update

Commands on the ToolsUpdate menu let you adjust how an update may occur. Generally, you can trigger an update of the model anytime you edit its features. The update starts at the current feature and continues until the model is complete, or until a feature fails to update. If a feature fails to update and the Modeling preference Edit During Update Dialog Appears on is specified, the update halts and the Edit During Update dialog box opens, giving you the opportunity to correct the cause of the error. Note You can open the Edit During Update dialog box directly from the EditFeaturePlayback command.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

117

1. Update menu options


Interpart Update Delays the updating of all interpart objects (that is, interpart extractions, interpart expressions, and mating conditions) until you trigger an update with the Update All command. See WAVE in the Assemblies help for more details. Resumes update of the interpart child objects after it was suspended by an Interpart Update command. See WAVE in the Assemblies help for more details. Update for External Change Updates the model with changes introduced from an external data source. For example, if you changed feature parameters using an external spreadsheet (as with the ug_excel_read function in Knowledge Fusion), you can update those expressions using this command. Lets you specify when to update the display with your edits. When this command is selected you can perform as many edit operations as you want, but you cannot update the model until you choose the Update command. For example, you could move one feature and then edit the parameters of another, but not update either in the model until later. Delayed After Edit When this command is cleared, you can only perform one edit operation at a time before the system updates the display. For example, if you moved a feature, you would have to wait until the update is completed before you could perform another edit operation. Note You cannot suppress or unsuppress features when Delayed After Edit is selected. Updates the model with your previously made edits while Delayed After Edit is selected. Available only when Delayed After Edit is selected. Update Model Feature Replay manual options The following Feature Replay options are available from both the ToolsUpdate menu and the Feature Replay toolbar.

Update All

Feature Replay toolbar Note Feature Replay options work only for those features that appear in the Part Navigator.

Make First Feature Current

Makes the feature with the lowest timestamp number the current feature, and updates the model.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

118

Make Previous Feature Current

Makes the feature with the previous timestamp number than the current feature the new current feature, and updates the model.

Make Next Feature Current

Makes the feature with the next higher timestamp number than the current feature the new current feature, and updates the model.

Make Last Feature Current

Makes the feature with the highest timestamp number the current feature, and updates the model.

Make Next Boolean Current

Makes the next Boolean feature with a timestamp number higher than the current feature the new current feature, and updates the model.

Automatic Feature Replay

Opens the Automatic Feature Replay dialog box, where you can run an uninterrupted replay of the model.

2. Feature Replay
Use Feature Replay to review how features were used to construct a model. You can:

Manually step through the features of a model using the commands on the Feature Replay toolbar or ToolsUpdate menu. Play, pause, and select a starting feature for an uninterrupted replay of the model using the Automatic Feature Replay command. Set a time-interval for each step in an automatic replay. Review features for problems during a feature replay, and fix them if necessary. The feature on which you stop the replay automatically becomes the current feature.

Note Feature Replay is not a feature validation tool. Use the Playback command on the EditFeature menu for feature validation and correction. Where do I find it? Toolbar Feature Replay drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Prerequisite A feature must appear in the Part Navigator in order to step to it with Feature Replay.

[NX8 HELP] MODELING ToolsUpdate Make First Feature Current Make Previous Feature Current Make Next Feature Current Make Last Feature Current Make Next Boolean Current Automatic Feature Replay

119

Menu

a. Manually step through the features in a model 1. Access the Feature Replay commands through either of the following: o The Feature Replay toolbar. o The ToolsUpdate menu. 2. On the Feature Replay, click the command for the step you want (or choose it from the menu):
o o

Click Make First Feature Current Click Make Previous Feature Current feature. Click Make Next Feature Current Click Make Last Feature Current Click Make Previous Boolean Current

to go to the first feature. to go to the feature previous to the current to go to the feature after the current feature. to go to the last feature. to go to the next Boolean feature.

o o o

Note Each time you step to a different feature, that feature is made the current feature and the model updates. b. Review an uninterrupted replay of the features in a model 1. Access the Feature Replay commands through either of the following: o The Feature Replay toolbar. o The ToolsUpdate menu. 2. On the Feature Replay toolbar, click Automatic Feature Replay menu. The Automatic Feature Replay dialog box opens. 3. In the Replay Control group, in the Timestamp Number box, type the number of the timestamp for the feature on which you want to begin the replay. Alternately, move the slider to the desired feature timestamp. 4. In the Seconds between Steps box, type the number of seconds you want the replay to pause between steps. 5. Click Play to begin the replay. or choose it from the

Note If an update error occurs during feature playback, the replay may stop.

6. (Optional) Click Pause

to pause the replay. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING You can click Play again to resume the replay.

120

Note If you pause the replay, you can manually step through the model by changing the value of the Timestamp Number option. c. Automatic Feature Replay options Replay Control Starts or resumes play of a paused feature replay. Play Pauses a feature replay. The feature on which the replay stops becomes the current feature. Pause Specifies the timestamp number of the current feature. You can type a number in the box, or move the slider to the timestamp number of the feature from where you want to begin a replay. The feature for that timestamp number becomes the current feature, and the model updates accordingly. If you paused the replay, you can move the slider in sequential steps in timestamp order through the features of the model. Once the slider has focus, you can use the left and right keyboard arrow keys to do the same thing. Seconds Between Steps Specifies the number of seconds the replay pauses between each step of an automatic feature replay.

Timestamp Number

H.

Browser

Use the Browser graph view window to explore basic parent-child relations between features and their ancestor and descendant objects. Non-feature geometry, such as non-associative curve parents, are also included in the browser window. When you roll-over an object node in the Browser window it highlights in the graphics window, and if it is associative, in the Part Navigator.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

121

You can click an expression parameter in a feature reference node and edit its value directly in the browser window. You can explore the ancestors of a feature reference node and determine how they might be affected by an edit.

Where do I find it? Application Menu Modeling, Shape Studio InformationBrowser Right-click a featureBrowse Graphics window Right-click an expression Right-click a featureBrowse Part Navigator Right-click an expressionBrowse

1. Types of features you can browse


You can browse the following feature types in the Browser:

Body-based features Curve features Point features Datum features Sketch features

To interact with a node in the browser: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


122

Click a node to expand it. Right-click a node to display a shortcut menu. Double-click or right-click a node to edit it.

You can also browse non-feature relations.


Expressions (both feature expressions and user expressions) Non-feature geometry that has relations to a feature, such as a non-associative curve that is the parent of a feature

You can perform the following actions on geometry in the browser:


Hide a body (using Hide Body) Show parents Hide parents Show a body (using Show Body)

You can use the following commands on features in the browser:


Suppress Feature / Unsuppress Feature Replace Feature Make Current Feature / Make Current Tool Feature / Isolate Tool Body Delete Properties Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback

2. Browse and edit features on a revolve body

In this example we will browse a revolve body and edit both it and some of the features related to it.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 1.

123

In the graphics window, right-click Browse on the revolve feature. The Browser opens, centered on the revolve features reference node.

2. Open the settings pane by clicking the Settings caption in the lower left corner of the browser window.

3. In the settings pane, click the Browse tab.

4. In the Browse tab, select the Center on Select box.

5.

In the browser window, select the Pattern [Circular] feature reference node.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 6.

124

Click the input expand handle on the pattern feature reference to see its input items.

7.

Right-click the Angular Direction: Number of Copies expression and click Edit. An input box opens in the browser window.

8. Change the value in the input box to 6 and click the green check box. 9. Right-click the Angular Direction: Offset Angle expression and click Edit.

10. Change the value to 60 and click the green check box. The angle of the circular pattern updates. 11.

Click the section sketch of the revolve feature.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 12.

125 Click the expand handle, and then rightclick Edit on the input expression for the base vertical dimension.

13.

Change the value in the input box to 2 and click the green check box. The section and the revolve feature update to the new value.

3. Browse feature relations


In this example we will explore the feature relations between an edge blend and an extrude on which a pattern of countersunk holes has been built.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

126

1.

In the graphics window, move the cursor over Edge Blend (10) and when it highlights, right click Browse. The browser opens centered on the edge blends reference node, with its parent node expanded.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 2.

127

In the browser window, hover the cursor over the Pattern Face feature node. The Pattern Face feature highlights in the graphics window.

3. Click the parent node of the Pattern Face. The parent feature relations node opens.

4.

In the browser window, hover the cursor over Extrude (6). The Extrude (6) feature highlights in the graphics window.

The relation between Edge Blend (10), Pattern Face (8), and Extrude (6) can be seen to be sequential. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 5.

128

You can optionally edit the parameters of Extrude (6) by expanding its input node box and right-clicking its input items and choosing Edit.

6.

If the Browser becomes cluttered you can reorganize it from within the browse window:

Right-click and choose Rearrange. Right-click and choose Fit.

4. Types of features you can browse


You can browse the following feature types in the Browser:

Body-based features Curve features Point features Datum features Sketch features

To interact with a node in the browser:


Click a node to expand it. Right-click a node to display a shortcut menu. Double-click or right-click a node to edit it.

You can also browse non-feature relations.


Expressions (both feature expressions and user expressions) Non-feature geometry that has relations to a feature, such as a non-associative curve that is the parent of a feature

You can perform the following actions on geometry in the browser:


Hide a body (using Hide Body) Show parents Hide parents Show a body (using Show Body) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING You can use the following commands on features in the browser:

129

Suppress Feature / Unsuppress Feature Replace Feature Make Current Feature / Make Current Tool Feature / Isolate Tool Body Delete Properties Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback

5. Browser options

Graph view Use the graph view to explore feature relations in your part. You can:

Pan the graph view window by holding and dragging with the middle mouse button. Move any feature reference node in the browser window by dragging its name handle. Expand feature reference nodes by clicking their input items expand handle. Edit feature reference nodes by right-clicking and choosing edit from the context menu or by double-clicking.

Elements of a reference node:

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

130

Open parent nodes Input node name/handle Input node expressions Zoom slider

Input node expand Open child nodes

Suppression Input node items

Sets the scale of the view in the Browser window. You can also zoom the browser view using the mouse center wheel. Expression edit box Displays when you double-click an input expression. Lets you edit the value of an input expression. Graph view context menu options You can right-click and select any of the following options from the graph view window. Many of these options are also available in the Settings pane Rearrange Improves clarity and readability of the graph view window by reorganizing its contents and minimizing the number of crossconnectors. Fit Resizes the contents of the graph view window so all currently displayed feature reference nodes are visible. Isolate Displays only the currently highlighted feature reference node and its immediately adjacent parent and child nodes. You can also right-click Isolate on a node connector line to remove drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

131 adjacent connector lines and their references from the graph view window.

Isolate on Select Displays only the feature reference node you select, and its immediately adjacent parent and child nodes. Remove from Graph Temporarily deletes from the graph view window the currently highlighted feature reference node. Center on select Centers the graph view window on the feature reference nodes as you select them. Settings To open the Settings pane in the Browser window, click the Settings caption. Note You can also access most of the Settings pane options from the graph view window by rightclicking and choosing from the context menu. View tab Relation View Sets the view mode of the browser. All Relations Shows all parent and child relations of a feature. Timestamp Shows the order in the browser in which features are applied to a body. Show Expressions Displays the input expressions of an expanded feature reference node, and if Icon + Text is selected, their parameter values. You can edit the parameter value of an expression by double-clicking the expression. If this option is cleared, expressions do not display in the browser.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

132

Show Feature Groups Displays Feature Groups in the browser. Browse tab Node Style Lets you set the complexity of the graph view by adding or removing text from the nodes. Icon + Text Shows both icons and descriptive text for each node and parameter.

Icon Provides a more compact view by showing only icons for the node and parameter structure. In this node style you can still double-click nodes and expressions to edit them.

Isolate on Select Shows the selected feature reference node plus its immediate parents and children and hides all other nodes.

Contents of the selected feature reference node are expanded. Contents of the parent and child nodes are collapsed.

Automatically invoked when you initially select from the Part Navigator. You can also isolate a feature reference node by right-clicking and choosing Isolate. You can right-click and choose Isolate on a node connector line to remove adjacent connectors from the graph view window. Isolate is also available on the radial menu when you right click and hold on a drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING feature reference node. Center on Select

133

Pans or shifts the display so the selected feature reference node is centered in the graph view window. Automatically invoked when you initially select from the Part Navigator. Animate Simulates movement in the graph view window for certain operations, such as Fit, Center on Select, Isolate on Select, etc. Legend tab Includes a list of objects that can appear in the graph view window and their basic definitions.

I. Modeling Preferences
Once you set a Modeling preference, subsequently created objects default to it. Some settings can also be specified within certain Modeling command dialog boxes, and for some of those the new values may persist for them throughout the current NX session. Modeling preferences are always available during any Modeling operation. You can change settings while in the process of creating an object. Where do I find it? Application Menu Modeling PreferencesModeling

1. Modeling Preferences General


Specifies the way feature names appear in the Part Navigator and other dialog boxes. Select this option to show the names of features in the old, inconsistent style, usually in all capital characters and connected by underscores. Display Legacy Feature Names Clear this option to have the names of features display in plain, translatable text that matches the menu bar names. Here are some examples:
Plain text feature name Mirror Set Simple Hole Datum Coordinate System Legacy feature name MIRROR_SET SIMPLE_HOLE DATUM_CSYS

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

134

Specifies the default type of body created with certain commands, such as Extrude, Revolve, Through Curve Mesh, Through Curves, Section, Sew, and Ruled . Solid Sets the default body type to solid body. Body Type Note that, if it is not possible for the selected input geometry to produce a solid body with a given command, a sheet body is produced instead. Sheet Sets the default body type to sheet body.

Specifies the default modeling distance tolerance. Distance Tolerance This value is used throughout the Modeling application, such as when creating swept and revolved solid bodies and sectioning solid bodies. For example, when creating sheet bodies, the distance tolerance specifies the maximum allowable distance between corresponding points on the original surface and the resulting B-surface.

Specifies the default angle tolerance. Angle tolerance is the maximum allowable Angle Tolerance angle between the surface normals at corresponding points, or the maximum allowable angle between curve tangent vectors at corresponding points. Used by:

Optimize Curve

Ruled Through Curves Through Curve Mesh Sweep Along Guide Swept Section Surface Law Extension Surface Project Curve Intersection Curve Offset Curve in Face

This option optimizes the curve from which the developed or section curves are calculated. With this check box selected, the total allowable tolerance is obtained by multiplying the tolerances by the Optimize Curve Tolerance Factor. Optimize Curve Tolerance Factor Only available when the Optimize Curve check box is selected. This factor is multiplied by the tolerances to obtain the total allowable tolerance. Specifies the default density assigned to subsequently-created solid bodies in the current part. Density Note Use the Assign Solid Density command to change the density value of an existing solid body. Density Units Specifies the default density units assigned to subsequently-created solid bodies in drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING the current part. Available density units are:

135

Lb/Cu In (pounds per cubic inch) Lb/Cu Ft (pounds per cubic feet) G/Cu Cm (grams per cubic centimeter) Kg/Cu M (kilograms per cubic meters)

Changing the density units causes the system to recalculate the current density value based on the new units. You can still change the density value, if desired. Display Properties for New Geometry Parent Body Specifies that newly created faces use the display properties that are already assigned to the body to which the face is being added. When this preference is set to Parent Body, the following blend on a cylinder results in a new face with the same display properties as the body on which the face is created (right view).

New Face Properties from

If you want the display properties to be consistent within a body, choose this option. Part Default Specifies that newly created faces use the default display properties of the part, such as those set under Preferences Object. When this preference is set to Part Default , the following blend on a cylinder results in a blended surface with a different color than that of the cylinder (right view).

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

136

Target Body New face properties that result from Boolean operations are based on those of the target body. In the following figure, a Boolean Subtract operation takes place, with the tan cylinder as the target body and the blue block as the tool body. This results in two new faces that have the display properties of the target body (right view).

Boolean Face Properties from Tool Body New face properties that result from Boolean operations are based on those of the tool body. When this preference is set to Tool Body, the Subtract operation results in two new faces that have the display properties of the tool body (right view).

Extracted and

Specifies the source for the display properties of objects extracted and linked to an drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Linked Geometry assembly with the WAVE Geometry Linker . From Parent Object

137

Newly linked objects use the display properties from the parent object in the parent part. Part Default Newly linked objects use the default display properties of the target part, such as those set under Preferences Object. Specifies the number of grid curves in the U and V directions of the faces of the body you are creating. (You can add grid lines to any previously created sheet body or solid body by using EditObject Display command.) Unless U Count and V Count are both 0, the grid display is added to newly created b-surface, freeform, and swept faces. The grid curves are only a display feature. The number of grid curves does not affect the accuracy of the actual surface. However, if the grid counts are small, the surface may appear to be jagged. To obtain a smoother display, assign a larger number of grid curves. Grid Lines

These settings: Automatically Make Datums Internal to Child Sketches


Automatically make datums internal to their child sketches when possible. Automatically make sketches internal to their child features when possible.

Automatically Make Sketch The software automatically internalizes datums or sketches only when you create a Internal to Child child sketch or a child feature. You can still make datums or sketches external using Features the existing Part Navigator commands. The new settings will not cause datums and sketches to be internalized again when you edit the feature.

Internal datums and sketches do not appear in the Part Navigator, so you can use these settings to shorten the Model history for a part.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

138

2. Modeling Preferences Freeform


Curve Fit Method Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. If you need to transfer your spline data to another system that only supports degree 3 splines, you must use this option. Uses degree 5 splines. Curves created with the Quintic fit method have a smaller number of segments than those created with the Cubic fit method, and are therefore easier to edit by moving poles. The curvature distributions are smoother, and better replicate the curvature properties of the true curve. Provides greater control over the degree and segmentation of developed curves. Default values can be specified in the Advanced Rebuild Options. Use Advanced to create curves that are more suitable for styling related tasks, and use Cubic and Quintic for curves you want to be in tolerance. Advanced The Advanced option is available on certain feature edit dialogs when the Curve Fit Method is presented. The Maximum Degree and Maximum Segments settings (see Advanced Rebuild Options below) are also used by certain functions that use the Rebuild option when Curve Fit Method is set to Advanced. Advanced Rebuild Options Maximum Degree Maximum Segments Specifies the default maximum number of degrees to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves. Specifies the default maximum number of segments to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves.

Quintic

The software attempts to build the surface without segments until the number of degrees specified by the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. If tolerances cannot be met with the Maximum Degree, segments are added until the number set for Maximum Segments is reached. If the maximum degree and maximum segments combined still does not allow the tolerance to be met, the curve is created and a message displays stating that it does not meet the specified tolerance. Note Curve Fit Method only affects the result when the fitting curve must be an approximation. If the result can be exactly replicated by a spline of any degree, that spline will be created. Freeform Construction Result Controls free form feature creation for the Through Curves, Through Curve Mesh, Swept, and Ruled commands. When selected, and if the input geometry would produce a planar surface, a bounded plane is created instead. Plane Using bounded planes instead of B-surfaces (see below) may enhance the performance and reliability of downstream applications. When selected, always creates a B-surface. B-Surface A B-surface provides control of a surface's isoparametric curve or flowline data. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Animation

139

Controls surface animation functions in certain surface edit and Move Pole operations. You can change these settings at any time and see immediate results. Sets the resolution of the preview grid, either in shaded or wireframe mode. Choose from the following options to produce a preview grid that is respectively more detailed:

None Coarse Standard Fine Extra Fine Ultra Fine

The None setting shows no grid at all in wireframe mode.

Preview Resolution

Coarse preview grid

Fine preview grid Enable Trimmed Animation Use Enables animations of trimmed surfaces during certain surface create and edit operations, such as with Swoop, Law Extension surfaces, and Styled Blend. Enables display of a triangular mesh on surfaces during certain surface create and edit drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Triangular Mesh

140

operations, such as with Swoop, Law Extension surfaces, and Styled Blend.

Specifies whether the result you get when editing certain free form features remain as free form features or as unparameterized features. When selected, freeform features are created for the following edit commands: Snip Surface, Enlarge, Degree, Move Pole, Match Edge, Refit Face, Change Edge, Pole Smoothing, Isoparametric Trim/Divide, Xform, Deform Sheet, Stiffness, Transform, and Move Defining Point. Associative Freeform Editing Features created using X-Form, Move Defining Point, Move Pole, Deform Sheet, Transform, Isoparametric Trim/Divide, Change Edge, Degree, and Stiffness will only recall the result of the editing and not how it was created. Although you cannot edit these features using their creation parameters, the feature hierarchy remains in place, letting you return to the original shape by deleting or suppressing selected features. If this option is not selected, unparameterized features are created when using the edit commands shown above. Note that the Enlarge command disregards the Associative Freeform Editing setting If the Edit a Copy option is selected. Default Action on Spline Specifies the default editor to use when you double-click a spline. Note The setting for this option is effective only with a Shape Studio license. Studio Spline When selected, the Studio Spline command appears on double-clicking a spline. X-Form When selected, the X-Form command appears on double-clicking a spline.

Surface Extension Method Controls the quality of extended B-surface faces created or modified by some Synchronous Modeling commands, such as Move Face, Make Coplanar, and Linear Dimension. Surfaces are extended as linear tangent. Internal surface C0 or C1 knots or surface poles are added into the extended surface or adjacent surfaces to maintain body integrity. Linear Surfaces extended using Linear are usually less smooth and less aesthetically pleasing than those produced by the Soft setting. However, Linear has a higher success rate than the Soft setting, and can be useful in certain cases to avoid functional regressions in your model. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

141

Soft

Surfaces are extended smoothly as C2 curvature continuous. This option produces higher quality, smoother surfaces than that of the Linear option, with no unnecessary C0 knot and surface poles added.

3. Modeling Preferences Analysis


Pole and Polyline Display Specifies the color and font styles of B-curve poles and B-surface polylines. Pole Body Color When selected, the color is the same as that of the underlying body. Color Palette Pole Style Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. Specifies one of the following styles for B-curve poles:

Open Circle Filled Circle Plus Sign Cross

Polyline

Body Color Color Palette Polyline Font

When selected, the color is the same as that of the underlying body. Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. Specifies the line font for B-curve and B-surface polylines.

Edited Pole and Polyline Display Specifies the color and font styles of B-curve poles and B-surface polylines when they are being edited. Pole When selected, the color is the same as that of the underlying body. Body Color Color Palette Pole Style Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. Specifies one of the following styles for B-curve and B-surface poles when they are being edited:

3D Sphere Open Circle Filled Circle Plus Sign Cross

Polyline

Body Color Color Palette Polyline

When selected, the color of polylines being edited is the same as that of the underlying body. Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. Specifies the line font for B-curve and B-surface polylines when they drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Font are being edited.

142

Face Display Body Specifies the color and line font for grid lines and C0, C1, and C2 knot lines. You can choose Color / to inherit the color and/or the line font from the body that the face belongs to, or specify a color and/or line font for the grid line and knot line. Font Body Color When selected, inherits the color for the Grid Line, C0 Knot Line, C1 Knot Line, or C2 Knot Line from the body to which the face belongs. If the Body Color check box is not selected, you can choose a new color by clicking the color swatch. The color swatch is not available for any option with the Body Color check box selected. Font When selected, inherits the line font for the Grid Line, C0 Knot Line, C1 Knot Line, or C2 Knot Line from the body to which the face belongs. If the Font check box is not selected, you can choose a line font from the respective option list. The line font option list is not available for any option with the Font check box selected.

4. Modeling Preferences Edit


Edit Lets you switch the Modeling mode. The setting you select takes place immediately on clicking OK or Apply . You can select one of the following: Modeling Mode History HistoryFree The model is created and maintained using an ordered sequence of features that are displayed in the Part Navigator . The model is created and edited without an ordered sequence of features. There are local features, but they are not ordered.

For more information, see Modeling modes . Edit with Rollback Double-click Action (Features) Makes the selected feature the current feature and enters the edit mode. Edit Parameters drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

143 Enters the feature edit mode without changing the current feature.

Edit with Rollback Makes the selected sketch the current feature and enters the Sketch Task Environment. Edit Enters the direct sketch mode without changing the current feature. Direct Edit Lets you edit the sketch directly in Modeling. Edit Sketch Action Caution Direct Edit updates the model immediately. Select Task Environment if you have sketches with many dependent features. Task Environment Enters the Sketch Task Environment. Enables a warning message to appear when you attempt to delete a feature that has feature dependencies (for example, if you try to delete a feature that is used as a positioning reference by a second feature) Notify on Delete The message dialog box includes an option to open the Information window, where details on the features that will be deleted, along with other features that will be affected by the deletion, are listed. You can choose OK to continue the deletion, or Cancel to stop it. Controls whether you can see and edit internal sketch dimensions when the dialog box for the owning feature is open.

Double-click Action (Sketches)

Allow Editing of Dimensions of Internal Sketch

5. Modeling Preferences Update


Update Specifies how often the software sets internal update marks during feature creation and editing. A value of 5, for example, means that one mark is set after five features are created or edited. With these marks, updating can occur on only the most recent changes. Entire models no longer have to be updated, as required in earlier versions of NX. When you edit a feature, the software locates the nearest previous mark to that feature. In general, only features that were created or edited after that mark are updated. Occasionally, a few other features are also updated if they are directly associated to features created or edited after the mark. Note The smaller the value of Features/Mark, the fewer the number of features that are regenerated when you update the model. Smaller values, however, also place higher demands on memory and disk space. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Features/Mark

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

144 Lets you specify the rate at which the software dynamically updates the display of a body as its parent curves, splines, bridge curves, lines or arcs are changed. The display of the changing body is temporary until you complete the edit action, whereupon it becomes permanent. None Disables Dynamic Update during the edit of a body's parent curves. Continuous The dynamic update of a child body occurs continuously as you move the mouse while editing the parent curve. This setting renders a real time dynamic response from the graphics window when editing a body's parent curves. Use this setting when continuous dynamic updates do not excessively slow your system. Incremental The dynamic update of the child body occurs only when you stop moving the mouse while editing the parent curve (for example, while dragging a spline pole). Use this setting when continuous dynamic updates would excessively slow your system. When selected, Dynamic Update is effective for the following edit operations:

Dynamic Update

Editing splines with the Edit Pole and Edit Point commands. Editing line endpoints. Editing arc endpoints, radii or arc centers. Editing bridge curves.

There may be cases when a temporary body is dynamically displayed, for example through the editing of curves and bridge features with Edit Feature, and a warning message appears if the system is unsure that the body displayed is accurate. Note The temporary body displayed in Edit Curve through Edit Feature may not be the same as the final body if a Boolean operation was used to create the feature. In addition, in cases where features previous to the selected feature also require update, the temporary body will not be accurate. In these cases, warning messages will be generated. Note Dynamic updates are not performed when you edit body parameters from the Edit During Update dialog. Controls whether Dynamic Update affects the first level child bodies of the parent curve being edited, or all child bodies of the curve. Dynamic Children First Level Allows dynamic updates during edit to occur only for those features that are directly derived from the curve or curves being edited. First level drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

145 children are defined as the first bodies that can be derived from a curve, and are not hidden or do not lie on an invisible layer. All Level Allows dynamic updates during edit to occur for all features that are dependent on the curve or curves being edited. If Dynamic Update is set to None, the Dynamic Children setting is ignored by the software. Error Displays the Edit During Update dialog box when errors are encountered during feature playback. If you update or playback your part with this option selected, the Edit During Update dialog box appears if a failure is encountered. Features that are not updated due to model changes are marked with Update Failed in the Part Navigator so you know to edit them.

Edit During Update Dialog Appears on

Warnings Displays the Edit During Update dialog box when warning messages are generated during a part update or feature playback. Missing References Displays the Edit During Update dialog box appears when missing references are encountered during a part update or feature playback. Lets you do the following:

Make Current Feature on Error

Stop a part update when an error occurs. Make the problem feature the current feature in the Part Navigator so that you can correct the error.

You can edit, add, or remove features and then manually resume the update. Specifies whether the report window is displayed after: Generate Warning/Failure Report after Update

The software displays a warning during an update. New features fail to update.

J. Datum/Point View a topic


Datum Plane Datum Plane Grid Point Point Set

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


Datum Axis Datum CSYS Plane object

146

1. Datum Plane
Use the Datum Plane command to create a planar reference feature to help define other features, such as swept bodies and features at angles to the faces of target solids.

Datum planes can be relative or fixed. Relative datum planes Relative datum planes reference curves, faces, edges, points, and other datums. You can create relative datum planes across multiple bodies. Fixed datum planes Fixed datum planes do not reference other geometry. Use any of the relative datum plane methods to create fixed datum planes by clearing the Associative box in the Datum Plane dialog box. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Shortcut menu Modeling FeatureDatum/Point Drop-downDatum Plane InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane Right-click a planar faceDatum Plane

a. Create a datum plane using Infer In this example, NX determines how to create a datum plane based on the type of objects you select, as you select them. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 1. Click Datum Plane

147

2. From the Type list, select Inferred .

3.

Select the first linear edge to define the plane.

4.

Select the second linear edge to define the plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

148

5. Choose another command or click Apply.

b. Create a datum plane using offset This example shows how to create a datum plane that is offset from an inferred plane using two lines. 1. Click Datum Plane 2. From the Type list, select Inferred 3. .

Select the first linear edge to define the plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

149

4.

Select the second linear edge to define the plane.

5.

In the Offset group, select the Offset check box. Verify the direction of the desired offset.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 6.

150

Drag the direction arrow the desired value of the offset, or enter it in the offset Distance box.

7. Choose another command or click Apply.

c. Create a datum plane using a point and a direction In this example, NX creates a datum plane through a specified arc center and parallel to a selected planar face. 1. Click Datum Plane

2. From the Type list, select Point and Direction .

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3.

151

Select a point through which the datum plane must pass.

The arc center is selected.

4.

Click the middle mouse button to advance to the next step.

5.

Select a planar face.

6.

Choose another command or click Apply.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING d. Create a datum plane at an angle

152

The following example shows how to create a datum plane at an angle of 115 degrees from a reference plane. 1. Click Datum Plane 2. From the Type list, select At Angle 3. .

Select the front angled face.

4.

Select the top right linear edge of the part.

5. From the Angle Option list, select Value.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 6.

153

Drag the angle handle until the value shows 115 degrees.

7. Choose another command or click Apply.

e. Create a datum plane midway between planar faces The following example shows how to create a datum plane that bisects the angle formed by two planar faces. 1. Click Datum Plane 2. From the Type list, select Bisector 3. .

Select the front planar face.

4.

Click the middle mouse button to advance to the next step.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 5.

154

Select the top planar face.

6.

(Optional) In the Plane Orientation group, click Alternate Solution to get a different solution to the selections made. In this example, Alternate Solution was clicked once.

7. Choose another command or click Apply.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING f. Create a datum plane through three points

155

The following example shows how to create a datum plane that contains three specified points. 1. Click Datum Plane 2. From the Type list, select Curves and Points. In the Curves and Points Subtype group, from the Subtype list, select Three Points. 3. This example will use two arc centers and one end point. Specify the first point. Select the arc center in the top face.

4.

Specify the second point. Select the arc center on the bottom inside face.

5.

Specify the third point. Select an End Point on the bottom surface.

6. Choose another command or click Apply.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

156

g. Create a datum plane using coefficients Use this method to create a datum plane based on an equation using four coefficients, a, b, c, and d. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum Plane choose InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane, to open the Datum Plane dialog box. 2. In the Type group, from the list, select Coefficients . 3. In the Coefficients (aX+bY+cZ=d) group, click WCS or Absolute. 4. Type the coefficient values for the equation in the a, b, c, and d boxes. As you specify values in each box, a preview of the datum plane displays and updates based on the changing coefficient values. For WCS coordinates, specify the plane using the equation a*xc + b*yc + c*zc = d. For absolute coordinates, specify the plane using the equation a*x + b*y + c*z = d. 5. Click OK or Apply to create the datum plane. h. Datum Plane dialog box Type Lists the construction methods you use to create planes.
o o

, or

Inferred Determines the best datum plane type to use based on objects you select. At Angle Creates a plane at a specified angle from a selected planar object. At Distance Creates a plane parallel to a planar face or another datum plane at a distance you specify. Bisector Creates a plane midway between two selected planar faces or planes. If the input planes are at an angle to each other, the plane is placed at the bisected angle. Curves and Points Creates a plane using various combinations of points, a line, a planar edge, a datum axis, or a planar face (for example, three points, a point and a curve, etc.). Two Lines Creates a plane using a combination of any two linear curves, linear edges, or datum axes. Tangent Creates a datum plane tangent to a non-planar surface, relative to a second selected object. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


157

Through Object Creates a datum plane on the surface normal of a selected object. Coefficients Creates a fixed, non-associative datum plane on the WCS or absolute coordinate system using an equation of A, B, C, and D coefficients:
o Ax + By + Cz = D

Point and Direction Creates a plane from a point and a specified direction. On Curve Creates a plane at a location on a curve or edge. YC-ZC plane , XC-ZC plane , XC-YC plane Creates a fixed datum plane along the XC-YC, XC-ZC, or YC-ZC axis of the Work Coordinate System (WCS) or Absolute Coordinate System (ABS). View Plane Creates a fixed datum plane parallel to the view plane, and passing through the origin of the WCS. Fixed Available only when editing a fixed datum plane. Constructed Available when you edit a plane that was created by using an option that is not available on the lists. To access all the parameters of a constructed plane, you must use the Datum Plane dialog box.

Type-Specific options Objects to Define Plane

Select Object Lets you select one or more objects to define the plane. The objects you select determine the plane type and the type of additional objects you select.

Inferred You can use the Point Constructor to specify point objects.

As you select objects and based on the plane type that NX infers, additional options for that type appear in the dialog box. Planar Reference

Select Planar Object Lets you select a planar face, plane, or datum plane to use as a reference for the angle.

At Angle

Through Axis

Select Linear Object Lets you select a linear curve, edge, or datum axis to define the angle's axis of drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

158

rotation. You cannot select an object that is perpendicular to the reference plane Angle

Angle Option Lets you select a method to define the angle of the plane.
o

Value Specifies the value for the angle. Perpendicular Makes the datum plane perpendicular to the planar reference object and pass through the through axis object. Parallel Makes the datum plane parallel to the planar reference and pass through the through axis object.

Angle Appears when the Angle Option is set to Value. Sets a degree value in the Angle box.

Planar Reference

Select Planar Object Lets you select a planar face, plane, or an existing datum plane to use as a reference object for the new datum plane.

Offset

Distance Specifies the value for a distance to offset the datum plane. Type a value in the Distance box or drag the Distance handle.

At Distance

Reverse Direction Reverses the direction of the offset. To reverse the direction you can also: When you reverse the offset direction, the plane moves to the opposite side of the reference object. The plane normal also reverses in a mirror-like transformation.

Number of Planes Specifies the number of copies of the new plane to create. Copies are created drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

159

successively and spaced evenly from one another using the same offset value. First Plane Second Plane

Select Planar Object Lets you select the first and second planar faces, datum planes, or plane objects to define the bisector plane.

Bisector

Curves and Points Subtype Lists subtype methods. With all methods you must first specify an origin point and then reference objects.

Curves and Points Determines the subtype to use based on the objects you select. After selecting the origin point:
o o

If you select a line, datum axis, linear curve, or edge, the datum plane passes through both objects. If you select a planar face or datum plane, the datum plane passes through the point, but is parallel to the reference object.

One Point Creates a datum plane that passes through a single point. Curves and Points Two Points Creates a datum plane that passes through a single point and is perpendicular to a second point. Three Points Creates a datum plane that passes through three points. Point and Curve/Axis Creates a datum plane with a point and a linear object, such as a line, datum axis, linear curve, or edge. Point and Plane/Face Creates a datum plane with a point and a planar object, such as a planar face, datum plane, or plane. Reference Geometry drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

160

Specify Point Appears for all subtype options except Curves and Points. Lets you specify each point required by the subtype.

Select Object Appears only for the Curves and Points subtype. Lets you select a point and other objects to define the plane.

Select Curve Object Appears when the subtype option is Point and Curve/Axis. Lets you select a point and a linear object, such as a line, datum axis, linear curve, or edge that defines the plane.

Select Planar Object Appears when the subtype option is Point and Plane/Face. Lets you select a planar object, such as a planar face, datum plane, or plane object to be used with a point to define the plane.

First Line Second Line

Select Linear Object Lets you select two objects to define the datum plane: linear curves, linear edges, or datum axes.

Two Lines

o o

If you select two lines that are coplanar, the plane includes both lines. If you select two lines that are not coplanar and not perpendicular, you can use Alternate Solution to get a plane that passes through the second line and is parallel to the first. If you select two lines that are not coplanar but are perpendicular, the plane contains the first line and is perpendicular to the second. You an also use Alternate Solution to get a plane that passes through the second line and is perpendicular to the first.

Tangent Subtype Lists the sub type methods. All tangent subtypes require that you first select a non-planar face. Tangent

Tangent

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

161

Determines a subtype to use based on the objects you select. The second object you choose can be any of the following:
o o o o o o

Point Linear edge Line Face Datum axis Datum plane

One Face Creates a datum plane tangent to a selected cylindrical or conical face. Through Point Creates a datum plane tangent to a non-planar face and a point. Through Line Creates a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical or conical face and a linear object. Two Faces Creates a datum plane tangent to two non-planar faces; for example, cylindrical, conical, or spherical. Angle to Plane Creates a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face and a planar object or face. You can assign an angle value between the faces, or set them as perpendicular or parallel to one another in Angle Option. Reference Geometry

Select Object Appears when the subtype is Tangent. Lets you select one or more objects to define the plane.

Select Tangent Face Appears for all subtype options except Tangent. Lets you select one or more nonplanar, cylindrical or conical faces to define the plane.

Select Linear Object Appears when the subtype is Through Line. Lets you specify a plane that is drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING tangent to a cylindrical or conical face and a linear object.

162

Select Planar Object Appears when the subtype is Angle to Plane. Lets you create a plane that is tangent to a cylindrical face and a planar face.

Specify Point Appears when the subtype is Through Point. Lets you create a plane that is tangent to a point and a non-planar face.

Angle Appears when the subtype is Angle to Plane.

Angle Option Lists the options to specify how the angle is defined:
o

Value Sets a value for the angle. You can type a value in the Angle box or drag the angle handle.

Perpendicular Makes the datum plane perpendicular to the planar reference object.

Parallel Makes the datum plane parallel to the planar reference.

Angle Appears when the Angle Option is set to Value. Sets a degree value. Through Object

Select Object Lets you select a single object through which the datum plane will pass. You can select the following types of objects:

Through Object

o o o o o o

Curve Edge Face Datum Plane Datum CSYS drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


o o o

163 CSYS Spherical surfaces and surfaces of revolution Axis of a cylindrical, conical, or revolved face

Curve, edge, or face objects can be planar or non-planar. If you select a conical or cylindrical face, the datum plane is created on the axis of the face. Coefficients (aX+bY+cZ=d)

WCS Creates the plane on the WCS coordinate system.

Absolute Creates the plane on the absolute coordinate system.

Coefficients

a, b, c, d Sets the values for the a, b, c, and d parameters for the equation, aX+bY+cZ=d, to specify a plane. A, B, and C define the direction of the plane normal. D relates to the planes distance from the CSYS origin (=D/SQRT[A^2+B^2+C^2]).

Through Point

Specify Point Lets you define an origination point for the plane.

Normal Direction Point and Direction

Specify Vector Lets you define the direction of the plane.

Reverse Direction Lets you reverse the normal direction of the vector.

Curve

Select Curve Lets you select a curve or an edge. You can select a second object, a face, datum plane, datum axis, or another curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

On Curve

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

164

or edge if it will make the datum plane perpendicular to it at the point on curve. Reverse Direction Lets you change the location of the plane from one end of the curve or edge to the other end without changing the location value. Location on Curve

Location Lets you place the plane at a precise location along the curve or edge. Arc Length / %Arc Length Sets a value to position the plane along the curve or edge, either as a distance or as a percentage of arc length. You can type the value in the Arc Length or %Arc Length box, or drag the curve point handle to the desired position. Note Arc length is a position along a curve expressed as a unit of measure distance. The percent of arc length is a position along a curve expressed as a percentage of its total length, a value between 0 and 100. Tip You can right-click the datum plane handle to change between Arc Length and %Arc Length.

Specify Point Appears when Location is set to Through Point. Lets you define an origin point for the datum. You can drag the point handle to a new point position on the curve, as long as it satisfies the current snap point settings. Orientation on Curve

Direction Lets you specify the direction of the plane normal. Select Object Appears when the Direction option is Relative to Object, to let you select an object to which you want to make the datum plane parallel. Specify Vector Appears when the Direction option is Normal to Vector, Parallel to Vector, or Through Axis, to let you specify a vector or axis on which to align the datum drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING plane.

165

YC-ZC Plane

Offset and Reference

WCS / Absolute Specifies the coordinate system on which to create the plane.

XC-ZC Plane

Distance Adds a distance to offset the new plane from the coordinate system.

XC-YC Plane Plane Orientation Appears when there is more than one possible solution for creating the datum plane using the current parameters. Displays the other possible solutions for creating a plane when you click or press the Page Down or Page Up keys. The following animation shows an example of using Alternate Solution with tangent datum planes. Alternate Solution

Reverses the direction of the plane normal. The plane preview always displays an arrow from its center that points in the direction of the plane normal. Common to all types. Offset Available to all datum plane types except At Distance, Coefficients, YC-ZC Plane, XCZC Plane, XC-YC Plane, and View Plane. Offset When selected, it creates a datum plane offset from the defined plane, in the Direction and at the distance you specify. Available when the Offset check box is selected and a base plane has been defined. Distance Enter the value, or drag the handle to the desired offset distance. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Reverse Direction

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Reverse Direction Settings Available to all datum planes of non-fixed types.

166

Available when the Offset check box is selected and a base plane has been defined. This reverses the offset direction.

Makes a datum plane an associative feature that appears in the Part Navigator with the name Datum Plane. Associative If you clear the Associative check box, the datum plane is created as the Fixed type, and appears in the Part Navigator as a non-associative Fixed Datum Plane. When you edit a datum plane, you can change a fixed datum plane to a relative plane by changing the Type, redefining its parent geometry, and selecting the Associative check box. i. Editing datum planes When editing a datum plane, you can:

Change its parameters and parent geometry, when allowed by its defined Type. Change its Type. Convert a relative datum plane to fixed by clearing the Associative option box, or by changing its Type to that of a fixed method. Convert a fixed datum plane to relative by changing its Type to a relative (non-fixed) method. Move a fixed datum plane by choosing EditFeatureMove Feature.

j. Size and resize datum planes This example shows how to resize an existing datum plane, and is similar to resizing a datum plane when it is first created. 1. In the graphics window or the Part Navigator, right-click an existing datum planeResize Datum Plane. The Resize Datum Plane dialog box opens, and sizing handles appear on the corners and mid points of the datum plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

167

2. Use any of these methods to change the size of the datum plane: o Drag the sizing handles to change the length and height of the datum plane. o Click a sizing handle and enter Length and Height values in the on-screen input boxes. o Click a sizing handle and then select a Snap Point location on which to align it (Snap Point is available only with some methods, such as Plane on Curve and Point and Direction). o Right-click a sizing handle and choose Symmetric to constrain the datum plane with equal sides. You can drag a length handle to size both length sides equally, or drag a height handle to size the two height sides equally. Drag a corner handle to size all sides equally. o Right-click a sizing handle and choose Reset Plane Size to return the datum plane to its original size. 3. Finish the resize of the datum plane by doing one of the following: o Click Apply and select another datum plane to resize. o Click OK to dismiss the Resize Datum Plane dialog box. Note You can also open the Resize Datum Plane dialog box by:

Clicking Resize Datum Plane on the Edit Feature toolbar. Choosing EditFeatureResize Datum Plane.

Warning You can resize fixed datum planes created in any release, all datum planes created in NX1 or later, and Point and Direction and Three Points datum planes created in V18 and later. You cannot resize or drag older, relative datum planes using the old Datum Plane Pre-NX dialog box.

2. Datum Plane Grid


Use the Datum Plane Grid command to place a grid directly on a datum plane or a plane of a datum CSYS. A datum plane grid is a localized grid that helps you work on an object in your model. Grids typically provide the context of location and size to objects. You can create or edit a datum plane grid in any application where you can create a datum plane, such as Modeling. The following figure shows a datum plane grid. The grid's boundaries are expanded beyond the datum plane to make the grid labels more readable.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

168

You can:

Create multiple datum plane grids in your model, which lets you optimize each grid for the object it belongs to. Rotate a datum plane grid within the plane it is located on. Create section curves where the grid intersects the model after you rotate the grid to the orientation you want. Use the model's work plane grid even when datum plane grids are visible.

The parent-child relationship between the datum plane and the datum plane grid is displayed in the Dependencies panel of the Part Navigator. Part Navigator Model History Datum Coordinate System (0) Datum Plane (1) Dependencies Datum Plane (1) Children Datum Plane Grid Parents Datum Coordinate System (0) Where do I find it? Application Modeling and other applications where you can create a datum plane Menu InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane Grid Graphics window Right-click a datum planeDatum Plane Grid a. Create a datum plane grid The Datum Plane Grid command is available in applications where you can create a datum plane, such as Modeling or NX Sheet Metal. 1. Choose InsertDatum/PointDatum Plane Grid. 2. Select a datum plane or a plane of a datum CSYS, as shown in the following figure.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

169

3. Specify whether the Grid Orientation is From Datum Plane or Custom. If you set Grid Orientation to Custom, you can modify the default orientation with the Specify Orientation option and the manipulator. Note In this step, the grid settings and values are the defaults. If the defaults meet your needs, you can click OK to create the grid. Otherwise, you can continue with the remaining steps in this procedure until the grid appears as you want it. The following three figures show how you can move a grid if, for example, you want to make its labels more readable.

Custom setting with manipulator and default grid

Select a drag handle, and drag the manipulator to a new location

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

170

The datum plane grid moves after you release the manipulator Another way to make the grid labels more readable is to leave the grid in place, but expand the sides.

Drag a green ball to expand the grid boundaries

The expanded grid's labels are more readable 4. Check the Settings and modify them as desired: o Select the Display Grid check box if you want to see the grid, which updates as you continue to define it. o Select the Display On Top check box if you want the grid to be visible through your model. o Select the Display Major Lines check box if you want the major lines in the grid to be visible. If this check box is not selected, only the minor lines are visible (assuming the Display Grid check box is selected). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 5. If you want to inherit attributes from an existing datum plane grid, click Select Grid select the existing datum plane grid.

171 , and

You can then click OK to create the new grid, or continue with the following steps to modify the attributes as desired. 6. In Major Line Spacing, specify the distance between the datum plane grid's major lines. 7. In Minor Lines per Major, specify the number of minor lines in each set of two major lines. One of the minor lines in each set appears in the same location as a major line. For example, if you set Minor Lines per Major to 2, and your major lines are visible, one minor line is visible between each set of major lines. 8. Set the Line Attribute options as desired to specify the grid's color, line style, and line weight (or thickness). 9. In Show Labels, select one of the following: o None the grid has no labels o Parallel the grid's labels are visible only when the datum plane grid is parallel to the view o Always the grid's labels are visible whenever the grid is visible 10. In Origin Reference, specify whether the labels' origin reference is the absolute CSYS, the WCS, or a local CSYS. If you set Origin Reference to Local, the Specify Origin option appears, so you can select a point for the origin. 11. If you want to create section curves where the datum plane grid crosses your model, do the following: o Set the Show Section Curves check box. o In Color Option, specify whether the section curves' color is Body Color or Specify Color. To specify the color, click the Color swatch and select a color.
o

If you want to save the section curves with your model, click Save Copy of Section Curves .

Section curves (blue) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 12. Click OK when you finish defining the datum plane grid. b. Datum Plane Grid options Bounded Plane

172

Lets you select a datum plane (for creating a datum plane grid) or a datum plane grid (for editing). Select Datum Planes and Grids Grid Orientation Selectable datum planes include those used to create objects, or a plane of a datum CSYS. Appears only after you select a datum plane. Specifies whether the grid orientation is custom or based on the datum plane. Appears only after you select a datum plane, and only when Grid Orientation is set to Custom. Lets you specify or modify the orientation and location of the datum plane grid. Specify Orientation If you click Specify Orientation , the Point Dialog can click to help you specify a point to locate the grid. icon appears, which you

Show Manipulator

Appears only after you select a datum plane, and only when Grid Orientation is set to Custom. Controls whether the manipulator handles are visible.

Inherit Attributes Lets you select an existing datum plane grid to inherit its attributes for your new grid. Select Grid Line Spacing Major Line Spacing Minor Lines per Major Line Attributes Line Color Major Line Style Major Line Weight Minor Line Style Minor Line Lets you specify the color of the grid's lines. Lets you specify the line style, such as dashed, for major lines. Lets you specify the thickness of major lines. Lets you specify the line style, such as dashed, for minor lines. Lets you specify the thickness of minor lines. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 Lets you specify the distance between the grid's major lines. Lets you specify the number of minor lines in each set of two major lines. (One minor line appears in the same location as a major line for each set.)

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Weight Settings Display Grid Controls whether the datum plane grid is visible.

173

Display On Top Controls whether the datum plane grid is visible through objects. Display Major Lines Labels Show Labels Origin Reference Specifies whether labels are displayed, and whether they are always visible or visible only when the grid is parallel to the view. Specifies whether the labels' origin references the WCS, the Absolute CSYS, or a local CSYS. Appears only after you select a datum plane, and only when Origin Reference is set to Local. Specify Origin Lets you specify the labels' origin. The Point Constructor specify a point. is available to help you Controls whether the grid's major lines are displayed, or only its minor lines.

Modeling Settings Show Section Curves Color Option Color Controls whether section curves are visible where the datum plane grid crosses the model. Lets you specify whether the section curves are in the object's color or a color that you select. Lets you select a color for the section curves. Lets you save a copy of the section curves with your model. If you enable the Load Exact Representations when Saving Section Curves customer default, this option uses the loaded solid body and sheet body geometry to create accurate section curves. This customer default loads solid bodies or sheet bodies for all visible lightweight bodies on the section plane, when saving copies of section curves. Save Copy of Section Curves If you do not enable this customer default, the Save Copy of Section Curves option sometimes creates approximate section curves from the loaded lightweight geometry. Tip To find a customer default, choose FileUtilitiesCustomer Defaults, and click Find Default .

3. Datum Axis
Use the Datum Axis command to define linear reference objects to help you create other objects, such as datum planes, revolved features, extruded features, and circular arrays.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

174

Datum axes can be relative or fixed. Relative datum axes Relative datum axes reference curves, faces, edges, points, and other datums. You can create relative datum axes across multiple bodies. Fixed datum axes Fixed datum axes do not reference other geometry. Use any of the relative datum axis methods to create fixed datum axes by clearing the Associative box in the Datum Axis dialog box. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Graphics window Modeling FeatureDatum/Point Drop-downDatum Axis InsertDatum/PointDatum Axis Right-click an object and choose Datum Axis

a. Create an inferred datum axis This example shows how to create a datum axis using the Inferred type. NX determines the type of datum axis by what is selected to create it. When later edited, the dialog box will show the type NX selectedit will not be the Inferred type. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum Axis choose Insert Datum/Point Datum Axis. 2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, from the Type list, select Inferred 3. In the Objects to Define Axis group, with Select Object to use to define the datum axis. . or

active, select the objects you want

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Note You can also use the Snap Point toolbar or the Point Constructor points.

175 dialog box to define

4. For this example: the edge of the hole was selected first and the face was selected next.

5. If your selections allow it, you can use Alternate Solution to define a different orientation. 6. In the following example there are three alternate solutions available.

7. Click OK or Apply.

b. Create a datum axis from a point This example shows how to create a datum axis located at a specified position and in a specified direction. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum Axis or choose Insert Datum/Point Datum Axis. .

2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, from the Type list, select Point and Direction . 3. In the Through Points group, with Specify Point active, specify the location for the origin of the datum axis. Note You can also use the Snap Point toolbar or the Point Constructor points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 dialog box to define

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 4. For this example, the arc center is selected as the origin of the datum axis.

176

5. 6. In the Direction group, with Specify Vector active, select an object to specify the direction. For this example, the linear edge is selected.

7. In the Direction group, from the Orientation list, select Parallel to Vector or Perpendicular to Vector. For this example, Parallel to Vector was selected. 8. Click OK or Apply.

c. Create a datum axis on a curve This example shows how to create a datum axis located on a curve or an edge and relative to either that curve or edge or to another selected object. In this example another selected object was used. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum Axis choose Insert Datum/Point Datum Axis.. 2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, from the Type list, select On Curve Vector 3. In the Curve group, with Select Curve axis. . or

active, select the curve on which to place the datum

In this example, the highlighted edge is selected. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

177

4. Locate the origin of the datum axis on the selected curve. o In the Location on Curve group, select either Arc Length or % Arc Length option, and o specify a value. Note You can also drag the datum axis origin to a desired location on the selected curve. 5. For this example, % Arc Length and 50% was used. 6. If you wish the datum axis orientation also to be relative to the selected curve, in the Orientation on Curve group, select an option from the Orientation list to specify the orientation of the datum axis relative to the selected curve.

Tangent

Normal

Bi-Normal

7. In this example, none of these were used. Note To make the datum axis relative to an object other than the selected curve or edge, in the Orientation on Curve group, from the Orientation option list, select either Perpendicular to Object or Parallel to Object and then select the object to use. 8. For this example, the Parallel to Object option is used with the selected highlighted edge, to get a parallel orientation.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

178

9. 10. Click OK or Apply.

d. Create a datum axis on the axis of a curve or face You can create a datum axis on the axis of a cylinder, cone, sphere, toroid, linear curve or edge. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum Axis choose Insert Datum/Point Datum Axis. or

2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, from the Type list, select Curve/Face Axis . 3. In the Curve or Face group, with Select Object active, select the curve or face you want to use for the datum axis orientation. For this example the toroidal face is selected.

4. Click Apply or OK.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING e. Datum Axis dialog box Type

179

Displays construction methods you use to create datum axes. You can select an axis type from the Type option list.

Inferred Determines the best datum axis type to use based on objects you select. XCAxis Creates a fixed datum axis on the XC-axis of the Work Coordinate System (WCS). YCAxis Creates a fixed datum axis on the YC-axis of the WCS. ZCAxis Creates a fixed datum axis on the ZC-axis of the WCS.

Point and Direction Creates a datum axis from a specified point in a specified direction. Two Points Creates a datum axis by defining two points through which the axis passes. On Curve Vector Creates a datum axis tangent, normal, or binormal to a point on a curve or edge, or perpendicular or parallel to another object. Intersection Creates a datum axis at the intersection of two planar faces, datum planes, or planes. Curve/Face Axis Creates a datum axis on a linear curve or edge, or the axis of a cylindrical or conical face or torus. Fixed Available only when editing a datum axis. Any datum axis created using the YC-Axis, XC-Axis, or ZC-Axis, or any of the other relative types used with the Associative check box cleared, appear as the Fixed type during an edit.

Type-Specific Options Objects to Define axis

Select Object Lets you select one or more objects that define the axis. The objects you select determine the axis type and which additional object types (if any) you can continue to select. Options that support the determined type appear in the dialog box.

Inferred

Orientation on Curve

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

180

Alternate Solution Available depending on the object or objects you select. Lets you cycle through the different possible solutions.

XC-Axis YC-Axis Axis ZC-

Create a fixed datum axis on the corresponding axis of the Work Coordinate System, so there are no input parameters. Through Point

Specify Point Lets you select the origin point for the datum axis. You can use a point type from the list, or use Point Constructor.

Direction

Orientation Lets you define how the direction of the datum axis is determined, based on the selected point and a vector. There are two options: Parallel to Vector or Perpendicular to Vector.

Point and Direction

Specify Vector Lets you specify a vector to be used with the orientation setting and which defines the direction of the datum axis. You can select from the list or use Vector Constructor.

Curve

Select Curve Lets you select a curve or an edge on which to locate the datum axis.

Location on Curve On Curve Vector

Lets you specify whether the axis is located on the curve or edge at an Arc Length or a % Arc Length distance from its end.

Arc Length / % Arc Length

The label of this option box changes to match the setting of the Location drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING on Curve option.

181

You can enter a value or drag the origin handle along the curve or edge. Options common to all Types Reverse Direction Axis Orientation

Reverses the direction of the axis 180 degrees.

Associative

Makes the new datum axis associative, so it is parametrically related to its parent features. An associative datum axis displays the name Datum Axis in the Part Navigator. A non-associative datum axis displays the name Fixed Datum Axis in the Part Navigator.

Settings

4. Datum CSYS
Use Datum CSYS to quickly create a coordinate system consisting of a set of reference objects. You can use the reference objects to associatively define the position and orientation of other features. An existing datum CSYS at the absolute coordinate system origin is included in many of the default part templates.

A datum CSYS consists of the following reference objects:


A coordinate system An origin point Three datum planes Three datum axes

You can create a datum CSYS:


At a fixed location relative to the work or absolute coordinate systems. Associated to existing geometry. Offset from an existing datum CSYS.

Uses for reference objects in a datum CSYS drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


182

Define placement faces, constraints, and position of sketches and features. Define vector directions for features. Define critical product locations in model space and control them with translation and rotation parameters. Define constraints to position parts in an assembly.

Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling FeatureDatum/Point Drop-downDatum CSYS InsertDatum/PointDatum CSYS

a. Datum CSYS examples Defining critical locations in a product assembly For an aerospace vehicle, you can create a datum CSYS at the absolute origin to define the vehicle coordinate system. You can create another datum CSYS to define the wing coordinate system. You can then use the wing coordinate system as reference to design and position the parts in the wing assembly structure.

Creating features in a detailed part For a detailed part, you can use a datum CSYS to help define the location and orientation of features. This is useful when there are no convenient edges and faces or when you need to control the location of features with multiple translation and angle parameters.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Create an offset datum CSYS

183

This example shows how to create a datum CSYS that is offset from an existing datum CSYS. The existing datum CSYS is located at the origin of the absolute coordinate system and the WCS. The new datum CSYS is offset using translation and rotation parameters. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum CSYS choose InsertDatum/PointDatum CSYS. 2. In the Datum CSYS dialog box, from the Type list, select Offset CSYS. 3. In the Reference CSYS group, from the Reference list, select Selected CSYS. 4. In the graphics window, select the existing datum CSYS. or

5. In the Datum CSYS dialog box, in the Offset from CSYS group, type the required translation and rotation parameters. Note The translation and rotation parameters are stored with the datum CSYS feature and can be edited as expressions. 6. Click OK or Apply to create the datum CSYS. For this example, the following are used: X=75, Y=200, Z=50, Angle Y=25

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING c. Create a datum CSYS with an x-axis, y-axis, and origin

184

This example shows how to create an associative datum CSYS located at a specific point on a solid body with the X-axis and Y-axis parallel to the axes of an existing datum CSYS. 1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select Datum CSYS choose InsertDatum/PointDatum CSYS. 2. In the Datum CSYS dialog box, from the Type list, select X-Axis, Y-Axis, Origin. 3. In the graphics window, select the origin point for the new datum CSYS. or

4. Origin of datum CSYS at arc center of edge 5. Select the x-axis for the new datum CSYS.

6. X-axis of existing datum CSYS 7. Select the y-axis for the new datum CSYS.

8. Y-axis of existing datum CSYS 9. In the Datum CSYS dialog box, in the Settings group, select the Associative check box. 10. Click OK or Apply to create the datum CSYS.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

185

New datum CSYS You can create additional features relative to the datum CSYS.

d. Datum CSYS dialog box Note The options shown below are unique to the Datum CSYS dialog box. For help on other options in the dialog box, see the CSYS options in the Gateway to NX Help. Settings Associative Makes the new datum CSYS associative instead of fixed, so it is parametrically related to its parent features. Changes the display size of the datum CSYS. Scale Factor The display size is controlled by a scale factor value which must be greater than zero. e. Updating and editing a datum CSYS Unlike faces, edges, datum planes, and datum axes, datum CSYS features are not deleted when a model is updated. If you associate a datum CSYS to parent geometry and the parent geometry is deleted when a model is updated, note the following:

In the Part Navigator, the Alerts column indicates that the datum CSYS is out of date. The datum CSYS is fixed relative to the absolute origin. You can edit the datum CSYS to move it dynamically or change its type and associate it to different parent geometry.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

186

In this example, a sketch and revolved feature are the parents of two datum CSYS features. When the sketch and revolved feature are deleted, the two datum CSYS features and their children are not lost when the model is updated. You can edit the datum CSYS features and associate them to new parent geometry at a later time.

5. Point
Use the Point command to create point objects. You can create points:

Associated to other geometry. Using absolute coordinates and work coordinates. Offset from existing locations.

See the Point tool options for details on point types and the Point dialog box. The Snap Point options on the Selection bar are also available to specify point locations. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling FeatureDatum/Point Drop-downPoint InsertDatum/PointPoint

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

187

6. Point Set
Use the Point Set command to create a set of points that correspond to existing geometry. You can:

Generate points along a curve, a face, or at the poles of a spline. Recreate the defining poles of a spline. Specify the spacing of the points and define where the Point Set feature starts and ends.

Point Set feature along a curve Point Set feature at the defining points of a spline

Point Set feature on a face Where do I find it? Application Modeling Menu InsertDatum/PointPoint Set a. Create a Point Set feature on a curve 1. Choose InsertDatum/PointPoint Set. 2. In the Point Set dialog box, from the Type list select Curve Points. 3. Specify the Subtype. For this example, select Geometric Progression from the Curve Points by list. 4. Under Base Geometry, use the Specify Curve or Edge option to select the base geometry.

5. Under Parameters, you can specify the parameters for the subtype. For this example, specify the following: Number of Points = 10, Start Percentage = 10, End Percentage = 100, Ratio = 1.5 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 6. Under Settings, select or clear the Associative check box as required. 7. Click OK or Apply to create the Point Set feature.

188

Point Set feature created on a curve b. Create a Point Set feature on a spline 1. Choose InsertDatum/PointPoint Set. 2. In the Point Set dialog box from the Type list select Spline Points. 3. Specify the Subtype. For this example, select Poles from the Spline Point Type list. 4. Under Base Geometry, use the Select Spline option to select the required spline.

5. Under Settings, select or clear the Associative check box as required. 6. Click OK or Apply to create the Point Set feature.

Point Set feature created at the poles of a spline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING c. Create a Point Set feature on a face

189

1. Choose InsertDatum/PointPoint Set. 2. In the Point Set dialog box, from the Type list select Face Points to create a set of points on an existing face. 3. Under Subtype, select the required subtype. For this example, select the Pattern subtype from the Face Points by list. 4. Under Base Geometry, use Select Face to select the required face.

5. Selected face 6. Under Parameters, specify the number of points in the U and V direction.

7. Preview of Point Set feature on the selected face 8. Under Pattern Limits, ensure that the Percentages option is selected. For this example, specify the following: Starting U Value, Starting V Value = 0 Ending U Value, Ending U Value = 75

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Point Set feature with Ending U and V value = 75 9. Check the Settings options and click OK or Apply to create the Point Set feature.

190

Point Set feature on a face d. Point Set options Type Lets you specify the type of Point Set feature you want to create. Available options are:

Type

Curve Points Creates a set of points along an existing curve. Spline Points Creates a set of points at the knots, poles, or defining points of the spline. Face Points Creates a set of points on an existing face. Points are created on the entire face, regardless of how it is trimmed.

Subtype Appears when Type is set to Curve Points. Lets you define the spacing of the points along the curve using one of the following options:

Equal Arc Length Spaces the set of points at equal distances along the path of the curve. Equal Parameters Spaces the set of points based on the characteristics or parameters of the curve. In some cases, tight curves cause tighter spacing, while the straighter sections of curves allow wider spacing.

Curve Points by

Equal parameters spacing method Wider spacing of points Tighter spacing of points Geometric Progression Spaces the set of points based on a geometric ratio. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

191

For example, if you specify the following parameters, the Point Set feature is created as shown in the figure. Number of points = 5 Start Percentage = 0 End Percentage = 100 Ratio = 0.75

Distance A Distance B = A * (Ratio) Distance C = B * (Ratio) Distance D = C * (Ratio)

Chordal Tolerance Spaces the set of points based on a chordal tolerance. The points are created from the curve start to the curve end. The value you enter in the Chordal Tolerance box represents the maximum distance between the parent curve and the straight line (chord) between two adjacent points in the set. Incremental Arc Length Lets you enter a path length between the points. The arc length distance must be equal to or less than the length of the curve you select and greater than zero. When you choose the curve, its total arc length is displayed; then you enter arc length (the path length you want between each point). The total number of points and the partial arc length (the amount of the path length left over) is calculated, based on the arc length you entered and the total arc length of the selected curve. Specified Projection Points Projects the selected point to the specified curve and creates a point at that location. If the projected point does not project on the selected curve, a point is created at the end of the curve closest to where the projected point would fall. If multiple curves are selected, a point is created on each curve. If multiple points are selected, each point is projected to the curve(s). Multiple points projected to the same location create overlapping points. Curve Percentage Creates a point on each curve at the distance that represents the percentage you specify. For example if you select three curves and specify the curve percentage as 10%, then points are created at 10 percent of the curve length location on each curve. Note Points are not created at percentage increments over the entire curve. If you select multiple curves, each curve is treated individually and points are not created at the specified percentage of the total length of all the selected drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING curves.

192

The point location is based on the curve's parametric orientation; that is, if you select multiple curves that are not oriented end to end, you need to review the point location to verify that points are created from the end of each curve as expected.

Appears when Type is set to Spline Points.

Defining Points Lets you select a spline that was created through points and recreate the construction points. Splines created with poles or by other construction methods do not have defining points to recreate. Knots Lets you create a set of points using the knot points of an existing spline. You can create point sets on as many splines as you like. Each time you select a spline, a point is created at each of its knot points.

Spline Point Type

Note Keep in mind that the knot points are the endpoints of each spline segment making up the curve. If the spline has only one segment (for example Bezier splines), there are only two knot points. Poles Lets you create points at the poles of any spline. These points can be used to create an adjoining spline while maintaining continuity of slope where the two curves join. When you select the spline, points are created at each pole of the curve, including the endpoints.

Appears when Type is set to Face Points. Face Points by

Pattern Creates points on the entire face, regardless of how it is trimmed.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

193

Selected face U direction V direction Points on face

Face Percentage Adds a point on one or more faces at a location equal to U and V percentage values.

Selected face Point created at U = 0%, V= 0% location on the selected face Point created at U = 20%, V= 20% location on the selected face Point created at U = 50%, V= 50% location on the selected face

BSurface Poles Allows you to create points at the poles of any face. These points can be used to create adjoining sheet bodies while the face's underlying B Surface maintains continuity of slope where the two bodies join. When you select the face, points are created at each pole of the curve, including the points along the edge of the face.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

194

Selected face Points created at surface poles Base Geometry Appears when Type is set to Curve Points. Select Curve or Edge Lets you select the curve or edge to create a point set feature. Appears when Type is set to Spline Points. Select Spline Lets you select the spline to create the point set feature. Appears when Type is set to Face Points. Select Face Parameters Appears when Type is set to Curve Points. Number of Points Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Specifies the number of points to create on the selected curve. Start Percentage Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Specifies the start percentage value. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Select Object for Start Percentage Lets you specify the start location of the point set as a percentage of the length of the curve. Lets you select the face to create the point set feature.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

195

This selection is optional. You can select a cursor location, an existing point, a control point, or a curve, to calculate the start percentage for the Point Set feature. If you select a point, or multiple intersection points, the point on the base curve that is closest to the selected point is used to calculate the start percentage. If you select a curve, the intersection point of the selected curve and the base curve is used to calculate the start percentage. If the two curves do not intersect, the intersection point is still determined using extensions of the curves as necessary. Consequently, it is possible that the Point Set feature ends at a location that is not on the base curve (for example, it is possible to have a percentage less than 0, or a negative percentage). End Percentage Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Specifies the end percentage value. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Lets you enter the end location of the Point Set feature as a percentage of the length of the curve. This selection is optional. You can select a cursor location, an existing point, a control point, or a curve, to calculate the start percentage for the Point Set feature. Select Object for End Percentage If you select a point or multiple intersection points, the point on the base curve that is closest to the selected point is used to calculate the end percentage. If you select a curve, the intersection point of the selected curve and the base curve is used to calculate the end percentage. If the two curves do not intersect, the intersection point is still determined using extensions of the curves as necessary. Consequently, it is possible that the Point Set feature ends at a location that is not on the base curve (for example, an end percentage value greater than 100%). Appears when Curve Points by is set to Geometric Progression. Ratio Specifies the geometric ratio for the spacing of points. Chordal Tolerance Appears when Curve Points by is set to Chordal Tolerance. Specifies the value for the chordal tolerance. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Incremental Arc Length. Arc Length Specifies the value for the arc length. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Specified Projection Points. Specify Point Lets you specify the projection points to define the Point Set feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Appears when:

196

Add New Set

Type is set to Curve Points, and Curve Points by is set to Specified Projection Points, or Curve Percentage. Type is set to Face Points, and Face Points by is set to Face Percentage.

Lets you add a new set of projection points to define the Point Set feature. Parameters Appears when Type is set to Face Points. Lets you specify the number of points in the U and V direction when Face Points by is set to Pattern. Lets you specify the U and V percentage when Face Points by is set to Face Percentage. List Appears when:

Type is set to Curve Points, and Curve Points by is set to Specified Projection Points, or Curve Percentage. Type is set to Face Points, and Face Points by is set to Face Percentage. For Curve Points Lists all the selected projection points. You can also add a new set of projection points as required. For Face Points Lists all the defined percentage values.

List window

Pattern Limits Appears when Type is set to Face Points, and Face Points by is set to Pattern. Lets you define the two points to be used in determining the parametric bounds. The cursor locations selected will be in a plane parallel to the viewing screen.

Diagonal Points

Selected diagonal points Point set created using the diagonal points as reference Lets you define the start and stop positions of the rows of points as a percentage. The percentage is of the path lengths that the underlying surface occupies in the U and V directions. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Percentages

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

197

U direction V direction Starting V Value = 10% Ending V Value = 75 % Starting U Value = 15 % Ending U value = 95% Settings Associative Distance Tolerance Select this check box to create an associative Point Set feature. Specifies a value for the distance tolerance.

7. Plane object
You can create an unbounded plane object using the Plane dialog. The plane you create is represented by a 3-4-5 triangle symbol situated with the right angle vertex on the origin point of the plane. The short leg is oriented along the implied X axis and the long leg along the implied Y axis.

Plane Object Symbol The plane symbol represents a flat surface extending infinitely through space. You can use plane objects to cross-section curves and surfaces, and to define limits of surfaces. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Plane objects are non-associative and do not appear in the Part Navigator. The scale of a plane object symbol is fixed. You can delete, hide, and show a plane object. For details on plane type options, see Datum Plane options. Where do I find it?

198

You can add the Plane tool to a toolbar or a menu using either Tools Customize or by right-clicking and choosing Customize in the toolbar area.

K.

Curve

View a topic
Line Arc/Circle Lines And Arcs Basic Curves Curve Chamfer Rectangle Polygon Conic Curves (ellipse, parabola, hyperbola) Helix Law Curve Spline Studio Spline Fit Spline Text

1. Line
Use the Line command to create straight line segments. You can:

Specify line start and end options using points, direction, and tangency. Specify constraints during line creation, such as creating a line at an angle to another line. Specify start and end limits to control line length, such as selected objects, locations, or values. Define lines on individual support planes. Create either associative or non-associative lines.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

199

Creating a new line parallel to a selected line


Start point of the new line Existing line selected as the end limit Existing line selected for a parallel direction Newly created line

Note Associative lines work best when:


They are created in small numbers. They are related to geometry and each other in a 3D space.

If all of your lines are on a 2D plane, it may be easier to create a sketch instead of individual lines. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveLine InsertCurveLine

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING a. Create a line between two points

200

1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose InsertCurveLine, to open the Line dialog box. 2. For the start point, select the end point of an existing line and drag, as shown in the following graphic. A preview line appears and follows the cursor movement, and an inferred autoplane appears based on the selected line endpoint.

3. For the end point, select the end point of a second existing line.

The autoplane may change to a plane common to both objects. 4. (Optional) Change the length of the line by doing one of the following: o Drag the Limit handles o Type a length value in the on-screen input box. o Change the Start Limit or End Limit parameters in the dialog box or by right-clicking the limit handles. 5. Click OK or Apply to create the new line.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Connect a new line at an angle to another line

201

1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose InsertCurveLine, to open the Line dialog box. 2. Click to select a start point for the new line and drag the cursor. A preview line appears and follows the cursor movement.

3. In the End Point or Direction group, from the End Option list, select At Angle. 4. Select an existing line as a reference from which to measure an angle to the new line. In this example, the line on the WCS is selected.

The preview line is now parallel to the selected line (default angle value is 0). An angle handle appears. The autoplane changes to the plane of the selected line. 5. Drag the angle handle until the value shows 240 degrees.

o o o

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

202

6. In the Limits group, from the End Limit option list, select Until Selected. 7. Select the same reference line you selected earlier. The end of the new line stops at the selected line.

8. Click OK or Apply to create the line.

c. Create a line on a principal axis 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose InsertCurveLine, to open the Line dialog box. 2. Click to select a start point for the new line and drag the cursor. An inferred plane and a preview line appear as you drag the cursor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

203

3. Drag the cursor until the preview line snaps to the X axis and the X label appears.

4. Click to set the direction of the line to the axis. The line locks to the X axis and the autoplane changes to match the XC-YC plane.

5. Change the line limits by dragging the start and end handles, or by typing values in the on-screen input box or dialog box.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

204

6. Click OK or Apply to create the line.

d. Create a line tangent to an arc 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose InsertCurveLine, to open the Line dialog box. 2. Click to select a start point for the new line and drag the cursor. A preview line appears and follows the cursor movement.

3. Drag the cursor to an arc and highlight it.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

205

4. Click the highlighted arc. The autoplane changes to a common plane, and a preview of the tangent line and line limit handles appears.

5. (Optional) Change the length of the line by doing one of the following: o Drag the limit handles. o Change the length of the line: o Enter length values in the on-screen input box or dialog box. o In the Settings group of the dialog box, click Alternate Solution to see different lines that can be created, as shown in the following graphic.

6. Click OK or Apply to create the line.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

206

e. Line dialog box Tip Right-click over the point and limit handles in the graphics window to quickly access many of the line options. Options to start and end a line Lets you define the start and end point options for the line.

Inferred Determines the best start and end options to use, based on which objects you select. Point Lets you create a line using one or more points. Tangent Lets you create a line that is tangent to a curved object. At Angle Lets you create a line at an angle to a selected reference object. Along XC Creates a line parallel to the XC-axis. Along YC Creates a line parallel to the YC-axis. Along ZC Creates a line parallel to the ZC-axis. Normal Creates a line along the normal direction of a selected object.

Start Option / End Option

Options specific to a Start Option or End Option Select Object Inferred Lets you select objects to define a line's start or end points (such as curves, edges, or points) using Snap Point, and if needed, Point Constructor options. Start and end options are chosen automatically by the software based on the objects you select. Point Reference Lets you specify which coordinate system to use for the line's start or end points. An onscreen input box shows the current point position.

WCS Specifies the Work Coordinate System (WCS). Absolute Specifies the Absolute Coordinate System (ACS). CSYS Lets you select a coordinate system. Select Point

Point

Lets you select start or end points for the line using Snap Point, and if needed, Point Constructor options. If you click where there is no point, the cursor location is used. The start and end points appear as cube-shaped handles, with Point1 and Point2 labels. You can drag the point handles to new Snap Point locations. An on-screen input box is also available to let you specify a 3D coordinate location. Select CSYS

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Available only when Point Reference is set to CSYS. Lets you select a coordinate system (CSYS) reference for the start point. Select Object Tangent

207

Lets you select a curved object (such as a line, arc, spline, or edge) from which a start or end point is derived and which is tangent to a specified object. A sphere-shaped tangent handle appears with a Tangent1 or Tangent2 label. Select Object Lets you select a linear reference object (a curve, edge or datum), from which an angle can be measured to draw the line from the start point. Angle Lets you specify the number of degrees to create the line, measured from the reference object. You can drag the Angle handle around the start point or type a degree value in the Angle on-screen input box or in the dialog box. A dashed reference line shows the angle as measured against the selected reference object.

At Angle

New line start point Existing line selected for the angle reference Preview of the new line Angle handle

If you set the angle to 0 or 180 degrees, the Parallel constraint symbol appears in the graphics window. If you set the angle to 90 or 270 degrees, the Perpendicular constraint drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING symbol appears. Along XC Along YC Along ZC

208

Automatically places the end point on a line parallel to the XC, YC, or ZC axis. Once you select one of these options, you can use the Limits options to adjust the length of the line.

Automatically places the line end point on a selected object's normal plane. The label "Normal2" appears. If the plane is user-defined, selected reference objects are projected onto it. Normal Select Object Lets you select an object to define the line's end point (such as a curve, edge, face or datum). Common options Use Plane Options in the Support Plane group to specify the plane on which to build the line. Select from the following options: Automatic Plane The software infers a temporary auto-plane based on the specified line start and end points. If you specify an end point on a different plane from that of the start point, the auto-plane changes so it is common to both. Changing the start or end points may also move the auto-plane. Plane Options Locked Plane Makes the auto-plane immovable if you change the start or end points. A locked auto-plane appears in the color of a datum plane object. You can lock and unlock an auto plane by double-clicking it or by selecting this option. Select Plane Enables the Specify Plane option, to let you define a plane on which to construct the line.

Specify Plane Lets you define the support plane for the line by selecting a plane method type from drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

209

the option list, such as the default Inferred method type, or by clicking the Full Plane Tool. Use the Start Limit and End Limit options in the Support Plane group to specify points, objects, or distance values that limit where the line starts and ends. Value Lets you specify numeric values for the start or end limits of the line. At Point Lets you specify points for the start or end limits of the line using Snap Point options. Until Selected Start Limit / End Limit Lets you start or end the line at the limit of a selected object.

Select Object Lets you select an object to define the line's start or end limit (a curve, face, edge, or datum).

Distance Available when Start Limit or End Limit is set to Value or At Point. Lets you type numeric values to specify the distance from the start and end limits to and from the line start point. Extend To View Bounds

Extends any line you create to the limits of the view boundary.

Alternate Solution

Available when there is more than one possible solution to creating a line. Displays different lines that can be created using the current parameters. You can also cycle through alternate solutions using the Page Down and Page Up keys.

Settings

Associative

Makes the line an associative feature. Associative lines appear in the Part Navigator with the name LINE. They update automatically and can be edited with the Line command. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

210

2. Arc/Circle
Use this command to create associative arcs and circle features. The type of arc you get depends on the types of constraints you combine. You can create many types of arcs by combining different types of constraints. Note You can also create non-associative arcs with this option, but they are not features.

Arcs are created on the support plane. You can specify a support plane or let the system infer one when you create arcs. You can use limits to define the start and end point of arcs using one of the constraints. You can use associative arc features to project or intersect reference geometry to the support plane.

Note Use associative arcs for a small number of curves that are related to the geometry and to each other in a 3D space. If all your arcs are on a 2D plane, it may be easier to use a sketch. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve Arc/Circle .

InsertCurveArc/Circle.

a. Create an arc through three points 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Arc/Circle or choose InsertCurveArc/Circle. 2. From the Type list, select Three Point Arc. 3. Select a start point for the new arc. For this example, a start point is selected at the end point of an existing line. An inferred plane based on the selected line endpoint appears.

4. Select the end point for the arc.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

211

After the end of the arc is selected, a preview of the arc appears. The preview and the autoplane are based on the currently selected objects.

5. Move the cursor to highlight a middle point for the arc.

6. Select the highlighted line end point for the middle point of the arc. For this example, the selected points or objects are on the same plane.

Note If the selected points or objects are not in the same plane the autoplane may change. 7. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. This may change the autoplane. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


o o

212

Change the start or end limits of the arc using the Limit options or by dragging or rightclicking the limit handles. Change the constraint type of a point using the dialog box Start Option, End Option or Mid Option lists, or by right-clicking a point handle.

Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc shown in the preview. Select the Full Circle check box to form a complete circle. 8. Click the middle mouse button, OK, or Apply to create the arc.

o o

b. Create an arc using a tangent point On the Curve toolbar, click Arc/Circle or choose InsertCurve Arc/Circle. From the Type option list, select Three Point Arc. In the Start Point group, from the Start Option list, select Point. Select a start point for the new arc. For this example, a start point was selected at the end point of an existing line. An inferred plane based on the selection appears.

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. In the End Point group, from the End Option list, select Point. 6. Select an end point for the arc. For this example, the end point of a line is selected, and a preview of the arc appears.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 7. In the Mid Point group, from the Mid Option list, select Tangent. 8. Select the object. For this example, the circle is selected. That midpoint now has a tangent constraint.

213

9. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. This may change the autoplane. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using the dialog box Limit options or by dragging or right-clicking on the limit handles. o Change a point's constraint type using the dialog box, or by right-clicking a point handle.
o o o

Click Alternate Solution

to cycle through alternate arcs.

Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc shown in the preview. Select the Full Circle check box if you want the arc to form a complete circle. 10. Click the middle mouse button, OK, or Apply to create the arc.

c. Create an arc using three tangent points On the Curve toolbar, click or choose InsertCurveArc/Circle. From the Type list, select Three Point Arc. In the Start Point group, from the Start Option list, select Tangent. Select a start point for the new arc. For this example, a tangent start point on an existing arc is selected. An inferred plane based on the selection appears.

1. 2. 3. 4.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

214

5. In the End Point group, from the End Option list, select Tangent. 6. Select an end point for the arc. For this example, an existing arc is selected for the end point and a preview of the new arc appears.

7. In the Mid Point group, from the Mid Option list, select Tangent. 8. Select a middle point for the arc. For this example, an existing arc is selected.

9. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. This may change the autoplane. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using the options in the Limits group of the dialog box, or by dragging or right-clicking the limit handles. o Change a point's constraint type using the Start Point, End Point, or Mid Point option lists in the dialog box, or right-clicking a constraint handle.
o

Click Alternate Solution

to cycle through alternate arcs.

The following graphic shows examples of some possible alternate solutions.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

215

Click Complement Arc

to create a complement to the arc.

Select the Full Circle check box if you want the arc to form a complete circle. 10. Click the middle mouse button, OK, or Apply to create the arc.

d. Create an arc using two tangent points and a radius value On the Curve toolbar, click or choose InsertCurveArc/Circle. From the Type list, select Three Point Arc. In the Start Point group, from the Start Option list, select Tangent. Select a start point for the new arc. For this example, a tangent start point on an existing line is selected. An inferred plane based on the selection appears.

1. 2. 3. 4.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

216

5. In the End Point group, from the End Option list, select Tangent. 6. Select an end point for the arc. For this example, an existing line is selected. A preview of the new arc appears.

7. In the Mid Point group, from the Mid Option list, select Radius. 8. In the Radius group, in the Radius block, type the radius value and press Enter. For this example, a radius value of 30 is entered.

9. (Optional): Do any of the following: o Drag the any of the point handles to new locations. This may change the autoplane. o Enter a different radius value. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using the dialog box Limit options, or by dragging or right-clicking the limit handles. o Change a point's constraint type using the dialog box, or by right-clicking a constraint handle.
o o o

Click Alternate Solution

to cycle through alternate arcs.

Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc. Select the Full Circle check box to have the arc form a complete circle. 10. Click the middle mouse button, OK, or Apply to create the arc.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

217

e. Create an arc using a radius value On the Curve toolbar, click Arc/Circle or choose InsertCurveArc/Circle. In the Type group, from the Type list, select Three Point Arc. In the Start Point group, from the Start Option list, select Point. In the Start Point group, with Select Point active, select a start point for the new arc. For this example, a start point is selected at an existing line end point. An inferred plane based on the selection appears.

1. 2. 3. 4.

5. In the End Point group, from the End Option list, select Radius 6. In the Radius group, in the Radius box, (or in the on-screen input box) enter a radius value and press Enter. An initial preview of the arc based on the start point and the specified radius appears. As you move the cursor around, the radius of the previewed arc remains locked.

Note You can specify either the end or the middle constraint with a radius value, but not both. You cannot specify the start constraint with a radius value. 7. In the Mid Point group, from the Mid Option list, select Point. 8. Select a mid point for the arc. For this example, a line end point for the arc's mid point is selected.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

218

9. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. This may change the auto plane. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using Limit options, or drag and right-click the limit handles. o Change a point's constraint type using the dialog box, or right-click a constraint handle.
o o o

Click Alternate Solutions

to cycle through alternate arcs.

Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc shown in the preview. Select the Full Circle check box to have the arc form a complete circle. 10. Click the middle mouse button, OK or Apply to create the arc.

f. Create an arc or circle from center 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Arc/Circle or choose InsertCurveArc/Circle. 2. In the Type group, from the Type list, select Arc/Circle from Center. 3. Select a center point for the new arc. You can specify the arc center by entering coordinates or by selecting a point. When you specify the arc center, the arc and the inferred plane display. This example shows an existing arc center is selected for the center of the new arc.

4. Specify a radius for the arc using one of the following: o Select an object. o Enter a value for the arc radius in the on-screen input box or in the Radius box in the Arc/Circle dialog box. o Select an object you want the new arc to be tangent to. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

219

For this example, a line's end point is selected for the radius value and for the start limit.

5. In the Limits group, from the End Limit list, select Until Selected. 6. Select the object where you want to limit the end of the new arc. For this example, the line on the left is selected for the end limit of the new arc.

7. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the start handle to a new location. This may change the autoplane. o Drag the center point handle to a new location or right-click the center point handle and choose Point Constructor to specify a new center using coordinates o Right-click the end handle and use the shortcut menu to change its constraint type.
o

Click Alternate Solution

to cycle through alternate arcs.

Note This may or may not be available. It depends on the selections made.

Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc. Select the Full Circle option to have the arc form a complete circle. 8. Click the middle mouse button, OK or Apply to create the arc.

o o

g. Arc/Circle dialog box Type

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Sets the type of creation method to use to create the arc or circle.

220

Type

Three Point Arc Creates an arc when you specify three points that the arc must pass through or two points and a radius. Arc/Circle from Center Creates an arc when you specify an arc center and a second point or radius.

Start Point Appears when Type is set to Three Point Arc for the arc or circle. Lets you specify the start point constraints.

Inferred Determines the best option and constraint type to use to specify the start of the arc. Point Lets you specify a start point for the arc. The point constraint appears as a cube shaped handle with a Point label. Point1 is the start point, Point2 is the end point, and Point3 is the mid point

Start Option

Tangent Lets you select a curve object (such as a line, arc, conic, or spline) from which a start point is derived that is tangent to a selected object. A tangent sphere-shaped handle appears with a Tangent label If the support plane is user-defined, selected reference objects are projected onto it.

Lets you select the start point for the arc. Point Constructor Displays the Point dialog box. Select Object Select Object Lets you select the start point. Lets you define the start point of the arc or circle relative to the WCS, ACS, or CSYS coordinates.

Point Reference

WCS Defines the points relative to the Work Coordinate System. An onscreen input box with XC, YC, and ZC fields appears. As you move the cursor, the fields are updated to show the current distance from the WCS. Absolute Defines the points relative to an Absolute Coordinate System. An on-screen input box with X, Y, and Z fields appears. As you move the cursor, the fields are updated to show the current distance from the ACS. CSYS Defines points relative to a reference coordinate system using Select CSYS. When you select a reference coordinate system, an on-screen input box with D-X, D-Y, and D-Z fields appears. As you move the cursor, the fields are updated to show the current distance from the selected CSYS.

Lets you specify a point to be used as the point reference. Snap Point options are available on the Selection bar to help you select objects. Select Point drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING You can use the following Select Point options to specify the point. Point Constructor Displays the Point dialog box. Specify Point Lets you specify the start point. End Point Appears when Type is set to Three Point Arc for the arc or circle.

221

Lets you specify the end point constraints. The Inferred, Point, and Tangent options for the end point constraints work the same as the Start Option constraints. End Option Radius You can specify a radius constraint for the end or middle points by entering a value in the Radius on-screen input box or the Radius box in the Arc/Circle dialog box. You can enter a radius value after specifying the first constraint. Lets you select the end point for the arc or circle. Point Constructor Displays the Point dialog box. Select Object Select Object Lets you select the end point. Specify Radius Mid Point Appears when Type is set to Three Point Arc for the arc or circle. Lets you specify the constraints for the mid point. Mid Option The Inferred, Point, Tangent, and Radius options for the mid point constraints work the same as the End Option constraints. Lets you select the mid point for the arc/circle. Works in the same way as start point Select Object options. Select Object Specify Radius Center Point Appears when Type is set to Arc/Circle from Center for the arc or circle. Lets you select a point or location for the arc center. In addition to the Snap Point options you can use the XC, YC, ZC on-screen input boxes to specify the coordinates of the center of the arc. Specify Point Point Constructor Displays the Point dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 Available when Mid Option is set to Radius. Lets you specify a value for the radius. Appears when End Option is set to Radius. Lets you specify a value for the radius of the arc or circle.

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Specify Point Lets you specify the start point. Through Point Appears only for the Arc/Circle from Center type of arc/circle. Lets you specify the end constraint. End Option

222

Inferred, Point, Tangent, and Radius options for the mid point constraints work the same as the End Option constraints for the Three Point Arc type of arc/circle. Lets you specify the point for the Point type of end constraint.

Point Reference Radius

Appears when Type is set to Arc/Circle from Center for the arc or circle. Radius Support Plane Lets you specify the plane on which to build the arc or circle. You can change the plane constraint at different points in the line creation process. Unless you lock the plane, it may change when you change the constraints.

Lets you enter a value for the radius constraint for the end or mid point of the arc. You can also enter a radius value in the Radius on-screen input box.

Automatic Plane Infers a temporary plane based on the arc or circle's start and end points. An autoplane appears. If you specify an end constraint on a different plane from the start constraint, the autoplane moves to support a plane common to both.

Plane Options Changing either the start or end constraints may also move the autoplane.

Locked Plane Makes the autoplane immovable, so that it does not move automatically if you change the start or end constraints. You can also double-click to lock and unlock an auto plane.

Select Plane Lets you select an existing, or create a new plane.

Appears when type of plane option is set to Select Plane. Lets you specify the plane. Specify Plane Plane Constructor Inferred Plane Limits Start Limit Lets you specify the start of an arc or circle. To define the start limit, you can enter the start limit value in the dialog box, drag the limit handle, or type values in the on-screen drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 Displays the Plane dialog box. Displays a list of available plane methods when you click .

[NX8 HELP] MODELING input box.


223

Value Lets you type a value for the start of the arc. At Point Sets the arc limits at the start and/or end point. Until Selected Lets you select a curve, face, edge, datum, or body, to define the start of the arc.

You can reverse the current arc limits and display the complement by double-clicking a limit handle. Angle Select Object End Limit Full Circle Sets the Value or At Point type of start limit to the value you specify. Available when Start Limit us set to Until Selected. Lets you select objects. Let you specify where an arc or circle ends. The End Limit options work the same as the Start Limit options. Lets you specify the arc as a complete circle.

Lets you create a complement to the arc. Complement Arc Settings Specifies the arc as an associative feature and is displayed in the Part Navigator with a name such as Arc (3), for example. Associative arcs are updated automatically and can be edited with the Arc/Circle command. Associative Caution Note that arcs created in the Drafting application with this option selected are associative, but they do not appear in the Part Navigator and they cannot be edited. Cycles through the various possible solutions if an arc or circle's constraints allow more than one solution. You can also use the Page Down and Page Up keys to cycle through alternate solutions.

Alternate Solution

Tip Right-click the arc/circle point and limit handles in the graphics window to quickly access many of the following options. To create simple associative and non-associative arcs without having to open the Arc/Circle dialog box, use the options in InsertCurveLines and Arcs.

3. Lines And Arcs


Lines and Arcs is a special drop-down menu and toolbar that lets you quickly create associative or non-associative lines and curves using pre-defined constraint combinations. You do not have to open a dialog or operate any icon option controls.

Use MB1 to create a line or arc. Use MB2 to cancel out of Lines and Arcs. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


224

Snap Point rules apply to most of the line and arc creation options. Lines and arcs are created automatically when all constraint conditions are satisfied. Plane constraints are not used. If you use the Associative option: o All point constraints are stored with respect to absolute coordinates. o Editing associative lines and arcs created with the Lines and Arcs menu opens the Associative Line and Associative Arc/Circle dialogs.

Note You can not edit associated line or arcs if they are created in the Drafting environment. Where Do I Find It? Insert Curve Lines and Arcs Lines And Arcs Toolbar a. Lines And Arcs Basic Procedures Overview How To Related Topics Choose this option to specify that the curve you create is an associative feature. Associative curves update automatically if their input parameters change. You can edit associative curves using Edit Parameters or the Part Navigator Details Panel. This option works like a toggle switch. Creates a line using start and end point constraints. Line Point-Point 1. Select the start point location for the line. 2. Select the end point location. 3. Click MB1 to create the line. Creates a line using a start point and an Along XC, YC or ZC direction constraint. Line Point-XYZ 1. Select a start point location for the line. 2. Move the cursor around the start point to snap to the desired X, Y or Z inferred direction. 3. To create the line do one of the following: o Rubberband the line to get the desired length and click MB1. o Specify a length in the on-screen input box and press the Return key. Creates a line using a start point and a parallel constraint ( Angle constraint set to 0/180 degrees). Line PointParallel 1. Select a start point location for the line. 2. Select a line for a parallel constraint. 3. To create the line do one of the following: o Rubberband the line to get the desired length and click MB1. o Select an object to limit the length of the line. o Specify a length in the on-screen input box and press the Return key.

Associative

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

225

Creates a line using a start point and a perpendicular constraint ( Angle constraint set to 90 degrees). Line PointPerpendicular 1. Select a start point location for the line. 2. Select a line for a perpendicular constraint. 3. To create the line do one of the following: o Rubberband the line to get the desired length and click MB1. o Select an object to limit the length of the line. o Specify a length in the on-screen input box and press the Return key. Creates a line using a start point and tangent constraints. Line PointTangent 1. Select a start point location for the line. Once you have selected the start point you can optionally enter a length for the line by:
o o

rubberbanding a length, or entering a value in the on-screen input box,

followed by pressing the Return key. 2. Use MB1 to select a curve for the tangent constrain and create the line. Creates a line using a tangent to tangent constraint. Line TangentTangent 1. Select a curve for a tangent constraint for the line. Once you have selected the start point you can optionally enter a length for the line by:
o o

rubberbanding a length, or entering a value in the on-screen input box,

followed by pressing the Return key. 2. Use MB1 to select a curve for the tangent constraint and create the line. Uses the Extend Line to Screen Bounds option with the currently selected line creation method to create a line bounded by the view limits. Unbounded Line This option works like a toggle switch. Creates an arc using three point constraints. Arc Point-PointPoint 1. Select a start point location constraint for the arc. 2. Select an end point location constraint for the arc. 3. Select a middle point location constraint to create the arc. Creates an arc using start and end point constraints and a tangent constraint. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Arc Point-PointTangent 1. Select a start point location constraint for the arc. 2. Select an end point location constraint for the arc. 3. Select a tangent constraint curve to create the arc. Creates an arc that has tangent constraints with three other arcs. Arc TangentTangent-Tangent 1. Select a curve for the first tangent constraint. 2. Select a curve for the second tangent constraint. 3. Select a third tangent constraint curve to create the arc.

226

Creates an arc with tangent constraints to two arcs and has a specified radius constraint. Arc TangentTangent-Radius 1. Select a curve for the first tangent constraint. 2. Select a curve for the second tangent constraint. 3. Specify a radius and create the arc using one of these methods: o Drag the cursor and rubberband the preview arc until it has the desired radius and click MB1. o Enter a radius in the on-screen input box, followed by pressing the Return key. Creates a complete arc circle using three point constraints. Circle PointPoint-Point 1. Select a start point for the circle. 2. Select an end point for the circle. 3. Select a middle point to create the circle. Creates a complete arc circle using start and end point constraints and a tangent constraint. Circle PointPoint-Tangent 1. Select a start point for the circle. 2. Select an end point for the circle. 3. Select a tangent constraint curve to create the circle. Creates a complete arc circle with tangent constraints to three other arcs. Circle TangentTangent-Tangent 1. Select a curve for a tangent constraint. 2. Select a second curve for another tangent constraint. 3. Select a third tangent constraint curve to create the circle. Creates a complete arc circle with start and end tangent constraints and a specified radius constraint. Circle TangentTangent-Radius 1. Select a curve for the first tangent constraint. 2. Select a curve for the second tangent constraint. 3. Specify a radius and create the arc circle using one of these methods: o Drag the cursor and rubberband the preview arc until it has the desired radius and click MB1. o Enter a radius in the on-screen input box, followed by pressing the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Return key. Creates a center-based arc circle using center and start point constraints. Circle CenterPoint 1. Select a center point constraint. 2. Select a start point constraint to create the arc circle. Creates a center-based arc circle using center and radius constraints. Circle CenterRadius

227

1. Select a center point constraint. 2. Specify a radius and create the arc circle using one of these methods: o Drag the cursor and rubberband the preview arc until it has the desired radius and click MB1. o Enter a radius in the on-screen input box, followed by pressing the Return key. Creates an center-based arc circle using a center and tangent constraints.

Circle CenterTangent

1. Select a center point constraint. 2. Select a tangent constraint curve to create the arc circle.

4. Basic Curves
When you choose this option, the Basic Curves dialog is displayed. The icons at the top are the curve types that you can create, plus two editing methods. Basic Curves Dialog Icons Brings up the Line mode of the Basic Curves dialog, which gives you options for creating lines. Brings up the Arc mode of the Basic Curves dialog, which gives you options for creating arcs. Brings up the Circle mode of the Basic Curves dialog, which gives you options for creating circles. Brings up the Fillet mode of the Basic Curves dialog, which gives you options for creating fillets. Brings up the Trim mode of the Basic Curves dialog, which gives you options for trimming basic curves. Brings up the Edit Curve Parameters mode of the Basic Curves dialog, which gives you options for editing parameters of basic curves.

Line Arc Circle Fillet Trim Edit Curve Parameters

Other options on the Basic Curves dialog vary, depending on which of the icons you choose. The unique options are described in the appropriate individual curve creation sections. Options that are common to more than one curve type are described in the Overview. Overview

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

228

The Basic Curves dialog is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. The Basic Curves dialog provides you with several tools to make curve creation faster and easier. Basic Curves Tools and Common Options Tools Dialog bar Preview of Object Creation Shift/MB3 Popup Menus Status line Text fields in which you can enter values for the location or parameters of the curve that you are creating. In most cases, as you are creating a curve, the display shows what the curve will look like based on its current definition. Provide quick access to frequently-used options for specific curve types.

Gives you valuable feedback while you are creating curves, such as what kind of point is highlighted, or whether you have highlighted an object. The Status line is located below the graphics window. Common Options Delta When this option is ON, any values you key into the dialog bar are relative to the last defined point. Point Method Lets you specify points relative to existing geometry, or by specifying a cursor location or using the Point Constructor. String Mode Lets you create an unbroken string of curves. When this option is on, the end of one object becomes the beginning of the next. To stop string mode, turn the button OFF. To break string mode and start it again with the next object created, choose Break String or press MB2. Break String Breaks the string of curves at the place where you chose this option, but String Mode remains active (i.e., if you create more lines or arcs, they will be in another unbroken string). a. Basic Curves Creation Tools The Dialog Bar The dialog bar is a series of data entry fields that appear at the bottom of the graphics window, just to the right of the work layer input box, when the Basic Curves dialog is active. The data entry fields in the dialog bar vary depending on which type of curve you are creating, and which options you have selected. For example, this is what the dialog bar looks like when you are creating lines.

There are two types of data entry fields in the dialog bar:

Location fields - XC, YC, and ZC. These fields track the location of the cursor, or you can use them to input a fixed value. Parameter fields - These fields control parameters of the curve, such as length of a line, or radius of an arc.

There are also two options on the User Interface Preferences dialog that affect dialog bar interactions:

Decimal Places - This controls the number of decimal places displayed in the fields. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

229

Tracking - This controls whether or not the fields track the current location of the cursor.

To give a text field focus, you can use the <Tab> key or click MB1 in the field you want (once for "insert" mode, twice for "replace" mode), as with any other Motif text field. Here are the general rules that apply to keying in text in the dialog bar fields:

When the XC, YC, or ZC field has focus, and you press <Enter>, the location you have specified is accepted and an asterisk is displayed in the graphics area indicating that point. When a parameter field (such as length, radius, etc. - any field other than the three mentioned above) has focus and you press <Enter>, the values in all parameter fields are accepted and applied to the curve being constructed. As soon as you finish creating a line, arc, or circle, you can enter new values in the parameter text fields and the newly created object will be updated accordingly (unless you are using String Mode).

The content and function of the fields are discussed in the individual curve creation sections. Preview of Object Creation As you go through the steps to create a line, arc, or circle, in most cases you will see a "preview" of what the new curve will be, so that you know what the curve will look like before you create it. You can also change some of the parameters of a curve right after you create it. When you are creating a curve in the Basic Curves dialog, all curves other than fillets are created with some type of dragging method. The shape of the curve is previewed, i.e., you see what the curve will look like, as you are dragging it, before it is actually created. When the curve looks correct, you can accept it by completing selection of the currently highlighted geometry or indicating a screen location. Shift/MB3 Popup Menus When you are in line, arc, or circle creation mode in the Basic Curves dialog, there is a special popup menu you can use. To display this menu, move the cursor to the graphics window and press <Shift>MB3. This popup menu changes depending on what type of curve you are creating. The figure below shows what the popup looks like when you are creating lines and arcs. (When you are creating circles, the top two options are not displayed.)

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Basic Curves Point Method Creation Option

230

This option menu lets you specify points relative to existing geometry, or by specifying a cursor location, or by using the Point Constructor. The options on this menu (shown below), except for Inferred Point and Select Face, work similarly to those in the Point Constructor. Inferred Point Cursor Location Existing Point End Point Control Point
Inferred Point

Intersection Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point Select Face Point Constructor

The Inferred Point method affects the following points:


Cursor locations Control points (end point, midpoint, existing point) Arc centers

The type of point currently selected is displayed in the Status line. As you move the cursor around the graphics area, objects, control points, and arc centers are prehighlighted to help you select them. Note See the Snap Point Tool for specific types of point inferencing methods that are available when specifying points and point locations during the creation and editing of certain geometric objects. When you use an option other than Inferred Point, several things change:

The cursor location is no longer tracked in the dialog bar. Control points are no longer highlighted. The snap angle is ignored.

Select Face

The Select Face option lets you select a face and use it as the limiting object for a line. This option is unavailable when you are in any other curve creation mode. After you select a face, you are automatically returned to Infer mode. If you choose the Point Constructor method, the Point Constructor is displayed. When you choose OK or Back from that dialog, you are returned to the Basic Curves dialog. c. Basic Curves Line There are several options on the Basic Curves dialog that are unique to line creation. Basic Curves Dialog Options (unique for line mode) When this option is ON, any line that you create, regardless of the creation method, is bounded by the limits of the view. (String Mode is unavailable.) Use Lock Mode when your next action would normally cause the line creation mode to change, and you want to avoid that. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Unbounded Lock Mode / Unlock Mode

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

231

Parallel options Options for creating parallel lines. The lines can be parallel to a WCS axis, or at a specified distance from a selected line. Line Creation Special Dialog Bar fields for Line Creation. Dialog Bar Angle If you specify the first point, then drag the cursor around the graphics window, the line Increment snaps to each degree of increment that is specified in this field. The Angle Increment is effective only when the Point Method is set to Inferred Point. If any other Point Method is used, the Angle Increment is ignored. To change the Angle Increment, enter a new value in the field and press the <Enter> key. (The new value will not become effective until the <Enter> key is pressed.) Other options on this dialog are common options (i.e., shared by several modes) that are described in the Overview. You can change the angle and/or length of a line immediately after you create it, by keying new values into the dialog bar text fields and pressing <Enter>. Lock/Unlock Mode When you are creating a line that is parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to an existing line, and you choose Lock Mode, the mode of line creation that is currently "rubberbanding" in the graphics window is locked. You can use this option when your next action would normally cause the line creation mode to change, and you want to avoid that. When you choose Lock Mode, the button changes to Unlock Mode. You can choose Unlock Mode to free up the line being created, to switch to a different mode. Let's say you wanted a line through a point, parallel to line A, and ending at a point projected from the endpoint of line B.

When you have specified the start point and selected line A, the new line "rubberbands" parallel to the line A. At this time, the word "Parallel" is displayed in the Status line. However, if you try to select the endpoint of line B, to determine the projection for the end of your new line, the line will snap to that endpoint - not what you want.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

232

Press MB2 to choose Lock Mode, which is the default action. Now you can select the endpoint of Line B to establish the end of the new line.

Basic Curves Parallel Options There are several options that help you control the creation of a parallel line: Parallel to - These buttons are used to create a line parallel to the XC, YC, or ZC axis. Specify a point, choose the button for the desired axis, and specify the end of the line. Note Any edits made immediately after creation of a line parallel to the ZC axis are made in the work plane (i.e., the XC-YC plane of the WCS). For example, if you create a 5.0 inch line that is parallel to ZC, and then use the dialog bar to change the line's length to 6.0 inches, the result is a 6.0 inch line that is parallel to XC. If you want to edit the line, but keep it parallel to the ZC axis, you must use the Edit Curve options. Parallel at Distance From - This line affects line creation when you are creating a series of parallel lines. When this option is set to Original, each new line is created at the specified distance from the line that was originally selected. When it is set to New, each new line is created at the specified distance from the last line created. Offset (in the dialog bar) - The distance that the new line is offset. Dialog Bar Fields The following fields are available in the dialog bar during line creation and editing:

The XC, YC, and ZC fields display the location of the line's start point.

The Length field displays the length of the line. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

233

The Angle field displays the angle of the line. This is usually the angle measured counterclockwise from the XC axis. However, for certain creation methods, you can enter a value for an angle measured from another line.

The Offset field lets you enter a value for creating a line parallel to another line at the specified distance. For most line creation methods, you can establish precise values for the angle and/or length of the line by keying the values into the text fields in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter> immediately after creating the line. Basic Curve Line Creation Methods Below is a list of all available Basic Curve line creation methods. The following sections cover these methods in detail. There is also a quick reference sheet of the most commonly used methods. Between two points Through a point and horizontal or vertical Through a point and parallel to the XC, YC, or ZC axis Through a point and at an angle to the XC axis Through a point and parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to a line Through a point and tangent or perpendicular to a curve Tangent to a curve and tangent or perpendicular to another curve Tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line Tangent to a curve and at an angle to a line A bisector of the angle between two lines Midway between two parallel lines Through a point and normal to a face Parallel at a distance
Line Between Two Points

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

234

To create a line between two points, simply define the two points. The points may be cursor locations, control points, or values established by keying numbers into the XC, YC, and ZC fields in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter. You can also define the points with the Point Constructor, if you choose Point Constructor from the Point Method option menu. Note Remember, if you want to key values into the dialog bar, the XC, YC, or ZC field must have focus when you press Enter. Be aware that, if you specify a cursor location for the second point, and the Angle Increment value is not zero, the line snaps to the nearest angle as determined by that value. To create a constant length line through two points, define the first point, then key in the length in the Length field in the dialog bar and press Tab. When you define the second point, the line will remain at the constant length. As always, you can also just key in the desired length immediately after the line is created.
Line Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical

If, when the Point Method is set to Infer, you define the second point using a cursor location, the line snaps to vertical or horizontal if it is within the Snap Angle.
Line Through a Point and Parallel to the XC, YC, or ZC Axis

To define a line through a point and parallel to the XC, YC, or ZC axis: 1. Define the start point. 2. Under Parallel to on the dialog, choose XC, YC, or ZC. The line rubberbands in the graphics area. 3. Establish the length by specifying a cursor location, selecting geometry, or keying a value into the Length field in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter.
Line Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING To define a line through a point and at an angle to the XC axis:

235

1. Define the start point. 2. Key in the desired angle into the Angle text field in the dialog bar and press the <Tab key. A line at this angle rubberbands in the graphics area. 3. Establish the length by specifying a cursor location, selecting geometry, or entering a length value in the dialog bar. You can also create a line by any method, then change the newly created line to a specific angle by entering the desired value in the Angle field Note Angles are measured counterclockwise from the XC axis. Line Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line

To define a line through a point and parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to an existing line: 1. Define the start point of the new line. 2. Select the existing (reference) line, being careful not to select one of its control points. You may do the first two steps in either order. Move the cursor around. Depending on where your cursor is, you can preview the parallel, perpendicular, or angled line. The Status line shows you which mode is being previewed. The angle used during the "preview" is whatever happened to be in the Angle field of the dialog bar at the time you selected the line. 3. If you want to create a line at a specific angle to the selected reference line, tab to the Angle field in the dialog bar, key in the desired angle, and tab out of the field. Note You should be aware that the line at an angle from a point on the reference line may not be a true perpendicular line unless the reference line lies on the construction plane or is on the WCS. 4. Make sure you use the <Tab> key, not the <Enter> key. If you use <Enter>, the line is created at the specified angle from the XC axis, at the length specified in the Length field. 5. If Tracking is ON, when the line starts to rubberband, the Angle field in the dialog bar will not display the angle you keyed in. Rather, it will show the angle of the line relative to the WCS. 6. To turn Tracking OFF, use PreferencesUser Interface. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

236

7. When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a cursor location, selecting geometry, or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. If selecting geometry to specify the length of your line would result in the line type being changed, press MB2 to choose Lock Mode (the default action), then select the limiting geometry. Line Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve

To define a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to a curve: 1. Define the start point of the new line. 2. Select the existing curve, being careful not to select one of its control points. You may select the curve first, then define the point, if you are creating a tangent line. If you are creating a perpendicular line, you must define the point first. A tangent line is created in the plane of the selected curve or, if the curve is nonplanar, in the plane of the WCS. The line rubberbands tangent and (if you defined the point first) perpendicular to the selected curve. Sometimes, you may find that the rubberbanding line is on the wrong side of the curve. Move the cursor inside, then outside, the curve until the line snaps to the other side. 3. When the desired line is displayed, select the highlighted geometry. The figure shows two examples of creating a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to an arc and a circle. You can use the same method with conics and splines. Notice that the dashed line shows the line you would get with the dashed cursor in that position, or selecting the object in that position. The same is true for the solid line and cursor. Line Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

237

To define a line tangent to a curve and tangent or perpendicular to another curve: 1. Select the first curve, being careful not to select one of its control points. The line rubberbands tangent to the selected curve. If the rubberbanding line is on the wrong side of the curve, move the cursor inside, then outside, the curve until the line snaps to the correct side. 2. Move the cursor over the second curve. Notice that the line snaps either tangent or perpendicular to the curve, depending on the cursor location. 3. When the desired line is displayed, select the second curve. The figure shows examples of creating a line tangent to a circle and tangent or perpendicular to another circle. Notice that the dashed line shows the line you would get with the dashed cursor position. The same is true for the solid line and cursor. Line Tangent to a Curve and Parallel or Perpendicular to a Line

To define a line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line: 1. Select the curve, being careful not to select one of its control points. The line rubberbands tangent to the selected curve, depending on the cursor position. If the line is rubberbanding on the wrong side of the curve, move the cursor inside, then outside, the curve until the line snaps to the correct side. 2. Select the line, again being careful not to select one of its control points. The rubberbanding line is shown parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to, the selected line. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

238

3. When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a cursor location, selecting geometry, or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. If selecting geometry to specify the length of your line would result in the line type being changed, press MB2 to choose Lock Mode (the default action), then select the limiting geometry. In the figure, you would get the dashed line with the cursor in the dashed position and the solid line with the cursor in the solid position. Line Tangent to a Curve and at an Angle to a Line

To define a line tangent to a curve and at an angle to a line: 1. Select the curve, being careful not to select one of its control points. The line rubberbands tangent to the selected curve, depending on the cursor position. If the line is rubberbanding on the wrong side of the curve, move the cursor inside, then outside, the curve until the line snaps to the correct side. 2. Select the line, again being careful not to select one of its control points. The rubberbanding line is shown parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to, the selected line. The angle that is used initially is the value that was displayed in the Angle field of the dialog bar when you selected the line. 3. Tab to the Angle field in the dialog bar, key in the desired angle, and tab out of the field. Now the line rubberbands at the specified angle. If Tracking is ON, when the line starts to rubberband, the Angle field in the dialog bar will not display the angle you keyed in. Rather, it will show the angle of the line relative to the WCS. To turn Tracking OFF, use PreferencesUser Interface. 4. When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a cursor location or selecting geometry. You can establish a specific length immediately after the line is created, by keying in the value in the dialog bar.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

239

If selecting geometry to specify the length of your line would result in the line type being changed, press MB2 to choose Lock Mode (the default action), then select the limiting geometry. Line that Bisects the Angle between Two Lines

To define a bisector line: 1. Select two nonparallel lines. The selected lines do not have to intersect. The four possible bisector lines rubberband as you move the cursor around the screen. 2. When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a cursor location, selecting geometry, or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. The figure shows how the cursor position determines which of the four possible bisector lines is displayed. Line Midway Between Two Parallel Lines

To define a line midway between two parallel lines: 1. Select the first line. The endpoint nearest where you select this line determines the start point of the new line. 2. Select a line parallel to the first line. A new line rubberbands parallel to the selected lines and midway between them. It begins at the projection of the closest endpoint of the first selected line onto the new line. 3. When the desired line is displayed, establish the length by specifying a cursor location, selecting geometry, or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. Line Through a Point and Normal to a Face

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

240

To define a line through a point and normal to a face: 1. Define the point. The line rubberbands from the point. 2. Choose the Select Face option on the Point Method menu and select the face. The line is created through the point and normal to the face, limited to its intersection with the face. You can select the face first, but if you do, you will not see any rubberbanding. The line will just be created after you specify the point. If the point is on the face, the line rubberbands normal to the face until you specify a limiting point or object. Line Parallel to Another Line at a Distance

You can use the Parallel at Distance From options to create a series of parallel lines. When you are creating multiple parallel lines, the offset distance can be measured either from the last created line (New) or from the original selected line (Original). The value in the Offset field in the dialog bar determines the distance between the selected line and parallel line. To define a line parallel to another line at a distance: 1. Turn String Mode OFF. You cannot create a line parallel at a distance when you are in string mode. 2. Select the base line, keeping the center of the selection ball on the side of the line that you want the offset measured in. 3. Enter the offset distance in the Offset field in the dialog bar and press <Return. The offset line is created. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

241

4. To create another line at the same offset, press <Return again. To create another line at a different offset, key in that value and press <Return. Quick Reference on Line Creation Methods Note With most line creation methods, the order of some of the creation steps can be reversed.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

242

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

243

d. Basic Curve Arcs When you are in arc creation mode, there are several options on the Basic Curves dialog that are unique to arc creation. These options are covered in this section. Full Circle Alternate Solution Creation Method Arc Dialog Bar Fields Basic Curves Dialog Options (unique for arc mode) When this option is ON, any arc that you create, regardless of the creation method, is created as a complete circle. Creates the complement of the currently previewed arc; can be used only while the arc is being previewed. If you choose Alternate Solution after moving the cursor to the dialog, the previewed arc changes and you will not get the result you want. Specifies how the points (or other objects) that you select will be used to define the arc. The dialog bar includes special fields for arc creation and editing.

Other options on this dialog are common options (i.e., shared by several modes) that are described in the Overview. Creation Method There are two basic methods for creating arcs:

Start, end, point on arc With this method, you can create an arc that passes through three points, or which passes through two points and is tangent to a selected object. The object selected for tangency to an arc cannot be a parabola, hyperbola, or spline. (However, one of these objects can be selected for tangency to a complete circle.)

Center, start, end

With this method, you define the center point, then the start and end of the arc. The start and end points can be adjusted by entering angle values in the dialog bar, as shown below. Dialog Bar Fields The following fields are available in the dialog bar during arc creation and editing:

The XC, YC, and ZC fields display the location of the arc's start point.

The Radius field displays the radius of the arc.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING The Diameter field displays the diameter of the arc.

244

The Start Angle field displays the beginning angle of the arc, measured from the XC axis and moving counterclockwise.

The End Angle field displays the ending angle of the arc, measured from the XC axis and moving counterclockwise. Note The Start Angle and End Angle fields are unavailable when you are using the Start, End, Point on Arc creation method. Basic Curves Arc Creation Methods Below is a list of all available arc creation methods. The following sections cover these methods in detail. There is also a quick reference sheet of the arc creation methods.

Start point, end point, point on arc or tangent to an object Start point, tangent to an object, end point Center, start point, end point

Note The object selected for tangency cannot be a parabola, hyperbola, or spline. (However, one of these objects can be selected for tangency to a complete circle.) For all arc creation methods, you can establish precise values for the radius or diameter by keying the value into the text field in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter> immediately after creating the arc. Start Point, End Point, Point on Arc or Tangent to an Object

To create an arc using this method: 1. Define two points. The points may be cursor locations, control points, or values established by keying numbers into the dialog bar and pressing <Enter>. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING An arc is displayed by dragging. Its endpoints are the two defined points.

245

2. Define a third point or select a tangent object (other than a parabola, hyperbola, or spline). Start Point, Tangent to an Object, End Point

To create an arc using this method: 1. Define the start point. This may be a cursor location, control points, or values established by keying numbers into the dialog bar and pressing <Enter>. 2. Select a tangent object (other than a parabola, hyperbola, or spline). An arc rubberbands starting at the point and tangent to the selected object. 3. Define the end point. This method is similar to the previous one, but is intended to let you define tangency at the endpoints of an object. If the start point is an endpoint of the tangent object, the arc will come off the end of the selected object and be tangent to it. Center, Start Point, End Point

To create an arc using this method: 1. Choose the Center, Start, End button to turn the option ON. 2. Define the center point. This may be a cursor location, control points, or values established by keying numbers into the dialog bar and pressing <Enter>. 3. Define the second point. This establishes the radius of the arc and the start angle. An arc is rubberbanded, in a counterclockwise direction from the second point. 4. When the desired arc is displayed, specify a cursor location, select limiting geometry, or enter an end angle in the dialog bar. (Remember that you can get the complement of the previewed arc by pressing MB2 for Alternate Solution.)

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Basic Curves Quick Reference Arc Creation Methods Note In many cases, the order of some of the creation steps can be reversed.

246

e. Basic Curves Circles In the first portion of this section, the various options on the dialog that pertain to circle creation are explained. Following that, there is a summary of circle creation methods. Multiple Positions Basic Curves Dialog Options (unique for circle mode) When this option is ON, each time you define a point, a copy of the previously created circle is created, with its center at the specified point.

Note The String Mode option is unavailable; it is not available in circle mode. Dialog Bar Fields The following fields are available in the dialog bar during circle creation and editing: The XC, YC, and ZC fields display the location of the circle's center. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING The Radius field displays the radius of the circle.

247

The Diameter field displays the diameter of the circle. Basic Curves Circle Creation Methods Below is a list of all available circle creation methods. The following sections cover these methods in detail. There is also a quick reference sheet of the arc and circle creation methods. For all circle creation methods, you can establish precise values for the radius, diameter, start angle, or end angle by keying the value into the text field in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter> immediately after creating the circle (while it is still selected). Center point, point on circle Center point, radius or diameter Center point, tangent object Center Point, Point on Circle

To create a circle using this method:


Define a point (by selecting it in the graphics area, by one of the Point Method options, or by entering the XC, YC, and ZC values in the dialog bar). This becomes the center of the circle. Define a second point. The circumference of the circle passes through this point. (If the Delta option is toggled ON, any values that you enter in the dialog bar XC, YC, and ZC fields for the second point will be applied relative to the first point.)

Center Point, Radius or Diameter

To create a circle using this method: 1. Define a point (by selecting it in the graphics area or by entering the XC, YC, and ZC values in the dialog bar). This becomes the center of the circle. 2. Define the radius or diameter in the dialog bar. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Center Point, Tangent Object

248

To create a circle using this method: 1. Define a point (by selecting it in the graphics area or by entering the XC, YC, and ZC values in the dialog bar). This becomes the center of the circle. 2. Select an object. The circle is created tangent to this object.

Basic Curves Quick Reference Circle Creation Methods

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING f. Basic Curves Fillets

249

When you choose the Fillet option, the Curve Fillet dialog is displayed. You can use the Fillet option to "round off" the intersection between two or three selected curves. You can also specify how the curves are trimmed when the fillet is created. Note Fillets in active sketches are created with the Sketch Fillet dialog, instead of the Curve Fillet dialog that is described in this section. Create Fillet Dialog Options Simple Fillet Creates a fillet between two coplanar nonparallel lines. Constructs a fillet between two curves, including points, lines, circles, conics or splines. A 2 Curve two curve fillet is generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first selected curve Fillet to the second. 3 Curve Creates a fillet between three curves, which can be any combination of points, lines, arcs, Fillet conics, and splines. Radius Defines the radius of the fillet. Inherit Lets you define the values of the new fillet by selecting an existing fillet. Trim Options If you choose to create a two or three curve fillet, you need to choose a trimming option. Trimming shortens or extends the selected curves to join with the fillet. (Depending on the fillet option selected, some trimming options are changed or are not available.) Point Lets you use the Point Constructor to select some or all of the curves to fillet. Constructor Overview The figure below shows the three types of fillets you can create in NX.

The general procedure to create a fillet is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose the type of fillet you want to create. Indicate how you wish to trim the objects. Enter the radius of the fillet. Select the objects. Specify the approximate center point of the fillet. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Note Many of these steps are done simultaneously when creating simple fillets. There is a quick reference sheet about creating fillets at the end of this section.

250

You can use the Point Constructor to select one, two, or all three of the curves for a 2 curve fillet or 3 curve fillet. The Point Constructor remains modal until you choose OK or Back. The figure below shows two examples of fillets created using the Point Constructor.

Trimming Options If you choose to create a two or three curve fillet, you need to choose a trimming option. Trimming shortens or extends the selected curves to join with the fillet. Depending on the fillet option selected, some trimming options are changed or not available. Note Points cannot be trimmed or extended. Choose one of the following trim options: Trim First Curve Delete Second Curve Trim Third Curve In 2 Curve Fillet, you can choose to trim the first, last, or both curves. The Delete Second Curve and Trim Third Curve options are not available. In 3 Curve Fillet, you can choose to trim the first, last, or both curves and delete the second curve. If you do not select any of the trimming options, none of the curves are trimmed. Note If the trimmed curve has a length equal to zero and there is no associative connection to the curve, it is deleted.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

251

Define the Fillet Center After selecting the curves to be rounded, indicate the approximate center point of the fillet curve. The position you select is projected normally to the first curve to help determine where the fillet should start. Indicate the center by using the cursor or the Point Constructor. Using the cursor location method in the Point Constructor selects a position in the X-Y plane of the WCS. This is different from the normal method for indicating the arc center, which specifies a point in a plane parallel to the viewing screen. Undo After you have created a fillet and trimmed the original curves, you can choose Undo to delete the fillet and reverse the trim. Simple Fillet Creates a fillet between two coplanar nonparallel lines. You determine the size of the fillet by entering a value for the radius. The lines are automatically trimmed to the points of tangency with the arc. The fillet that is created is directly related to where you select the lines. Both lines are selected at the same time. You must position the selection ball in such a manner as to include both lines.

Note The trim options and Point Constructor are not available. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING If the selection ball contains only one line, an error message displays.
Cannot find two lines within the selection ball radius

252

Both lines are selected by indicating a single point. The point determines how the fillet is created; it indicates the center of the arc. Position the center of the selection ball nearest to the intersection where you want the fillet formed. Each line extends or trims to the arc.

2 Curve Fillet Constructs a fillet between two curves, including points, lines, circles, conics or splines. A two curve fillet is an arc generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the second. The fillet created by this method is tangent to both curves.

Fillets Between Two Points If a fillet is created between two points, it is created in a plane based on the location of the points. In the figure below, the reference plane is defined by a vector between each point (A) and the vector parallel with the ZC axis (B). The fillet is created in the plane containing each point and normal to the reference plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

253

Note If the vector between the two points is parallel to the ZC axis, the fillet cannot be constructed. Fillets Between One Point and Another Curve If only one curve is a point, the fillet plane is defined as the plane which contains the vector between the point and the fillet tangency point (A), and the tangent of the filleted object (B) (see the figure below). The fillet plane is totally independent of the WCS.

Fillets Between Two Curves If neither curve is a point, the fillet plane is the plane that contains the tangent of the first curve. The plane is normal to the vector that is normal to both tangents. The two curves do not need to lie in the same plane and the fillet is completely independent of the WCS.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

254

3 Curve Fillet This option creates a fillet between three curves, which can be any combination of points, lines, arcs, conics, and splines. The Radius option is not available. A three curve fillet is a circular arc generated in a counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the third curve. The fillet is constructed in such a way that the center of the arc is equidistant to all three curves. The three curves do not have to lie in the same plane.

The curves are trimmed to the tangent point of the fillet. If the original curve is not tangent to the fillet arc, the extrapolation of the curve necessary to intersect the fillet is calculated and displayed (except for points and splines which cannot be extrapolated). If One Curve is an Arc If any one of the curves selected is an arc, you are required to supply additional information to create the fillet: Tangent Outside Fillet Within Circle Circle Within Fillet Tangent Outside To have the selected arc lie outside of the fillet. To have the fillet lie inside the selected arc. To have the selected arc to lie inside the fillet.

Use Tangent Outside if you wish to have the selected arc lie outside of the fillet to be created.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

255

In the figure above, Tangent Outside was chosen after Curve 1 was selected. With automatic trim, Curve 1 is trimmed from its starting point to the point of tangency. Curve 2 is deleted; Curve 3 is trimmed to the point of tangency. Fillet Within Circle If you want the fillet to lie inside the selected arc, use Fillet Within Circle.

In the figure above, Fillet Within Circle was chosen after Curve 2 was selected. This causes the fillet to lie within the selected arc. With automatic trim, Curve 2 (arc) is deleted, and Curves 1 and 3 are trimmed to the points of tangency. Circle Within Fillet If you want the selected arc to lie inside the fillet, use Circle Within Fillet.

In the figure above, Circle Within Fillet is chosen after selecting Curves 1 and 2. This causes the selected arcs to lie within the fillet. With automatic trim, Curve 2 is deleted, and Curves 1 and 3 are trimmed to their points of tangency to the fillet. Error Messages The following error message is displayed if the three curves you selected cannot form a fillet arc, or if the filleting procedure is unable to converge to a fillet center. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


Invalid Fillet Defined

256

The latter occurs when the maximum allowable number of iterations (100) used to find a point on each of the three curves that is equidistant from the indicated fillet center is exceeded. In this case, choosing another approximate fillet center may yield a fillet. The following error message is displayed when the system is unable to solve the set of quadratic equations. In this case, choosing another approximate fillet center may create a fillet.
No Solution - Fillet Not Created

Basic Curves Quick Reference Fillet Creation Methods

g. Trim

The Trim option on the Basic Curves dialog opens the EditCurve Trim Curve dialog. Edit Curve Parameters

This option lets you edit most types of curves without having to leave the Basic Curves dialog. This option has the same functionality as the Edit Curve Parameters dialog found under EditCurve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING To edit a fillet, use the Edit Fillet option on the Edit Curve dialog.

257

5. Curve Chamfer
This option creates a beveled corner between two coplanar lines or curves. To create a curve chamfer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose the type of curve chamfer to create, either Simple Chamfers or User Defined Chamfers. Indicate how you wish to trim the two curves. Enter either an offset and an angle with respect to the first curve or an offset for both curves. Select the curves that form the corner to be beveled. Indicate the approximate intersection point between the curves.

Note Many of these steps are done simultaneously when creating simple chamfers. When indicating the approximate intersection point between the curves, select the side of the intersection where you want the chamfer created. After the chamfer is created, you have the option to remove the chamfer and restore the original curves. You may create the following types of chamfers: Simple User Defined Offset Offset is the distance between the intersection of the two curves and the beginning of the chamfer line. For simple chamfers, the offset is the same along both curves. Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar lines. Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar curves including lines, arcs, splines, and conics. This option also gives you more control over the trimming than when creating simple chamfers.

Note The offset is measured along the path of the curve and is not necessarily a linear distance.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

258

Angle A chamfer can also be created using one offset and an angle. The angle is measured from the second curve.

a. Simple Chamfers Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar lines. Note This option only works with lines. To create a chamfer between other types of objects, see User Defined Chamfers. To create a simple chamfer: 1. Enter an offset and choose OK. 2. Select the corner such that the two lines are both within the selection ball and the center of the selection ball is inside the desired corner. The lines are shortened or extended as needed to create the chamfer.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING User Defined Chamfers

259

Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar curves including arcs, splines, and conics. This option gives you more control over the trimming than when creating simple chamfers. Trimming Options The following options are available for trimming the original curves: Automatic Trim - Automatically causes both curves to either extend or shorten to join the chamfer curve (see the figure below). If the original curves do not trim as you wanted, restore the original curves (using Undo) and choose Manual Trim. Manual Trim - Lets you select which chamfered curves you want trimmed. You then specify whether to trim the curve and which side of the chamfer to trim. The selected side of the chamfer is cut from the geometry. No Trim - Leaves the original curves unaltered.

Use one of the two following approaches to create user defined chamfers:

Define the offset from the first curve and an angle from the second curve.

Define an offset from both curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

260

6. Rectangle
Lets you create a rectangle by selecting two diagonal corners. When using the cursor to define the corners, a rubberbanding effect takes place. This allows you to see the rectangle before it is actually created. Rectangles are created in the XC-YC, YC-ZC, or XC-ZC plane.

The Rectangle option is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. Procedure To create a rectangle: 1. Indicate the first corner; use Point Constructor or enter the coordinates. 2. Indicate the second corner; either drag the cursor to the desired location and click the mouse button or enter the coordinates. Note If the rectangle you are creating does not lie in the XC-YC, YC-ZC, or XC-ZC plane, two of its edges are created parallel to the YC axis.

7. Polygon
Creates a polygon in a plane parallel to the XC-YC plane of the WCS. To create a polygon: 1. Specify the number of sides. 2. Choose the size method. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3. Enter either a radius and orientation angle or length of side and orientation angle. 4. Specify the origin for the polygon. There are three methods available for defining the size of a polygon.

261

Inscribed Radius Side of Polygon Circumscribed Radius

Polygon Dialog Options Enter the radius of an inscribed circle. Enter a value for the length of one side of the polygon. This length is applied to all sides. Enter the radius of an circumscribed circle.

The number of sides specified defines the shape of the polygon. The orientation angle is the angle the polygon is rotated away from the XC axis in the counterclockwise direction. This angle indicates where the first corner of the polygon is located. The origin is the point defining the center point of the polygon and is specified using the Point Constructor. Inscribed Radius You can define the size of a polygon by entering the radius of an inscribed circle. An inscribed radius is also the distance from the origin to the middle of a side of the polygon.

Note The software does not create the circles or the reference dimensions shown in the figures on this page. They are included here only as visual aids to support the text. Circumscribed Radius This option defines the size of a polygon given the radius of a circumscribed circle. A circumscribed radius is the distance from the origin to a corner of the polygon.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

262

8. Conic Curves (ellipse, parabola, hyperbola)


Lets you create an ellipse. Lets you create a parabola. Lets you create an hyperbola. Lets you create conic sections. Overview of Conics Conics are created mathematically by sectioning cones. The type of curve that results from the section depends on the angle at which the section passes through the cone (see the figure below). A conic curve is located with its center at the point you specify, in a plane parallel to the work plane (the XC-YC plane).

Specific types of conics are created when working with geometric constraints or certain types of applications. There are four types of conic curves you can create: arc/circle, ellipse, parabola and hyperbola. Each is a separate icon under curve creation. The General Conic option gives you another way to define ellipses, parabolas, and hyperbolas. An ellipse and a general conic are described using construction techniques (major and minor axes, end slopes, etc.). A parabola and hyperbola require more of a "textbook" definition (focal length; vertices; etc.). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

263

Conics curve in a single direction. In some instances they can be more useful than splines. One good use for conics is in blending transitions between two existing curves where reversals in slope (or bumps in the transition curve) are a problem (see the figure below).

a. Ellipse

Creating an ellipse is most useful when you want to draw a foreshortened circle, because it lets you specify the major and minor diameters. Major diameter is usually equal to the true diameter of the circle. Minor diameter usually represents the amount of foreshortening. The default ellipse is created in a plane parallel to the work plane, as shown below.

Note The Ellipse option is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. To create an ellipse: 1. Indicate the center point of the ellipse using the Point Constructor. 2. Define the creation parameters of the ellipse. Semimajor and Semiminor An ellipse has two axes: a major axis and a minor axis (the midpoint of each is at the center of the ellipse). The longest diameter of the ellipse is the major axis; the shortest diameter the minor axis. The semimajor and semiminor values refer to half the length of these axes.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

264

Start and End Angle An ellipse is created in the counterclockwise direction about the positive ZC axis. The start and end angles determine the starting and ending positions of the ellipse and are measured from the major axis.

b. Hyperbola

This option allows you to create a hyperbola. By definition, a hyperbola contains two curves - one on either side of its center. In NX, only one of these curves is constructed. The center lies at the intersection of the asymptotes and the axis of symmetry passes through this intersection. The hyperbola is rotated from the positive XC axis about the center and lies in a plane parallel to the XC-YC plane.

To create a hyperbola: 1. Indicate the center of the hyperbola using Point Constructor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 2. Define the parameters of the hyperbola.

265

A hyperbola has two axes: a transverse axis and a conjugate axis. The semi-transverse and semi-conjugate parameters refer to half the length of these axes. The relationship between these two axes determines the slope of the curve. Width parameters for a hyperbola are the Minimum DY and Maximum DY. Minimum DY and Maximum DY limit the sweep of the hyperbola on either side of the axis of symmetry. DY values determine the length of the curve. If a Minimum DY value is entered that is algebraically greater than the Maximum DY value, the lower value is automatically made the minimum and the higher value the maximum. The angle the semi-transverse axis makes with the XC axis is defined as the rotation angle of a hyperbola. The pivot point is at the center of the hyperbola and the angle of rotation is referenced from the positive XC direction. The angle is measured in a counterclockwise direction. c. Parabola

A parabola is a set of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix), lying in a plane parallel to the work plane. The default parabola is constructed with its axis of symmetry parallel to the XC axis. To create a parabola: 1. Indicate the vertex for the parabola using the Point Constructor. 2. Define the creation parameters of the parabola.

The focal length is the distance from the vertex to the focus. The focal length must be greater than zero. Note A parabola created by selecting five points on the curve lies in the plane defined by those points. A parabola created by defining the vertex location and keying in values to describe the curve, however, always lies parallel to the XC-YC work plane. Width parameters for a parabola are the Minimum DY and Maximum DY. Minimum DY and Maximum DY limit the sweep of the parabola on either side of the axis of symmetry.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

266

DY values determine the length of the curve by limiting the displayed width of the parabola. If a Minimum DY value is entered that is algebraically greater than the Maximum DY value, the lower value is automatically made the minimum and the higher value the maximum. The rotation angle of a parabola is the angle formed between the axis of symmetry and the XC axis. It is measured in a counterclockwise direction with a pivot point at the vertex. d. General Conic

This option creates conic sections by using either one of the various loft conic methods or the general conic equation. The resulting conic is either a circle, an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola; depending on the mathematical results of the input data. The General Conic option is more flexible than the ellipse, parabola, and hyperbola options, since it allows several different methods for defining the curve. To create a general conic: 1. Choose a construction method. 2. Indicate the location of the first point of the conic using the Point Constructor or define the first coefficient. 3. Specify the remaining points of the conic and/or define the slope, anchor, Rho, or remaining coefficients. Construction Methods 5 Points 4 Points, 1 Slope 3 Points, 2 Slope 3 Points, Anchor 2 Points, Anchor, Rho Coefficients 2 Points, 2 Slope, Rho General Conic Construction Methods Creates a conic section defined by five coplanar points. Creates a conic section defined by four coplanar points, with a slope at the first point. Creates a conic section defined by three points, the slope at the first point, and the slope at the third point. Creates a conic section defined by three points on the conic and the intersection point of the two end tangent vectors. Creates a conic given two points on the conic section, an anchor point to determine the starting and ending slopes, and the projective discriminant, Rho (which is used to determine a third point on the conic section). Creates a conic using an equation where the controlling conic parameters are user defined. Creates a conic given two points on the conic section, the starting and ending slopes, and the projective discriminant, Rho.

The conic always passes through each point you specify, unless points lie on the two branches of a hyperbola. With the two methods utilizing slopes, the slope(s) lies at the end(s) of the conic. The slope is projected to the plane of the conic. If the slopes are not in the plane generated by the points defining the conic, the conic is not created and an error message is displayed. 5 Points This option lets you create a conic section by defining five coplanar points. Define the points using the Point Constructor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

267

If the conic section created is an arc, an ellipse, or a parabola, it will pass through the points starting at the first point and ending at the fifth.

If the conic section created is a hyperbola, the first and fifth points are not necessarily connected. Even though points on both branches are defined, only one of the two branches is created (see the figure below).

4 Points, 1 Slope Creates a conic section defined by four coplanar points, with a slope at the first point. The tangent vector does not need to lie in or be parallel to the plane of the curve. Controlling the Slope To control the slope of the curve at the endpoint (the first point in the conic), use one of the following options: Vector Components Direction Point Slope of Curve Angle Defines the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates. Lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. Lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint. Lets you define the slope by entering an angle. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Vector Components

268

The Vector Components method enables you to define the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates (see the figure below). As an example, vector components would be used if you knew the slope should be over three inches in the X direction and up two inches in the Y direction. The slope defined with vector components is parallel to the imaginary line.

Direction Point Direction Point lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. The slope is defined by indicating a point in the direction of the desired curvature. With the point defined, an imaginary line is calculated from the current position on the conic through the direction point.

Slope of Curve Slope of Curve lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint (see the figure below). The selected curve does not have to lie in the same plane as the conic. This method is used when you have an existing curve which represents the slope of the curve at the first point.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

269

Angle Angle lets you define the slope by entering an angle. The angle specified is in the work plane and is always measured counterclockwise from the positive XC axis. The derivative vector is computed from this angle.

3 Points, 2 Slope Creates a conic section using three points, the slope at the first point, and the slope at the third point.

To control the slope of the curve at the endpoints, use one of the following options: Vector Components Direction Point Defines the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates. Lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Slope of Curve Angle Lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint. Lets you define the slope by entering an angle.

270

Once the end slope is specified, the conic section is created. 3 Points, Anchor Creates a conic section defined by three points on the conic and the intersection point of the two end tangent vectors.

Use the Point Constructor to specify the three points. The position of the anchor point (the intersection point of the two vectors) is used to calculate the slope of the conic at the first and third points. The anchor provides a method of modifying the slope of the curve. The farther away the anchor is from the endpoints, the more rounded the slope of the curve (see the figure below).

2 Points, Anchor, Rho Creates a conic given two points on the conic section, an anchor point to determine the starting and ending slopes, and the projective discriminant. The projective discriminant, Rho, is used to determine a third point on the conic section. Consider a line you construct from the anchor point to the midpoint of the line connecting the two endpoints of the conic section. The third point on the conic section lies somewhere along this line.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

271

In the figure above, the distance D1 is determined from the value entered for Rho. The value entered for Rho must be between 0 and 1. The type of conic section created is determined by this value.

If Rho is < 1/2, an ellipse is created. If Rho is = 1/2, a parabola is created. If Rho is > 1/2, a hyperbola is created.

The appropriate conic section is created after Rho is entered. The Rho value can be used to control the elongation of the curve in place of a third, intermediate point. The Rho value represents a decimal fraction of the distance from the endpoints to the anchor. The closer the Rho value gets to one, the more elongated the conic becomes.

Coefficients This method creates a conic using the equation


Ax2 + Bxy + Cy2 + Dx + Ey + F = 0

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

272

where the controlling conic parameters (A, B, C, D, E, and F) are user defined. The conic created lies in the work plane. The orientation and shape of a conic, limiting form of a conic, and degenerate conic can be defined by entering the desired coefficients. The coefficients method is useful when converting curves from another graphics system, since it represents the data commonly used in the database to redefine a conic. The default coefficients define a circle with a unit radius, centered at the origin of the WCS. 2 Points, 2 Slope, Rho Creates a conic given two points on the conic section, the starting and ending slopes, and the projective discriminant. The lines defined by the two points and their respective slopes are intersected to establish the anchor point.

To control the slope of the curve at the endpoints, use one of the following options: Vector Components Direction Point Slope of Curve Angle Defines the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates. Lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. Lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint. Lets you define the slope by entering an angle.

The projective discriminant, Rho, is used to determine a third point on the conic section. Consider a line constructed from the anchor point to the midpoint of the line connecting the two endpoints of the conic section. The third point on the conic section lies somewhere along this line. The value entered for Rho must be between 0 and 1. The type of conic section created is determined by this value.

If Rho is < 1/2, an ellipse is created. If Rho is = 1/2, a parabola is created. If Rho is > 1/2, a hyperbola is created.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

273

9. Helix
Use the Helix command to specify the number of turns the helix makes about its axis, its pitch (the distance between each turn), its turn direction, its orientation, and a fixed or variable radius. The resulting helix is both a spline and a helix feature. The following are examples of helices with both a fixed radius and a law controlled radius. Fixed radius helix Number of Turns = 3. Turn Direction = Right Hand (counterclockwise) Pitch Radius Linear law variable radius helix

Number of Turns = 3 End Value = 2 (distance from the helix end point to the helical axis) Turn Direction = Right Hand (counterclockwise) Pitch Start Value = 1 (distance from the helix base point to the start point) Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveCurve Drop-downHelix InsertCurveHelix

a. Create a helix with a fixed radius This example shows how to create a helix with a fixed radius by defining its direction and location. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

274

1. Choose InsertCurveHelix. 2. In the Helix dialog box, in the Number of Turns box, type a value for the number of turns you want the helix to make about its axis. For this example, a value of 3 is entered. Note The value can be less than 1 to make a partial turn (such as 0.5), but it must be greater than 0 (zero). 3. In the Pitch box, type a value to define the separation distance between each turn. For this example, a value of 1 is entered. 4. In the Radius box, type a value for the constant radius of the helix. For this example, a value of 2 is entered. 5. In the Turn Direction group, click the Right Hand option for a helix that turns counterclockwise, or the Left Hand option for a helix that turns clockwise. For this example, the Right Hand option is selected. 6. Click Define Orientation. The Specify the orientation dialog box appears to let you select the Z-Axis for the helix. 7. In the graphics window, select an existing edge that you want to use to define the orientation of the helical axis. For this example, the red highlighted edge is selected. The end of the line that is selected determines the direction.

Note If you do not select the Define Orientation option, NX uses the ZC-Axis and the WCS for the helix base point 8. In the Point dialog box, specify the base point of the helical axis (around which the helix will turn). For this example, the center of the highlighted arc is selected for the base point. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

275

9. Click OK, to close the Point dialog box. 10. Click OK or Apply to create the helix. The helix is created with its base point on the specified arc center point.

Number of Turns: Pitch: Radius Method: Turn Direction: b. Create a helix with a law controlled radius

3 1 Enter Radius = 2 Right Hand

This example shows how to create a helix with a law controlled radius. 1. Choose InsertCurveHelix. 2. In the Helix dialog box, the Number of Turns box, type a value for the number of turns you want the helix to make about its axis. For this example, a value of 3 is entered. Note The value can be less than 1 to make a partial turn (such as 0.5), but it must be greater than 0 (zero). 3. In the Pitch box, type a value to define the separation distance between each turn. For this example, a value of 1 is entered. 4. In the Radius Method group, click the Use Law option. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

276

5. In the Law Function dialog box, click the Linear option. 6. In the Law Controlled dialog box, in the Start Value box, type a value for the distance from the start point of the helix to the base point on the helical axis. For this example, a value of 1 is entered.

7. In the End Value box, type a value for the distance from the end point of the helix to the helical axis. For this example, a value of 2 is entered.

8. Click OK. . 9. In the Helix dialog box, in the Turn Direction group, click the Right Hand option for a helix that turns counterclockwise, or the Left Hand option for a helix that turns clockwise. For this example, the Right Hand option is selected. 10. Click OK or Apply to create the helix. The helix is created in the default ZC direction on the WCS. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

277

Number of Turns: Pitch: Radius Method:

Turn Direction:

3 1 Use Law = Linear Start Value: 1 End Value: 2 Right Hand

c. Helix dialog box Option Description Number of Lets you specify the number of turns the helix makes about the helical axis. Turns A value of 1 is equal to one helical turn. A value of 0.5 is equal to half of a helical turn. The value must be greater than 0 (zero).

2 turn helix (left), 4 turn helix (right)

Pitch

Set the distance between turns of the helix along the helical axis. The pitch must be greater than or equal to zero.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

278

0.5 pitch helix (left), 0.2 pitch helix (right)

Distance Tolerance

Available only when you edit a helix. Controls the deviation of the spline that composes the helix from that of a true theoretical helix (which has no deviation). Lower the value to decrease the deviation. The lower the value, the higher is the number of control vertices required to describe the spline. The default value is taken from the Distance Tolerance preference. Available only when you edit a helix. Controls the maximum allowable angle between normals at corresponding points along the helix. Selects the one of the methods to specify how the radius is defined. Use Law Opens the Law Function, dialog box to let you select a law to control the radius of the helix. A helix defined by a law can have a variable radius.

Angle Tolerance

Radius Method

Helix created with a linear law

Enter Radius

Specifies a value for a fixed radius of the helix in the Radius box. The radius remains constant throughout the length of the helix.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

279

Helix created with a constant radius

Turn Direction

Lets you specify the direction of the turns around the helical axis. Right Hand The helix starts at the base point and curls to the right (counterclockwise), as shown in the top part of the following figure.

Right Hand turn direction

Left Hand

The helix starts at the base point and curls to the left (clockwise), as shown in the bottom part of the following figure.

Left Hand turn direction

Note The example helixes shown here are 2D, and were created using a pitch of 0 (zero), with the Radius Method set to Use Law Linear Law (start value: 0.5, end value: 5). The base point for both helixes is along the XC axis. Creates a helix in a user-defined orientation and location. Define Orientation If you do not use this option, the positive ZC direction is used for the direction. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

280

Displays the Point dialog box to let you define the base point for the helix orientation. Point Constructor If you do not use this option, the base point is the current XC=0, YC=0, and ZC=0.

10.

Law Curve

Creates a spline using the Law Subfunction. A law spline is defined by a set of X, Y, and Z components. You must specify a law for each of these three components. To create a law curve: 1. Using the Law Subfunction, choose and define a law option for each of the X, Y and Z components. 2. (Optional) Control the orientation of the spline by either defining an orientation and/or base point, or specifying a reference coordinate system. 3. Choose OK or Apply to create the curve. You can use Information Object to display nonparametric or feature information about a law spline. X, Y, and Z Components Law Curve uses a combination of X, Y and Z components to define a law spline. You must select a law type for each component using Law Subfunction options. For all law splines, you must use a combination of the these options (that is, an X component may be a linear law, a Y component may be an equation law, and the Z component may be a constant law). By combining different options, you can control the mathematical characteristics of each component and the spline. You can define both two-dimensional and three-dimensional law splines. For example, a two-dimensional law spline requires that one plane has a constant value (i.e., a Z component defined by a constant law with a value equal to zero, results in a curve in the XC-YC plane at Z=0. Similarly, an X component with a constant law value equal to 100, results in a curve in the ZC-YC plane at X=100). Note

A law curve is approximated according to the Distance Tolerance and Angle Tolerance set in the Modeling Preferences dialog. Any law curve that is to be greater than 360 degrees must be constructed using either the Helix command or the By Equation law subfunction. When you copy a law curve that was created using the By Equation law subfunction, you must select Reuse Original when you paste it from the Paste Feature dialog box. Otherwise, the copied law curve will not update correctly. If you edit a law curve using Edit Transform Scale or Point Fit, the spline's creation parameters are removed.

a. Controlling the Orientation of Law Curves There are two ways you can control the orientation of a law curve, as explained below.
Define Orientation

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

281

The Define Orientation option lets you control the orientation of the spline by specifying a local Z-axis and point, similar to using the Z-Axis, X-point option of the Coordinate System Tool. You can also define a base point using the Point Constructor option. If you do not define an orientation, the current WCS is used. If you do not define a base point, the current XC=0, YC=0, and ZC=0 is used as a default base point.
Coordinate System

You can also control the orientation of the spline by specifying a coordinate system using three datum planes or two datum planes and a datum axis. The advantage of this method is that, if you change the datum planes and/or axes (by altering the geometry they are associated with), the spline changes accordingly. The datum planes and axes for the reference coordinate system must be created before you create the spline. To use a coordinate system, specify the X, Y, and Z law, then choose Specify Csys Reference on the Create Coordinate System dialog and follow this procedure (as illustrated in the figure below): 1. Select a datum plane as the Placement Plane. The local Z-axis is normal to this plane, as shown by a conehead vector. If the vector is pointing in the wrong direction, choose Reverse Placement Normal. Note If you select any plane of a Datum CSYS, then the entire Datum CSYS coordinate system is used for the Law Curve, and steps 2 and 3 are skipped. 2. Select another datum plane as the Horizontal Reference. The local X-axis points along the intersection of the two planes, as indicated by a conehead vector. If the vector is pointing in the wrong direction, choose Reverse Horizontal Reference. 3. Select a third datum plane or a datum axis to establish the Origin Reference. If you select a plane, the origin of the reference coordinate system is the intersection of the three planes. If you select an axis, the origin is the intersection of the axis with the first selected plane. The cross product of the Z-axis with the X-axis defines the local Y-axis.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

282

Note If you delete any datum plane or axis that defines a local coordinate system for a spline, the spline is deleted.
Examples of Law Curves

The example in the figure below shows a spline created using the Law Curve option, where the X and Y components consist of equations that create a circle and the Z component is determined by a law curve, which consists of two lines and two fillets. A simple sketch was used to define the law curve, which creates a smooth transition in Z as the equations create the circular shape in X and Y.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

283

Note The required expressions must be created before you create the spline. The "t" variable is an internal system variable that is required with By Equation laws. It varies from 0 to 1, which defines the parameter space of the function. The next figure shows two splines. The X component of the dashed line is a cubic law from 0 to 1. The X component of the solid line is a linear law from 0 to 1. The Y and Z component are the same for both splines. The Z components are constant laws with a value of 0 (results in a planar curve in the XC-YC plane) and the Y components are equation laws.

The last figure shows an example of a simple parabola. The X component is a linear law from 0 to 1. The Z component is a constant law with a value of 0 (results in a planar curve in the XC-YC plane) and the Y component is an equation law.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

284

11.

Spline

You can create splines using one of several methods. All splines created in NX are Non Uniform Rational B-splines (NURBS). In this section, the terms "B-spline" and "spline" are used interchangeably. There are four creation methods for splines: By Poles Through Points Fit Perpendicular to Planes Causes the spline to gravitate towards each data point (that is, pole), but not pass through it, except at the endpoints. The spline passes through a set of data points. A specified tolerance is used in "fitting" the spline to its data points; the spline does not necessarily pass through the points. The spline passes through and is perpendicular to each plane in a set.

Note The Spline option is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. Common Concepts The figure below shows three of the spline creation methods.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

285

This section discusses concepts that are common to several Spline options. However, most are common only to By Poles and Through Points. Defining Data A spline is created using either defining data or poles. Defining data includes the points, slopes, and curvatures that describe its shape. For example, when you use the Through Points method, the curve passes exactly through all of the defining points. When you use the Fit method, the curve only passes exactly through the endpoints. For the other points, the spline passes through them within a specified tolerance. Slopes can be assigned to any point that the curve passes through exactly. For this reason, the Fit option only allows slopes to be assigned to the endpoints. Point Specification Methods With Through Points and Fit, you must first choose a point specification method in order to specify the points that will define the spline: Chain From All Chain Within Rectangle Chain Within Polygon Point Constructor Points From File Lets you specify the start and end points, then selects all the points in between. Let you indicate points to form a rectangle. All points within the rectangle are selected. You then must specify the first and last points. Let you indicate points to form a polygon. All points within the shape you have created are selected. You then must specify the first and last points. Lets you use the Point Constructor to define the spline points.

Lets you specify a point file to use. (This option appears on this dialog only for Fit. It also appears on the Create Spline Through Points and Create Spline By Poles dialogs.) Point Chain Methods All of the chain methods build a string of points based on the selected objects. You specify which points are to be considered for the chain. The system begins the chain by searching the set of points for the one closest to the start point. The chain then moves on and selects the point closest to that point, then the point closest to that point, and so on until the point selected as the end point is found to be the next closest point. The points chosen for the chain are marked with an asterisk in the system color. It is possible that some of the original set of points will not be included in the chain if they were not one of the "next closest points" before the end point was found. Specifying Points from a File For splines created with By Poles, Through Points and Fit, you can also choose the Points From File option and specify the points using a point file. The table below shows which type of point file should be used for each spline type. Spline Type Point File Type Through Points Series of Points with Slope and Curvature By Poles Series of Points Fit Series of Points Segments (Curve Type) Splines are created in one or more segments. This lets you create splines with an unlimited number of points, since each segment is limited to a maximum of 25 points. The minimum number of points drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

286

required for all splines is one more than the degree of the spline, and all splines are limited to a degree of 24. A Single Segment spline is a Bezier curve; a Multiple Segment spline is a B-spline (the divisions between spline segments are not visible). Curve Degree Every spline has a degree - a mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve. The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment. For this reason, you cannot have a spline with less points than the degree. A higher degree curve is stiffer in the sense that you have to move its poles a long way to produce any appreciable change in the shape of the curve. Lower degree curves are more pliable, and tend to follow their poles much more closely. As explained above, the degree of a NX spline must be between 1 and 24. However, we recommend the use of cubics (a degree of 3) when creating splines. Higher degree curves are more likely to contain undesirable oscillations, and they reduce the chance of transferring data to other systems which may not support them. Creating lower degree curves results in faster performance during subsequent operations such as machining, display, etc. You should use lower degree curves whenever possible (3, 4, 5). Use the default degree of three (3) unless you have some good reason for doing otherwise. We do not recommend that you use a degree of one (1), since this produces curves with corners that may not work in downstream applications. Note The Curve Degree option is not available if you make the curve type Single Segment. The degree of a single segment curve is dependent on the number of its specified points. Closed and Open Splines In general, splines are open - they start at one point and end at another. Closed splines, which start and end at the same point, can be created by choosing the Closed Curve option. This option is only available for multiple segment splines.

Note When you create a closed spline, you do not specify the first point as the last point - the spline is closed automatically. Curve Analysis Display

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

287

You can display curve analysis information for any curve or spline using the Curve Analysis tools from the Analyze Shape Toolbar, or from Analysis Curve. See Curve Analysis in the NX Analysis help for details.

Information Options You can use the Information options described below if you want a more comprehensive analysis of your spline. Information Object provides basic object information (layer, color, etc.) plus some spline specific information such as degree, number of poles, number of segments, number of each continuity type of knot points, and the spline's polynomial/rational status. Information Spline provides the same spline specific information as Information Object. The Complete listing option adds the continuity and coordinates of each knot point, the weight and coordinates of each pole, and additional information (which may include the coordinates, weight, curvature, tolerance, and/or the number of segments) for each defining point. AnalysisCurve allows you more control of some of the Curve Analysis Display parameters, such as the number of teeth, their maximum length, and their minimum or maximum values in the U direction. To control other display parameters (for example, layer, color, line font, or Curve Analysis Display), use Edit Object Display. a. By Poles The data points that you specify for a By Poles spline are called the poles or control points of the curve. The spline gravitates towards each of its poles, but usually does not pass through any of them, except at the endpoints. The figure below shows the differences in a spline's shape when the same data points are used for through points and as poles.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

288

If the spline is created using By Poles, the specified points are interpreted as vertices of a control polygon. Using poles gives you much better control of the overall shape and character of the curve. This option also helps avoid unwanted undulations (reversals of curvature) in the curve. When you choose By Poles, the Create Spline By Poles dialog appears. Create Spline By Poles Dialog Options Curve Type Splines can be created in one (Single Segment) or more (Multiple Segments) segments. Each segment is limited to 25 points. Curve The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment. (It is a Degree mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve.) Closed If this option is toggled ON, the spline will be closed (i.e., it will start and end at the same Curve point). Points Lets you specify a file containing data points that you wish to use for the spline. From File b. Through Points A Through Points spline passes through a set of data points. You can also define slope and/or curvature at any or all of the points. When you choose Through Points, the Create Spline Through Points dialog appears. Create Spline Through Points Dialog Options Curve Type Splines can be created in one (Single Segment) or more segments (Multiple Segments). Each segment is limited to 25 points. Curve Degree The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment. (It is a mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve.) Closed Curve If this option is toggled ON, the spline will be closed (i.e., it will start and end at the same point). Assign Slopes Lets you specify or edit the slope at any point. Assign Lets you assign the curvature of a point on the spline; a slope constraint is automatically Curvatures applied, and the spline's degree must be at least 3. Points From Lets you specify a file containing data points that you wish to use for the spline. File To create a Through Points spline, follow this general procedure: 1. Set the parameters on the Create Spline Through Points dialog, then choose OK. 2. Specify the points for the spline, using one of the point specification methods. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3. Assign slopes and curvatures, then choose OK to create the spline. Assign Slope Use Assign Slopes to specify or edit the slope at any point. Follow this procedure:

289

1. Choose the Assign Slopes button. The Assign Slopes dialog is displayed. 2. Choose one of the Slope Method options. 3. Notice that there is no selection ball on the cursor. Click anywhere near a point - the closest point is selected. An "*" appears at the point and its number is displayed in the Status line. 4. Specify the correct parameter values and/or geometry for the slope method you selected, then choose OK. 5. Repeat these last two steps until all slopes have been specified. Assign Slope Dialog Options Slope The method that will be used to assign a slope to a selected point. Slope Methods are Method Automatic Slope, Vector Component, Direction to Point, Vector to Point, Slope of Curve, and Angle. DXC, DYZ, Defines the vector that specifies the slope when the slope method is Vector Component. and DZC Angle Defines the value of the angle when the Slope Method is Angle. (It appears in place of DXC when you choose the Angle slope method.) Deviation Lets you evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. None is the default, or you can choose By Vectors or By Markers for a graphical display of the deviations whose minimum distance between spline and defining point exceeds the value entered in Threshold. For each qualifying defining point, By Vectors draws a scaled vector from the minimum-distance point on the spline toward the defining point. The length of the vector is determined by scaling the actual deviations. By Markers puts special markers around the qualifying data points. Threshold Used with the By Vectors and By Markers options of the Deviation function (see above). Remove Removes the user-defined slope from the active point. If the selected point has no assigned Slope slope, this button is unavailable. Remove All Removes the user-defined slopes from all points. If none of the selected points have Slopes assigned slopes, this button is unavailable. Redisplay After a refresh, this option redisplays all the specified points, slopes, curvatures, and the Data current active point. Undo Available when editing a spline using the Change Slope option (choose Edit Curve and select the spline). Slope Method Automatic Slope - This option calculates the slope internally for all points by making inferences from the data points specified. Vector Component - When you choose this option, the DXC, DYC, and DZC fields are available. Enter values to define a vector that specifies the slope (see the figure below). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

290

Direction to Point - This option works the same as the Vector to Point option. The only difference is that the distance between the points (i.e., the magnitude) is not significant. Vector to Point - Use this option to define the slope at a point by specifying another point, using the Point Constructor. The vector between the two points defines the slope of the curve at that defining point. Also, the distance between the two points (i.e., the magnitude of the vector) determines how strongly the slope affects the shape of the curve. Slope of Curve - This option matches the slope at the specified point to the slope at the endpoint of an existing curve. Angle - When you choose this option, the DXC field changes to the Angle field, where you enter the desired slope angle (the DYC and DZC fields are unavailable). The angle is specified relative to the work coordinate system. The angle is measured from the XC axis in the XC-YC plane; counterclockwise about the ZC axis. Note You can only apply slopes to a curve whose degree is greater than one. Otherwise, the following error message is displayed: Assigning Slopes Is Not Allowed On Degree 1 Splines Creating splines with a degree of one (1) is discouraged in any case. Note If you change the slope at a point whose curvature has already been assigned, you can get an unexpected result where the curvature's direction changes, but not its magnitude. The existing curvature is always rotated so that the new slope and new curvature are always orthogonal. Assign Curvatures There are some general rules that affect assigning curvature to the points on the spline:

Curvature constraints can only be applied to a point when slope constraint has also been specified. Therefore, when you specify curvature at a point that does not have a specified slope, a slope constraint is applied automatically. Removing the slope constraint at a point also removes any existing curvature constraint at that point.

Note You can only change curvature on a spline whose degree is three or more. Otherwise, the following drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING error message is displayed:


Assigning Curvature Is Not Allowed on Splines With Degree Less Than 3

291

If a spline is defined using points, tangents, or curvature values, this data is removed if you perform nonuniform scaling (under EditTransformScale). You can use Assign Curvatures to specify or edit the curvature at any point. Follow this procedure: 1. Choose the Assign Curvatures button. The Assign Curvatures dialog is displayed. 2. Choose one of the Curvature Method options. 3. Notice that there is no selection ball on the cursor. Click anywhere near a point - the closest point is selected. An "x" appears at the point and its number is displayed in the Status line. 4. Specify the correct parameter values and/or geometry for the curvature method you selected, then choose OK. 5. Repeat these last two steps until all curvatures have been specified. Assign Curvatures Dialog Options The method, either Curvature of Curve or Enter Radius, that will be used to assign a Curvature curvature to a selected point. Method The radius used for the Enter Radius curvature method. Radius Lets you evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. None is the Deviation default, or you can choose By Vectors or By Markers for a graphical display of the deviations whose minimum distance between spline and defining point exceeds the value entered in Threshold. For each qualifying defining point, By Vectors draws a scaled vector from the minimum-distance point on the spline toward the defining point. The length of the vector is determined by scaling the actual deviations. By Markers puts special markers around the qualifying data points. Used with the By Vectors and By Markers options of the Deviation function (see above). Threshold Removes the user-defined curvature value from the active point. If the selected point has Remove no assigned curvature, this option is unavailable. Curvature Removes user-defined curvature values from all points. If none of the points have Remove All curvature assigned, this option is unavailable. Curvatures After a refresh, this option redisplays all the specified points, slopes, curvatures, and the Redisplay current active point. Data Available when editing a spline using the Change Curvature option (choose Edit Curve Undo and select the spline). Curvature Methods Curvature of Curve - With this option, you can match the curvature to the curvature at the endpoint of another curve. The slope from the end of the other curve is also inherited. After you select this option and indicate at which point to apply the curvature constraint, choose OK to select the other curve. Note If you use the Curvature of Curve option on a point that already has a defined slope, the slope inherited from the other curve overrides the existing slope value.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

292

Enter Radius - When you choose this option, the Radius field becomes available. Enter the desired radius of curvature, then choose OK. Note If you enter a negative value for the radius of curvature, the absolute value is used, and a warning message ("Negative radius is not allowed. Using the absolute value") is displayed in the Status line. c. Fit You can create a spline by "fitting" it to the construction points with a specified tolerance. This method reduces the amount of data needed to define the spline. Since you are not forcing the spline to pass exactly through the construction points, the definition is simplified. To create a spline using the Fit method: 1. Using one of the displayed point specification methods, select the data points for the spline. 2. Once you have the data points you can specify the creation parameters as needed from the Create Spline By Fit dialog. 3. Choose OK. Create Spline By Fit Dialog Options Fit Method After you have specified the data points and the Create Spline by Fit dialog displays, you may define how the spline is created by choosing one of the following methods: By Tolerance - Lets you specify the maximum allowable distance (in Tolerance) that the spline may deviate from a data point. The system attempts to reduce the spline data while ensuring that the maximum distance from any raw data point to the spline to be created is less than the error value you specify. The Error value is the maximum distance from any data point to the created spline. A tighter tolerance causes the spline to be closer to the data points; resulting in more spline segments. Note When importing a spline created by the Fit method from a part file which uses different units, if the spline was created using the By Tolerance method, the tolerance value is not changed. For example, if a spline was created using a 0.1 inch tolerance in an inch part file, and you import it into a millimeter part file, the new curve will use a tolerance value of 0.1 mm. Although the shape of the curve is not changed after it is imported, if you edit it the shape may change. By Segments - Lets you specify the number of segments (in Segments) in the spline. With this method, given the number of segments, the best possible fit is made without adding any more knot points. This method only gives you indirect control over the allowable distance the spline may deviate from a data point. This option is faster than the By Tolerance method, since it requires much less computation. The number of segments you should specify depends on the degree of the spline you want to create, the shape of the data, and the degree of tolerance that you are trying to achieve. A general rule of thumb is that you need one segment for every time the slope varies as much as 90 degrees. You can use fewer segments if the spline has a higher degree. By Template - Lets you select an existing spline as a template in which the degree and knot drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

293

sequence are used in the fit process. After invoking the Create Spline by Fit dialog when creating or editing a spline and choosing this method, you are prompted to select a template spline. After selecting a template spline and clicking OK, a fitted spline in which the degree and knot sequence are the same as the template spline is created. The fitting curves created with the By Template option can be used whenever you want fitted curves to have the same degree and same knot sequence. Then, when constructing surfaces from these curves, the number of patches in the surface are reduced. Note You can use the By Template option any time you need to create a freeform surface using either Ruled Surfaces, Thru Curves, or Sweep along three guides with zero tolerance, and you don't want the resulting surface to have an enormous amount of patches. First use the By Template option to refit all of your splines from which the surface is to be constructed, and then apply the surface construction function to these refitted splines. Curve Degree Tolerance Segments Assign End Slopes The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment. (It is a mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve.) Controls how closely the points must conform to the data points. The number of segments in the spline. Opens the Assign Slope dialog to let you specify or edit the slope at an endpoint. Only the end slopes of splines created using the Fit method are definable. You can flip a specified slope by 180 degrees because the direction of the end slopes are limited by the natural shape of the curve, due to the least squares computation. This prevents the curves from having sharp bends. You cannot assign a slope value to an interior point. Lets you control the shape of the spline by changing the weight factor of any of the data points. You are prompted to select a point, and then change its' weight value from the displayed default. The value for the weight of a selected point must be greater than zero. The larger the weight value, the closer the curve will come to that point, although there is no guarantee that the curve will pass through the point. You can successively select points and assign weight values to each. When you have finished assigning weight values to points click OK to return to the Create Spline by Fit dialog. Weight values are used directly as entered into the system, and are not proportionally converted to anything else, such as coordinates or vectors. When creating a fitted spline you can specify a tolerance for how closely the spline must come to the points. If you are concerned about the deviation of the spline from those points, then you should change the Tolerance value instead of using the Change Weights option. Note The default weights are such that sparsely located points are weighted more heavily than densely located points. Note Splines created using the Fit method are not supported for nonuniform scaling under Edit Transform Scale. Information Display Once the spline is created, average and maximum error values display. The error values define the distances that the spline deviates from the data points. A diamond is displayed in a color other than the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Change Weights

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

294

system color over the data point that is farthest away from its intended position on the spline (maximum error). The control polygon is displayed in the system color. If the displayed error data is unacceptable, you may back up and recreate the spline. Note The error values that display are not the same as those you would get with functions such as the Deviation Gauge. The difference becomes obvious if you specify a relatively loose tolerance followed by only a few iterations of the Fit process. Generally, the error reported by Fit will be greater than the deviation reported by the Deviation Gauge. d. Perpendicular to Planes With Perpendicular to Planes, you can create a spline which passes through and is perpendicular to each plane in a set. The maximum number of planes allowed in each set is 100. The figure below is a spline created with the Perpendicular to Planes option. As this figure shows, many methods can be used to create the planes in a set.

The spline segments are linear between parallel planes, and circular arcs between nonparallel planes. The center of each circular segment is the intersection of its bounding planes. The figure below shows how the radius of one circular segment is determined.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING To create a Perpendicular to Planes spline:

295

1. Select the starting plane. 2. Define the start point of the spline. You can select the start point or use the Point Constructor. 3. Select the next plane. If it is not parallel to the starting plane, a dialog asks you to choose the curve's direction. (A conehead vector shows the default direction.) 4. Select the remaining planes. 5. Choose OK to create the spline. Note Reselecting the starting plane as the last plane in the set will not necessarily create a closed spline. Because planes are infinite, the spline is created only to the nearest intersection with the selected plane. The figure below illustrates this principle.

Error Messages If the start point you selected is not on the starting plane, the following message appears.
Point is not on starting plane

The following message appears if you select the same plane consecutively. (Selecting the same plane more than once is allowed, though, as long as you do not select it consecutively.)
Plane selected is identical to previous

12.

Studio Spline

Use the Studio Spline command to interactively create an associative or non-associative spline.

You can create splines by dragging defining points or poles. You can assign curvature constraints at specified defining points or to end poles.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

296

Studio Splines Using Through Points and By Poles Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveStudio Spline InsertCurveStudio Spline

a. Create a Studio Spline This example shows how to create a Studio Spline through points by defining tangency curvature constraints to the grey rectangle construction lines.

1. Click Studio Spline 2. From the Type list, select Through Points.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3.

297

In the graphics window, select the End Point of the first line that the studio spline will be tangent with.

4.

Choose G3 for the curvature constraint.

5.

Select Mid Point for the second point.

6.

Choose G2 for the curvature constraint.

7. Select the End Point of the last line as the tangent for the studio spline.

8.

Choose G3 for the curvature constraint.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 9.

298

To change a constraint before the studio spline is created, clear the check boxes for Infer G1 and Infer G2.

10.

Click OK.

b. Modify a Studio Spline You can double-click a studio spline in the graphics window to edit its defining points or poles. Associative studio splines are also listed as features in the Part Navigator. You can edit:

Associative studio splines Non-associative studio splines Non Uniform Rational B-splines

Defining Point Handles

Defining Pole Handles connected by a control polygon

Insert point handles

To insert a new defining point handle on a spline, click on a segment of the spline. A new point handle is inserted on the spline at the cursor position.

Insert pole handles

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

299

To insert a new pole handle on a spline, position the cursor over an existing pole and do one of the following: o Right-click and choose Insert Pole - Previous o Right-click and choose Insert Pole - Next

Move point or pole handles

Note The movement of point and poles works in conjunction with the settings in the Movement group of the Studio Spline dialog box.

View is the default movement direction. Tip When using View movement mode, press the Shift key while dragging points or poles to limit movement to the vertical or horizontal of the screen.

If necessary, specify a different movement direction in the dialog box before moving poles or points.

To move one or more points or poles, do one of the following:


Drag the point or pole handles to a new point or screen position. Click the point or pole handle and enter a new X, Y, or Z value in the on-screen coordinate input boxes. Note The handles remain selected until you deselect them by pressing Shift and clicking.

Click the middle mouse button or OK when editing is complete to modify the spline.

Delete point and pole handles

With the cursor over a point or pole handle, right-click and choose Delete Point or Delete Pole.

Note

You can make a non-associative spline associative using the Make Associative option, but you cannot make an associative spline non-associative by clearing the Associative option. You can switch between Through Points and By Poles spline types. o When you switch from Through Points to By Poles, the through points and any internal constraints are deleted. o Only the start and end constraints are retained.

c. Manipulate constraint handles to define curvature You can display constraint handles and use these handles to define the curvature of points and end poles. To display and edit the constraint handles: 1. Double-click a spline to open the Studio Spline dialog box. 2. Right-click on a point or end pole and choose Specify Constraint. The constraint handles for that defining point or end pole are displayed. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3. Add the constraints.

300

Tangent Direction G1 handle To change the tangent direction constraint, rotate this handle. To assign tangency direction from another curve, select this handle and then click on the curve point whose tangency you want to adopt. Curvature G2 handle To change the curvature constraint, drag this handle. To assign a curvature constraint from another curve, select this handle and then click on the curve point whose curvature you want to adopt. Tangent G1 Magnitude handle To change the tangent magnitude constraint, drag this handle. Note

To delete the curvature constraint, right-click on handle and choose Delete. To disable the display of a constraint handle, right-click on a point or end pole and clear the Specify Constraint check box.

d. Studio Spline dialog box Type Specifies the type of spline to be created. The spline is either associative or non-associative to the parent features, depending on whether you select or clear the Associative check box in the Settings group. Lets you create a spline by extending a curve through defining points.

Through Points

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Lets you create a spline by constructing and manipulating spline poles.

301

By Poles

Note While creating a spline, you can switch back and forth between the Through Points and By Poles options. When switching from Through Points to By Poles, the through points and any internal constraints are deleted. Only start and end constraints are kept. Point Location / Pole Location Defines spline point or pole locations on the specified Drawing Plane. When referencing existing geometry, you can define G1, G2 and G3 constraints for the first spline point immediately after you specify the point.

Specify Points / Specify Poles

Constraints None The point or pole has no constraint. If a point or pole has a constraint and None is used, any constraint on the point or pole will be deleted. G1 (Tangent) Continuity Type Applies a tangent constraint on a selected spline point. Specify a magnitude factor for this constraint in the G1 Magnitude box. G2 (Curvature) Applies a curvature constraint on a selected spline point. Specify a radius for this constraint in the G2 Radius box.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING G3 (Flow) Applies a flow constraint on a selected spline point. Symmetric Modeling Makes one end point symmetric to a specified direction.

302

With this type of constraint, the spline can be mirrored later on and it will be continuous to its copy

Changes the Continuity Type to G1 if the current value is None, G2 or G3. Specify Tangent

Reverse Tangent Direction

Available when Continuity Type is set to G1, G2 or G3.

Available when a point or a node has a G0 constraint or is attached to another object. Iso-parametric Inferred Type Limits constraints to the U and V directions of a surface. Sectional

For a Through Points spline, this option is available on all locations. For a By Poles spline, this option is available only on start and end poles. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

303 Available when constraining to surface geometry.

Allows constraints to be aligned with any direction. Normal Infers a constraint based on the natural normal of a curve. Only the G1 constraint is available.

Perpendicular to Curve or Edge Infers G1, G2, and G3 constraints from the parent of the points attachment object, such as a curve on surface or edge.

Available when a point or node has a G0 constraint or is attached to an edge or a surface spline created using the Curve on Surface command. Constrain to Attachment Derives the constraints from the parent of the attachment object of the point. Parent When this check box is not selected, the spline does not inherit constraints from the object to which it is attached. Controls the orientation of an inferred G1 constraint. Fix Tangent Orientation When a tangent constraint is assigned at a point, the best possible direction is chosen in order to minimize spline shape change. When this check box is selected, the movement of the constrained point relative to the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

304

neighboring points does not affect the orientation, and the direction remains static. When the check box is not selected, the movement of the constrained point relative to the neighboring points may change the orientation. Lists the defining points of the spline and their constraint conditions in a table format. If you pause your cursor over one of the constraint cells, the constraint condition is explained. Example List

The G0 constraint on point 2 states Point Parent: Spline in the balloon. Click on a row in the list to edit the respective constraint detail parameters. Parameterization Specifies the degree for the spline.

A low degree 2 point spline may result in multiple segments, depending on the constraints applied.
o

Degree

Example If you have a spline with a degree of 5 and curvature constraints at both ends and you lower the degree to 3, then two knots are added to maintain the curvature constraints.

The spline cannot have fewer poles than the degree. This option is not available when Single Segment is selected.

Matched Knot Position

Available when Type is set to Through Points. Places knots only where you locate defining points. Available when Type is set to By Poles.

Single Segment

Creates a spline preview when at least two poles have been specified.

The spline degree is one less than the total number of poles. The higher the number of poles, the greater the degree of the spline.

Closed

Lets you specify that the start and end of the spline are at the same point, forming a closed loop.

Drawing Plane Specifies a plane on which to create and constrain the spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Lets you constrain the drawing plane to the X-Y plane of the CSYS.

305

During spline specification, selected objects that are not on the X-Y plane of the CSYS will be projected onto it. Constrained to Plane When this check box is not selected, you can constrain the drawing plane to one of the other available planes. If you want to constrain the drawing plane to a plane you specify, then click General and use the available plane options. Movement Moves spline points and poles in a specified direction or along a specified plane. Moves points or poles in a specified X, Y or Z direction of the work coordinate system or along one of the principal planes of the WCS. WCS XC YC-ZC YC XC-ZC ZC XC-YC

Moves poles or points in relation to the view plane. View Tip Press and hold the Shift key while dragging points or poles to limit movement to the vertical or horizontal directions of the viewing screen. Vector Lets you define a direction in which to move the selected poles or polylines. You can select a line, a datum axis, an OrientXpress vector, or use the Specify Vector options to define the direction. Vector

NX moves the points or poles in a direction parallel to the vector you specify. Snapping is active. If the object to snap to does not lie in the drag path of the pole, projected snapping is used.

Plane Select a datum plane, datum CSYS or use Specify Plane to define a plane in which to move the selected poles or polylines. Plane

NX moves the points or poles in a direction parallel to the plane you specify. Snapping is active. If the object to snap to does not lie in the drag path of the pole, projected snapping is used.

Moves the points or poles along the curve normal direction. Normal

Snap Point options are available when you drag a pole/point. NX honors the translation direction you specify and uses a minimum snapping distance, if the target snap object does not lie in the translation path.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Available when Type is set to By Poles. Lets you drag a selected pole along one of the polyline segments of the pole.

306

Polygon

Polygon Movement vector handle selected Extension Extends or shortens the spline. Extension does not change the defined end points of the spline. The extension can be changed during edit. Develops a symmetric extension on both the specified start and end of the selected spline.

Positive value

Symmetric Negative value

None Does not create an extension. By Value Lets you specify a value for the extension. By Point Lets you define a location for the extent of an extension.

When this check box is not selected, you can specify unique Start and End extension values. Settings Proportional Lets you specify how a spline I updated when a parent of a constraint is modified. Update drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

307

All the points or poles between the updated point and the next fixed point are moved proportionally. Example

End point of the vertical line is a defining point of the spline.

When the line is moved, the unconstrained points update proportionally in relation to the next constrained points.

When this check box is not selected, only the point of the updated constraint is moved. The surrounding defining points maintain their positions. Example

Associative

Makes the spline associative, and parametrically related to parent features. An associative spline creates a spline feature. Available when editing a non-associative spline. Associates the defining points of the non-associative spline to existing geometry.

Make Associative

If the non-associative spline has defining data, and its poles are in sync with that data, a new, associative Through Points spline is created. Otherwise, it becomes an associative By Poles spline. When this check box is not selected, the spline being edited remains non-associative. Available when the Make Associative check box is selected.

Input Curve Specifies what happens to the original spline when you edit a non-associative spline. Infer Preferences Inferred Type

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Iso-parametric Limits constraints to the U and V directions of a surface. Sectional Allows constraints aligned with any direction.

308

For a Through Points spline, this option is available on all locations. For a By Poles spline, this option is available only on start and end poles. Available when constraining to surface geometry.

Allows constraints to be aligned with any direction. Normal Infers a constraint based on the natural normal of a curve or surface. Only the G1 constraint is available. Perpendicular to Curve or Edge Infers G1, G2, or G3 constraints from the parent of the points attachment object such as an edge or a surface spline created using the Curve on Surface command. Fix Tangent Orientation Controls the orientation of an inferred G1 constraint. When a tangent constraint is assigned at a point, the best possible direction is chosen in order to minimize spline shape change. When this check box is selected, the movement of the constrained point relative to the neighboring points does not affect the orientation, and the direction remains static. When this check box is not selected, the movement of the constrained point relative to the neighboring points may change the orientation. Micro Positioning Sets the relative amount by which a point or pole is moved when you drag its handle. This option is useful for fine curve point editing. Rate

Specify a value between 0.01% and 100%. Lower values produce finer point movement.

Tip Hold the Ctrl key to momentarily activate Micro Positioning while dragging a point or pole. Lets you specify an incremental value by which to move a selected point or pole. Step Value

Click the plus button the WCS orientation.

to move the step value in a positive direction based upon

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


309

Click the negative button to move the step value in a negative direction. This option is most useful when you move the point or pole by a small distance, or to a known distance.

13.

Fit Spline

Use the Fit Spline command to create a spline by fitting it to specified data points. The data points can reside in a set of chained points, or on faceted bodies, curves, or faces. You can set endpoint and inner continuity constraints, and you can control the accuracy and shape of the fit by specifying:

Degrees and segments Degrees and tolerance A template curve

In the Shape Studio application, accelerated access to companion tools like Deviation Gauge help you assess the accuracy and shape of the Fit Spline. This example shows a fit spline on a faceted body:

Where do I find it? Application Modeling, Shape Studio CurveFit Spline Toolbar Menu a. Create a Fit Spline Shape StudioCurve Drop-downFit Spline InsertCurveFit Spline

1. Click

Fit Spline on the Curve toolbar.

2. Specify a fit Type that's appropriate for your part. For this example, we'll accept the default Degree and Segments. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

310

3. Specify the number of Degrees and Segments for the new Fit Spline. 4. (Optional) Use the Selection Step 1 drop-down to choose a target selection method. If you use the default Infer method, NX infers the entity type from the first object you select. For this example, we'll select Chain From All. 5. Select the first and last target points. NX adds intervening points to the set using a next-nearest point algorithm, previews the Fit Spline, and advances automatically to the Constraints step.

6. To set an endpoint constraint, click MB3 on the graphics window handle and select Specify Constraint.

MB3 menu options are:


o o o o

Specify Constraint Delete Point Delete G0 Show All Points

7. Note that you must specify start and endpoint constraints before you can add inner constraints. Fit Spline handles are the same as Studio Spline handles:

8. Click OK to create the Fit Spline. b. Fit Spline Dialog Options Fit Spline Options drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Type

311

Degree and Segments Choose this option if you want to control the number of degrees and segments in the spline exactly. Degree and Tolerance Choose this option if you want to control the number of degrees in the spline exactly, and achieve a specified tolerance as closely as possible.

Template Curve Choose this option if you want to fit a spline using the degrees and parameterization of an existing curve. Degree and Segments Specify the number of degrees and segments. NX fits the spline to Fitting Parameters the target as closely as possible using the values you provide. Uniform Segments Select this option if you want NX to distribute knots uniformly along the spline. Degree and Tolerance Specify the number of degrees and a tolerance. NX fits a spline of the specified degree, using as many non-uniform segments as necessary to reach the tolerance. NX displays a warning if it cannot achieve the tolerance. If you specify start and/or end constraints, NX will not violate those constraints in order to meet the tolerance target. Keep Template Curve Selected Select this option if you want to keep the template curve selected after pressing Apply. Use this option when you want to create a set of curves with the same parameterization for input to a loft operation. Selection Steps Infer NX infers the entity type automatically from the geometry you select. Point Constructor Lets you use the Point Constructor to create target points when those points do not already exist in your part. Chain from All After you specify the start and end points, NX selects all the points in between. Points Crayon Tool Lets you use the crayon tool to draw a line around the target points for the new spline. Points From File Lets you read point coordinates from an external file. Curve Lets you limit your selection target to a curve. Face Lets you limit your selection target to a face. Faceted Body Lets you limit your selection target to a faceted body. Select Template Curve Lets you select a template curve that defines the degrees and segments of the Fit Spline. NX activates this option automatically when you choose the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

312

Template Curve type. This method fits a spline as closely as possible to the target using the degree and parameterization of the template curve. Constraints Lets you specify endpoint and inner constraints using graphics window handles. Note that you must specify start and endpoint constraints before you can add inner constraints. Once you have specified endpoint constraints, you can add inner G0 constraints. Fit Spline handles are the same as Studio Spline handles:

1. Tangent Direction 2. Curvature 3. Tangent Magnitude

Edit Spline

Fitting Errors

Lets you reselect a spline for additional editing. Press Apply to save your changes and reset the Fit Spline dialog. In preview mode, NX displays the maximum and average deviation between the new fit spline and the target data points.

14.

Text

Use the Text command to generate NX curves from the True Type fonts in your native Windows font library. Use this function whenever text is required as a design element in your part models.

Select any font in your Windows font library. Specify character attributes (bold, italic, type, alphabet), type a text string in the Text dialog box. Convert the string to a geometry component within your NX part model.

Text traces the shape of selected True Type fonts and uses lines and splines to produce character outlines of a text string, placing the resulting geometry on a plane, curves, or surfaces. The following graphic shows how text created on a plane can be extruded.

Modifying text/curve geometry drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

313

Before you apply the geometry to complete the conversion, you can use the handles on the temporary text geometry to modify its shape and location. Modifying the shape Before you apply the outline, you can modify its shape; for example, you can:

Change the character size by stretching the geometry in any direction. Stretch the geometry to change the apparent aspect ratio of the "fonts". Perform shear operations on the geometry.

Defining the placement face Before you apply the outline, you can define the plane to place it on; for example, you can:

Use interactive handles to define the placement plane. Use Snap Point to snap the geometry's baseline point-to-point. Use left, right, and center alignment to define the pivot point of the geometry. Place the geometry on a Datum Plane or Planar Face.

Aligning geometry to conform to a curve Before you apply the outline, you can align the geometry to follow a curve; for example you can:

Select a curve or a chain of tangential smooth curves for the geometry to follow. Define the location of characters along a curve. Flip the starting direction. Control an offset distance of the baseline from a curve.

Constraining text geometry onto a surface Before you apply the outline, you can select a surface and a curve on the surface to constrain the text to that surface. Use the handles to further manipulate the geometry and position it as desired. Once you place the text you can wrap or project it onto the surface using the Wrap/Unwrap Curve or Project Curve functions. You can:

Use non-planar faces to define a local plane for the geometry. Project the geometry from a local plane onto a surface. Project the geometry normal to a surface. Define a location for the geometry on a surface. Define a horizontal direction for the geometry on a surface.

Making text a string expression Text can be designated as a text string expression by selecting from a list of existing string expressions or by interactively defining a new string expression at time of text creation. Where do I find it? drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


314

Choose InsertCurveText. On the Curve toolbar, click Text .

Note The Text command is available only on the Windows platform. Partial feature editing is supported on non-Windows systems. This includes geometry transformations, but text string and font information cannot be edited. a. Create planar text 1. Choose InsertCurveText, or on the Curve toolbar click Text box. 2. From the Type list, select Planar. 3. Specify the location on the plane where you want to place the text.

to open the Text dialog

An outline of the text follows the cursor until you click to specify a point. After you select a location, the preview appears with handles. 4. In the first box under Text Properties, type the text string you want to convert to a curve.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Select the required font from the Font list. Select the required script from the Script list. Select the required font style from the Font Style list. (Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results: o Place the cursor on a handle, click and drag the handles to change the text parameters. o Double-click the conehead to switch the direction of the text. o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the distance between characters. o Select the Create Bounding Box Curves check box to add a bounding box around the text. o Select the Anchor Location for the text frame from the list. o Type values for the Length, Height, W-Scale, and Shearing parameters. o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves. This check box is selected by default. o Clear the Join Curves check box to create curves which are not joined to form a single spline. This check box is selected by default.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

315

9. Click OK or Apply to create planar text.

b. Create text along a curve 1. Choose InsertCurveText, or on the Curve toolbar click Text to open the Text dialog box. 2. From the Type list, select On Curve to create text along a curve or a connected string. Select Curve is active. 3. Select the curve on which to place the text. 4. Specify the vertical orientation method for the text. For the Vector type orientation method, use the Specify Vector options to specify the vector. Click Reverse Direction to reverse the direction of the specified vector.

5. In the first box under Text Properties, type the text string you want to convert to a curve.

The following graphic shows the ZC-axis selected as the vector for the Vector type orientation method. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

316

6. 7. 8. 9.

Select the required font from the Font list. Select the required script from the Script list. Select the required font style from the Font Style list. (Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results: o Place the cursor on a handle, click and drag the handles to change the text parameters. o Double-click the conehead to switch the direction of the text. o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the distance between characters. o Select the Anchor Location for the text frame from the list. o Type values for the Length, Height, W-Scale, and Shearing parameters. o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves. This check box is selected by default. o Clear the Join Curves check box to create curves which are not joined to form a single spline. This check box is selected by default.

10. Click OK or Apply to create the text geometry.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

317

c. Create text on face 1. Choose InsertCurveText, or on the Curve toolbar click Text box. 2. From the Type list, select the type as On Face. Select Object 3. Select the text placement face.

to open the Text dialog is active.

4. Select the placement method for the location of the text. Depending on the type of placement method, do one of the following: For the Curves on Faces type Use Select Curve to select the curves on the face for the location of the text. o For the Section Plane type Use the Specify Plane options to specify the plane for the location of the text. 5. In the first box under Text Properties, type the text string you want to convert to a curve.
o

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

318

6. 7. 8. 9.

Select the required font from the Font list. Select the required script from the Script list. Select the required font style from the Font Style list. (Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results: o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the kerning spaces between the characters. o Double-click the conehead, to change the direction of the text. o Place the cursor on a handle or arrow, click and drag to change the text parameters. o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves. This check box is selected by default. o Clear the Join Curves check box to create text curves which are not joined to form a single spline. This check box is selected by default. o Select the Project Curves check box to project the text curves on the parent faces in the normal direction. 10. Click OK or Apply to create text on the face.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING d. Create text as an expression

319

Having textual information as associative string expressions provides a way to automate revisions and changes to text applied to a part.

1. On the Curve toolbar, click Text

2. In the Type group, select Planar from the list. 3. Specify the location for the text.

4. In the Text Properties group, enter your text.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

320

5. Select the Reference Text check box. The Select Expression option becomes available. . .

6. In the Text dialog box, click Select Expression 7. Create the text expression.

a. In the Relationships dialog box, click Create String Expression The text expression is listed in the Expressions dialog box. b. (Optional) Edit the expression. c. Click the middle mouse button to exit the Expressions dialog box. d. Click the middle mouse button to exit the Relationships dialog box. 8. Choose another command or click Apply to perform the operation.

The text is now seen as reference text in expression form. It will be saved with the model. e. Text dialog box Type Lets you specify the text type. Select from the following options:

Type

Planar Lets you create text on a plane. On Curve Lets you create text along a connected curve string. Each text character follows the curvature of a curved string. You can specify the required character direction. If the curve is a straight line, you must specify a character direction. On Face Lets you create text on one or more connected faces.

Text Placement Curve Appears only for the On Curve type of text.

Lets you select a curve for the text to follow. Select Curve Text Placement Face Appears only for the On Face type of text.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

321

Lets you select the connected faces to place the text. Select Face Vertical Orientation Appears only for the On Curve type of text. Lets you specify the vertical orientation method of the text. Orientation Method Natural The text orientation is natural. Vector The text orientation is along a specified vector. Available only for the Vector type orientation method. Lets you specify the vector for the Vector type of vertical orientation method. Vector Constructor Opens the Vector dialog box. Specify Vector Inferred Vector This is the default vector method. Click to see available vector methods, and then select objects supported by that method. You can change the vector methods anytime and select new objects. Available only for the Vector type orientation method. Reverse Direction Reverses the direction of the selected vector.

Location on Face Appears only for On Face type of text. Lets you specify the placement method of the text. Placement Method Curves on Faces Text is placed as curves on the selected face. Section Plane Aligns the text on the face along an intersection curve by defining a section plane and generating an intersection curve.

Available only for the Curve on Faces type of placement method. Select Curve Lets you select the curve for the Curves on Faces type placement method.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Available only for the Section Plane type of placement method. Lets you specify the plane for the Section Plane type of placement method.

322

Inferred This is the default plane method. Click to see available plane Specify Plane methods, and then select objects supported by that method. You can change plane methods anytime and select new objects. Plane Constructor Opens the Plane dialog box. Text Properties Lets you type a single line of text without line breaks. Text Tip To enter a double quotation mark as text, hold down the Shift key and press tilde (~) and double quote (). This is available when the Reference Text check box is selected. Select Expression When Select Expression is clicked, the Relationships dialog box is displayed where you can then select an existing expression to associate with the text string or define a expression for a text string. When the check box is selected, any text generated is created as a text string expression. Reference Text The Select Expression option also becomes available. Lets you select a true type font available in the native Windows font library. Font samples are not shown, but if you select a different font, the preview reflects the font Font change. Script Lets you select an alphabet for the text string (For example Western, Hebrew, Cyrillic). Lets you select the Font Style. You can select from the following options:

Font Style

Regular Creates text of the Regular font attribute. Bold Creates text of the Bold font attribute. Italic Creates text of the Italic font attribute. Bold Italic Creates text of the Bold Italic font attribute.

Select this check box to increase or decrease the kerning between characters. Use Kerning Spaces Note Kerning reduces the gap between adjacent pairs of characters, and is possible only if the font in use has in built kerning data. Not all fonts have kerning data.

Select this check box to create a frame around the geometry when it is generated, otherwise the geometry will consist of only the character outlines. The bottom frame Create Bounding Box line is the typographical baseline. The top frame line approximates the text height. The side frame lines represent the left-most and right-most boundaries of the outline curves. Curves The frame is not a bounding box. Text Frame Anchor Location Available only for the Planar text type.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Specifies the anchor location of the text. Select from the following options:

323

Top Left Top Center Top Right Middle Left Middle Center Middle Right Bottom Left Bottom Center Bottom Right

Parameter (%) Specifies a value for the shearing parameter. Available only for the Planar text type. Specifies a point on the selected plane to position the text geometry. Point Constructor Opens the Point dialog box. Specify Point Origin This is the default point method. Click to see available point methods, and then select objects supported by that method. You can change plane methods anytime and select new objects. Dimensions Length Width Height W-Scale Settings Associative Join Curves Creates an associative text feature. This check box is selected by default. Joins all the curves forming one loop into a single spline. Text geometry is a combination of lines and cubic Bezier splines connected end to end. This reduces the output number of curves per text feature. Available only for On Face text type. Project Curves Preview Use this option to see how the feature will look when you create it. Show Result performs the actual computation and uses the currently assigned part shading colors for the display. Projects text curves on the parent faces on which text is placed. The projection is done in the face normal direction. Sets the value for the length of the text outline box to the value you specify. Sets the value for the width of the text outline box to the value you specify. Sets the value for the height of the text outline box to the value you specify. Sets the ratio of the user-specified width to the natural font width for a given font height to the value you specify.

Show Result

Exits the result display and takes you to the dialog box where you can make changes. Undo Result Using handles to modify the text outline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

324

You can modify the text to get the desired output using the dynamic handles before you click OK or Apply to create the text curve. The location of the dynamic handles for creating text curves on planar surfaces is shown in the following figure:

1. Stretch handles to change the size of the text curves. 2. Shear handles to change the shearing parameter. 3. Translation and rotation handles to redefine the location and rotation of the text on the placement plane. 4. Anchor point (to move text without resizing).

Dynamic handles for creating text on plane The dynamic handles available while creating text on faces or curves is shown in the following figure.

1. Handles to change the Length and the W-Scale factor of the text. 2. Handles to change the Height and the W-Scale factor of the text. 3. Handles for changing the shearing parameter. 4. Handle to change the baseline offset value.

Dynamic handles for creating text on curves or faces Depending on the handle you select and right click, one or more of the following fields are displayed in the on-screen input box: Option Description Length Length or horizontal size of the text outline box. Height Height or vertical size of the text outline box. Use the width scale to change the width of the text in relation to its natural font width for a given WScale font height. W-Scale is the ratio of user specified width to the natural font width for a given font height. Shear The shearing parameter is the angle of the parallelogram-shaped text outline box as measured against the vertical reference. Changing the angle to a value other than 0 degrees slants the text outline box similar to an italic effect.

L. Curve from Curves


drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

325

View a topic
Offset Curve Circular Blend Curve Offset Curve in Face Bridge Curve Simplify Curve Join Curves Project Curve Combined Projection Mirror Curve Wrap/Unwrap Curve

1. Offset Curve
Use the Offset Curve command to offset lines, arcs, conics, splines, edges and sketches. Offset curves are constructed through points calculated normal to the selected base curves. You can choose whether to associate the offset curves to their input data. Curves can be offset within the plane defined by the selected geometry, to a parallel plane using the draft angle and height options, or along a vector you specify when using the 3D Axial method. Multiple curves can only be offset if they are in a contiguous string. The object types of the resulting curves are the same as their input curves, except for conics and curves created using the Rough Offset option or the 3D Axial method, which are offset as splines. Selection Intent options are available on the Selection Bar, to select the curves. If the input string is linear, you must define a plane by defining a point which is not colinear with the input string. This plane is used as the offset plane. Choose InformationFeature to open the Feature Browser dialog box, where you can view information on offset curves, such as lists of parents and lists of expressions used in the creation parameters. The following graphic shows the different types of offset curves you can create.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

326

Distance type offset curve. Draft type offset curve. Law Control type offset curve. 3D Axial type offset curve. Where do I find it?

Choose InsertCurve from CurvesOffset. On the Curve toolbar, click Offset Curve .

a. Create an Offset Curve feature 1. Choose InsertCurve from CurvesOffset, or on the Curve toolbar, click Offset Curve to open the Offset Curve dialog box. 2. From theType list, select the type of offset curve you want to create. Select Curve 3. In the graphics window, select the curve you want to offset. is active.

Note For the Distance, Draft and Law Control type of offset curves, the curves to offset must lie in the same plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

327

5. Curve selected to create a Distance type offset curve feature 6. For the Distance, Draft and Law Control type of offset curves, if the selected curve is linear, use Specify Point options to define a point on the offset plane. 7. Depending on the type of offset curve, specify the Offset options: o For the Distance type Type values in the Distance and Number of Copies boxes. o For the Draft type Type values in the Height, Angle, and Number of Copies boxes. o For the Law Control type From the Law Type list, select a type. Type values in the Value and Number of Copies boxes. o For the 3D Axial type Type a value in the Distance box and specify the offset direction. 8. (Optional) Use the Settings options to get the desired results: o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative offset curves by specifying the options for the non-associative settings. The Associative check box is selected by default. o From the Input Curves list, select the required option to specify the disposition of the original input curves. o For the Distance or Draft type offset curve, select the trim type from the Trim list. o For the Distance or Draft type offset curve, select the Rough Offset check box to deal with self intersecting offset curves, extra offset curves created, or offset curves not trimmed properly. o For the Distance, Draft or Law Control type of offset curve, select the curve fit method from the Curve Fit list. o Enter a new value for the Tolerance. 9. Click OK, or Apply to create the offset curve feature.

10. Distance type offset curve feature (offset distance = 15mm) b. Offset Curve options Type drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Specifies how the curves are to be offset. Select from the following options:

328

Distance Creates offset curves at a constant distance, in the plane of the input curves. Draft Creates offsets curves in a plane parallel to the plane of the input curves, at a specified angle. A plane symbol marks the plane in which the offset curves lie. Note Placement of the offset plane with the Draft type is in the direction of the plane normal. The plane normal is determined by various factors, such as the loop direction in curve sections and the location of the pick point when selecting curves. The result is that selecting at different locations affects placement of the offset plane, causing it to vary.

Type

For a simple example of a draft type offset curve, see Draft type offset curve. Law Control Creates offset curves in the plane of the input curves, at a distance defined by a law, specified by the law types. 3D Axial Creates offset curves of coplanar or non-coplanar 3D curves. You must specify the distance and the direction. The ZC-axis is the initial default. The resulting offset curve is always a spline.

Curve Lets you select the curve you want to offset. Select Curve Point on Offset Plane Appears only for the Distance, Draft, and Law Control type of offset curves, when the input curve does not define the plane. Lets you specify a point on the offset plane. Point Constructor Opens the Point dialog box. Specify Point Inferred Point This is the default point method. Click to select from the list of available point methods and then select the objects to support that method.

Offset Appears only for the Distance and 3D Axial type of offset curve. Distance Lets you specify the offset distance from the selected curves in the direction indicated by the conehead vector. Negative distance values create an offset curve in the opposite direction. Appears only for the Draft type of offset curve. Height Lets you specify the draft height (the distance from the plane of the input curves to the plane of the resulting offset curves). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Appears only for the Draft type of offset curve. Angle

329

Lets you specify the angle from the offset vector to a line normal to the reference plane, where the input curves lie.

Law Appears only for the Law Control type of offset curve. Specifies the law type to create the offset curve. Select from the following options:

Law Type

Constant Specify the Value for the offset distance to create a Constant law type offset curve. Linear Specify the Start Value and End Value to create a Linear law type offset curve. Cubic Specify the Start Value and End Value to create a Cubic law type offset curve. Linear along Spine Specify the required parameters for the Specify New Location and Values Along Spine options. Cubic along Spine Specify the required parameters for the Specify New Location and Values Along Spine options. By Equation Specify a value for the Parameter. Also specify the Function which will define the By Equation law type offset curve. By Law Curve Specify the required parameters for the curve using the Select Law Curve and Select Base Line options.

Appears only for the Constant law type of offset curve. Value Lets you specify the value for the offset distance. Appears only for the Linear and Cubic law type of offset curve. Start Value Sets the start value to the value you specify. Appears only for the Linear and Cubic law type of offset curve. End Value Sets the end value to the value you specify. Appears only for the Linear along Spine and Cubic along Spine law type of offset curve. Lets you specify the location along the spine. Specify New Location Point Constructor Opens the Point dialog box. Inferred Point This is the default point method. Click to select from the list of available point methods and then select the objects to support that method. Appears only for the By Equation law type of offset curve. Parameter Lets you specify the parameters for the equation. Function Appears only for the By Equation law type of offset curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Lets you specify the function. Appears only for the By Law Curve law type of offset curve. Select Law Curve Lets you select the law curve.

330

Appears only for the By Law Curve law type of offset curve. Select Base Line Lets you select the base line for the law curve.

Appears only for the By Law Curve law type of offset curve. Reverse Direction Number of Copies Reverses the inferred direction of the specified vector. Appears only for the Distance, Draft, and Law Control types of offset curves. Constructs multiple sets of offset curves. Each set offsets by the distance that you specified (with the Offset options) from the previous set.

Reverse Direction

Reverses the direction of the selected vector.

Values along Spine Appears only for the Linear along Spine and Cubic along Spine law type. The input curves are used as the spine curve. Distance Sets the offset distance value at the specified location along the spine to the value you specify. Specifies a method to modify the specified location along the spine. Select from the following options:

Location

Arc Length Uses an arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified location. % Arc Length Uses a percentage arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. Through Point Uses a different point along the spine to modify the previously specified point location.

Appears only for the Arc Length location option. Arc Length Lets you specify an arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified location. Appears only for the % Arc Length location option. % Arc Length Lets you specify a percentage arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Appears only for the Through Point location option.

331

Lets you specify a different point along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. Specify Point Point Constructor Opens the Point dialog box. Inferred Point This is the default point method. Click to select from the list of available point methods and then select the objects to support that method. List Settings Associative Lets you create offset curves which are associated to the input curves and defining data. When the original curves are modified, the offset curves also update as necessary. Specifies what happens to the original input curves when the offset curves are created. Select from the following options:

Displays a list of the points along the spline and the offset values at these points in the List box.

Keep Keeps the input curves. Hide Hides the input curves.

The following options are available if the Associative check box is not selected: Input Curves

Delete Deletes the input curves. Replace Moves the input curve to the offset curve position.

The curve type may change when you use Replace. For example, when a conic is input, the offset curve is a spline. Also, the output is always a spline when Law Control is used. Input Curves options only apply to curves and not to edges or sketch curves, which are always kept. You can use the Hide option with sketch curves when the Associative check box is not selected. Appears only for the Distance and Draft type of offset curves if the Rough Offset check box is selected. Specifies the methods for trimming or extending the offset curves to their intersection points. Select from the following options: Trim

None Available only if the Rough Offset check box is not selected. The offset curves are neither trimmed nor filleted. Extend Tangents Extends the offset curves to their intersection points. The length of the offset tangent extension lines is controlled by the Extend Factor (only available for non-associative offset curves), which is a multiple of the offset distance. It is used for all curves except lines, which are simply extended to the intersection points. Fillet Constructs an arc tangent to the end point of each offset curve. The radius of the arc is equal to the offset distance. If you create repeated offsets (by drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

332

clicking Apply without changing any inputs), the radius of the arc increases each time by the offset distance. Appears only for the Distance and Draft type of offset curves. Provides more robust handling of offset curve applications. Use this option when you have self-intersecting input curves when extra offset curves may be produced, or when curves may not be trimmed properly. The offset curves are splines. Rough Offset Tip If you select the Rough Offset check box only the Extend Tangents and Fillet type Trim options are available. If a single curve has sharp corners, the Rough Offset option may extend tangents and produce sharp corners in the offset curve. You can use the Fillet option to round off these sharp corners. Appears only for Distance, Draft, and Law Control type of offset curves. Lets you select the curve fit from the Method list.

Advanced Curve Fit

Degree and Segments Use this option to specify the degree and segment of output curves. This provides explicit control on the parameterization of output curves Degree and Tolerance Use this option to specify the maximum degree and the tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. Keep Parameterization Use this option to inherit the degree, segments, pole structure and the knot structure from the input curve (or, in the case of Intersection Curve, the input surface) and apply it to the output curve. Auto Fit Use this option to specify the minimum degree, the maximum degree, the maximum number of segments and tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. If the output curves do not meet the specified tolerance, then an Alert message is displayed to inform you that the specified tolerance is not met.

Maximum Degree Maximum Segments

Appears only for the Advanced type of curve fitting method. Sets the maximum number of degrees to the value you specify. Appears only for the Advanced type of curve fitting method. Sets the maximum number of segments to the value you specify. Sets the approximate tolerance to the value you specify. This value determines the accuracy of the offset curve if the input curve is a spline or conic. The smaller the tolerance value, the curvature characteristics of the resulting offset curves are closer to the input curve characteristics. However, a small Tolerance may also greatly increase the number of poles and segments of the resulting curve.

Tolerance

Non-associative Settings Appears only if the Associative check box is not selected. Group Lets you specify if you want to group the offset curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Objects

333

Extend Factor

Appears only for Extend Tangents trim type for the Distance and Draft type of offset curves. Controls the length of the offset tangent extension lines. Specify a multiple of the offset distance.

Preview Computes the feature and shows the result. When you click OK or Apply to create the feature, the software reuses the Show Result computation, making the creation process Show Result faster. Exits the result display and returns you to the dialog box where you can make your changes. Undo Result c. Offset Curve error messages The following Offset Curve error messages apply to both the creation and edit modes: Error Message
The selected curves do not all lie in one plane. Modify the selection or change the offset type to 3D Axial The section contains multiple loops The specified variable expression does not exist Tolerance: The value entered is outside the allowed range. Enter a value greater than or equal to 1e-005 Extend Factor: The value entered is outside the allowed range. Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 Number of Copies: The value entered is outside the allowed range Enter a value greater than or equal to 1

Cause The input curves do not lie in the same plane, for the Distance, Draft and Law Control type of offset curves. The input curves contain multiple loops. You enter an invalid expression for Distance, Height, or Angle. You enter zero (0), or a negative value for Tolerance.

You enter a negative value for Extend Factor.

You enter zero (0), or a negative value for Number of Copies.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING d. Draft type offset curve

334

Original curves to offset. Offset curves. Draft angle = 30 degrees. Draft height = 0.2500. e. Offset Curve - number of copies

Original curves to offset. Copy # 1. Copy # 2. f. Offset curve trim types

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Extended tangents type (curve tangents are extended). Fillet type (a fillet is formed between the two offset curves). None (no extended tangents or fillets). g. Offset Curve- Extended tangents trim type

335

Original curves to offset. Added intersecting curves tangent lines. Added lines between endpoints (curves are extended 0.2mm maximum). Offset distance = 0.4mm. Extension factor = 0.5. h. Offset curve follow fillet trim type

Original curves to offset. Resulting follow fillet trim type offset curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

336

2. Circular Blend Curve


Use the Circular Blend Curve command to create a smooth, blended curve between two 3D curves or edge chains. The blend curve is tangent to the two input curves and looks like a circular fillet if projected onto a plane normal to the selected vector direction. The following graphic shows the curve and optional cylinder during preview, and the output blend curve.

Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveCurve from Curves Drop-downCircular Blend Curve Insert Curve from Curves Circular Blend Curve

a. Create a Circular Blend Curve feature This example shows how to create a circular blend curve between the edges of two sheet bodies. 1. Choose InsertCurve from CurvesCircular Blend Curve. 2. In the Cylinder group, choose Show Cylinder. This option displays the reference cylinder that the software uses to create the blend curve. 3. Select the first edge and click the middle mouse button. 4. Select the second edge. The software previews the blend curve and the reference cylinder.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

337

5. In the Cylinder group, make sure that Direction Option is set to Best Fit, and that the Radius Option is set to Value. 6. Set the Radius to 100. 7. Click OK. The following graphic shows the model with two Circular Blend curves.

b. Circular Blend Curve options Curve 1 and Curve 2

Select Curve Lets you select the first and second chain of curves or feature edges. The curves in the chain must be tangent continuous. Open and closed loops are valid. Cylinder Lets you specify the direction of the cylinder axis. The circular blend curve appears like an arc when viewed along the direction of the cylinder axis. Best Fit Finds the plane that most closely contains the input curves. The inferred cylinder axis is normal to the Best Fit plane. Direction Option Variable Uses the tangents of the input curves at the points of contact with the blend fillet to define the view vector. The direction of the cylinder axis is parallel to the cross product of the tangents at the point of contact. Vector drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

338

Lets you specify a vector as the cylinder axis using the Vector Constructor or other standard vector methods. Current View Specifies the cylinder axis which is normal to the current view. Note This direction of the cylinder axis is non-associative. After the normal to the current view is selected, the Direction Option changes to the Vector type. You can change this cylinder axis using the Vector Constructor or other standard vector methods. Lets you specify the value for the cylinder radius. Point on Curve 1 Lets you select a point on Curve 1 as the anchor point, and searches for the point on Curve 2. Radius Option Point on Curve 2 Lets you select a point on Curve 2 as the anchor point, and searches for the point on Curve 1. Value Lets you type a value for the cylinder radius. Available only for Point on Curve 1 and Point on Curve 2 radius options. Lets you specify the location of the point of contact on Curve 1 or Curve 2. Arc Length Lets you specify a distance along the arc length as the point of contact. Location % Arc Length Lets you specify a percentage of the arc length as the point of contact. Through Point Lets you select a point as the point of contact. Available only for the Value cylinder radius option. Radius Sets the cylinder radius to the value you type in the box. Show Cylinder Shape Control Curve 1, Controls the curvature of the circular blend curve and its deviation from Curve 1 and drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 Lets you show or hide the cylinder that is used to create the circular blend curve.

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Curve 2 Settings Associative Complement Arc Creates a circular blend curve that is the complement of the existing arc. Lets you specify the curve fitting method. Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. This is the default Curve Fit method. Curve Fit Quintic Uses degree 5 splines. Advanced Creates an associative circular blend curve. Curve 2. The lower the number, the quicker the deviation.

339

Specifies the values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments.

3. Offset Curve in Face


Use this command to create offset curves on one or more faces from connected edges or curves on the surfaces. The offset curves can be associative or non-associative, and lie at a specified distance from an existing curve or edge section. The curves are created on the face, and are measured along face sections normal to the original curves.

1. Selected curve on surface to offset. 2. Resulting offset curves on the surface.

Curve on surface used to create offset curves

Different spanning methods let you fill the gaps between the curves. There are also options to let you trim against the selected face boundaries. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


340

The resulting offset curves are either cubic splines or analytic curves, depending on the input curves and the faces from which they are offset. The offset curves can be created outside, of off their faces if there is enough surface. The Modeling Distance Tolerance parameter determines how accurately the offset curve approximates the true theoretical offset curve, although you can specify your own tolerance. Use the same options to edit an Offset in Face feature that you used to create it.

Where Do I Find It?

Application Toolbar Menu

Modeling and Shape Studio Curve Offset Curve in Face Insert Curve from Curves Offset in Face

a. Create a constant offset curve trimmed to face edges In this example, an elliptical curve is offset a constant distance within a face and trimmed to the face edges.

Curve toolbarOffset Curve in Face

Select the curves to offset. 2 Note Default Curve Rule is Tangent Curves.

To end selection of curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Set Section1:Offset1 to 45 mm. 3 To advance.

341

Select the faces. 4 Note Default Face Rule is Tangent Faces.

Trim and Extend Offset Curves group select Trim to Face Edges check box.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

342

Choose another command or click Apply to perform the operation.

Offset curves are now available for other operations. For this example, sheet is trimmed using Trimmed Sheet

b. Creating law-based variable offset curves in a face In this example, a cutout is developed on a doubly-curved cover part using a variable offset curve.

Curve toolbarOffset Curve in 1 Face .

Set Type to Variable.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

343

Select a face or plane. Note Default Face Rule is Tangent Faces.

To advance.

Select the curves to offset. 3 Note Default Curve Rule is Tangent Curves.

Set Law Type to Linear along Spine.

Use Specify New Location to establish control locations on the spine. In this example, the corner radii.

As each location is specified, an offset is entered.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

344

Choose another command or click Apply to perform the operation.

Offset curves are now available for other operations. For this example, sheet is trimmed using Trimmed Sheet.

c. Offset Curve in Face dialog box Type Constant Generates a curve with a constant offset from the original in-face curve. Lets you specify different distances from point locations on the original curve to create a variable curve in face.

Variable

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


345 Points P1 P4 lie on the original curve on surface. D1 D4 are distance values from the respective points. Yields variable offset curve in surface (1).

Curve Lets you select a curve or edge to offset on the specified face. After you select a curve, the current Section:Offset item is updated in the list box with an offset value in the following format: Select Curve
Parameter Section1:Offset1 Value 25.4 Expression p3=25.4

Sets an offset value to the highlighted Section:Offset entry in the list box or handle in the graphics window. The label of the box changes to match the specific Section:Offset you are changing (for example, Section1:Offset3). The box displays the offset value for the selected item in the list box.

Section1:Offset1

You can enter a different value in this box, which updates the offset curve (both in the list box and in the graphics window). You can give a unique offset value to each curve in the Section:Offset set (that is, each Section:Offset item in the list box).

Following is a typical list of section:offsets:


Parameter Section1:Offset1 Section1:Offset2 Section1:Offset3 Section2:Offset1 Value 1 1.2 -0.5 10.4 Expression p3=1 p3=1.2 p3=-0.5 p3=-0.4

As you select curves and edges and add them to Section:Offset sets, entries for each are updated in the list box. Reverses the direction of the offset curve of the selected Section:Offset. Reverse Direction Only the offset direction for that particular offset curve or edge is reversed. To reverse all offsets for all curves in a section, right-click either Section:Offset items in the list box or offset handles in the graphics window and choose Reverse All Directions. Available when Type is set to Constant. Add New Set List Right-click Section:Offset items in the list box to see the following commands: List box

Adds a new Section:Offset set.

Reverse Direction Reverses the direction of the selected Section:Offset. When you select an offset curve or edge with this option, only the offset direction for that particular offset curve or edge is reversed. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


346 Remove Removes the highlighted or selected Section:Offset or section. Add Offset to Section Adds additional offset curves to a Section:Offset item in the list box, Section:Offset or section handle in the graphics window. Reverse All Directions Reverses the direction of the Section:Offsets of a selected section. When you select this option, all the offset curves and edges for the section reverse their directions, putting them on the opposite side of the section. The offset values do not change when you reverse the direction.

Note You can also access the preceding commands when you right-click the offset handles and section anchors in the graphics window. Offset Available when Type is set to Variable. Law Type List the law types that are available. For details, see Law Types. Available when Law Type is set to Constant. Value Offsets an in-face curve using the designated value. Available when Law Type is set to Linear or Cubic. Start/End Designates the offset value of the start point and the end point of a variable offset. Available when Law Type is set to Linear along Spine or Cubic along Spine.

Specify New Location

Lets you specify locations on the spine from which offset values are measured. After you specify a location, the Values along Spine positioning parameters become available.

Available when Law Type is set to Linear along Spine or Cubic along Spine. Pt x Lets you define an offset value for each location specified. Point offset values are listed as Pt 1, Pt 2, and so on, in the List. Location Determines how the location will be defined.

Values along Spine

Arc Length Uses an arc length value to determine the position of the location along the spine. The Position on Spine box sets the arc length value. % Arc Length Determines the point location as a percent of total edge arc length. % Arc Length box sets the distance value.

Through Point Lets you specify an offset location point.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

347

The parameters you set for Values along Spine are listed in the List box where they can be edited. Available when Law Type is set to By Equation. Parameter / Function

The parameter variable must be "t". All variables must be previously defined using the Expression dialog box.

Select Law Curve

Available when Law Type is set to By Law Curve. Lets you select a string of smoothly joined curves to define a law function. Available when Law Type is set to By Law Curve.

Select Base Line

Lets you select a line to serve as the local reference X-axis for the law curve evaluation. If you do not select a base line, absolute X is used as the default base line.

Face or Plane Lets you select faces and planes on which to create the offset curves. Select Face or Plane Face Rule selection options are available.

Direction and Method

Normal to Curve Creates the offset along the direction which is perpendicular to tangential vector of input curve.

Offset Direction

1. Input curve. 2. Offset direction based on perpendicular to tangential vectors of input curve. 3. Resulting offset curve.

Normal to Vector Lets you designate a vector that determines the perpendicular direction of the offset.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

348

1. Input curve. 2. Specified vector. 3. Normal direction of offset. 4. Resulting offset curve.

Defines the way the offset distances are measured. The method you select applies to all the strings for the feature.

Chordal Creates offset curves based on the chordal distance, using line segments between points on the string curve. Arc Length Creates offset curves following the arc of the string curve. Geodesic Creates offset curves along the minimum distance on the face(s). Tangential Creates offset curves at a distance along the tangent to the face where the curves initially are, and projects them back onto the face. Projected Distance Lets you designate an offset distance on a virtual plane using a specified normal vector.

Offset Method

1. Input curve. 2. Input vector. 3. Input curve is projected onto virtual plane that is normal to input vector. 4. Offset distance. 5. 2-D offset curve is projected back up to surface.

Fillet Sharp Corner Fillet Smooths the offset curve sharp corners when needed.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

349

None No fillet is added. Vector Lets you define an input vector as the axis direction of the virtual fillet cylinder. Best Fit Determines the axis direction of the virtual fillet cylinder based on the surface normal at the final touch points between the cylinder and the curves.

o o

In the case of multiple fillets, the same radius is applied to all fillets The direction of the center axis of the virtual cylinder is normal to the face at the corners.

Projection Vector Uses the projection direction as the axis direction of the virtual fillet cylinder.

Trim and Extend Offset Curves Trim to Each Other within Section Extend to Each Other within Section Trim to Face Edges Trims corners between two curves within the same section . The tangents of two curves are extended to form a corner, and are trimmed. Extends corners between two curves within the same section. The tangents of two curves are extended to form a corner. Trims curves to the face edges. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

350

1. Offset curves in face trimmed to face edges 2. Offset curves in face not trimmed to face edges. Extends the offset curves to the face boundaries.

Extend to Face Edges

1. Offset curves in face extended to face edges. 2. Offset curves in face not extended to face edges. Trims intersection areas of the offset curve.

Remove SelfIntersections within Offset Curve

1. Self-intersections within offset curve removed.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 2. Self-intersections within offset curve not removed. Settings Associative Infer Body Faces from Curve Parametrically relates the new offset curves to their parent features.

351

The offset body faces are determined automatically by the curves you select to offset. Lets you specify the curve fit method for the curve to be offset. Note The Curve Fit Method option in Modeling Preferences is used as the default. This method is valid throughout the NX session, until you modify it.

Curve Fit

Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. Quintic Uses degree 5 splines. Advanced Lets you specify the values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments. o Curves are rebuilt without segments until the number of degrees specified in the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. o If the Tolerance value cannot be met with the Maximum Degree parameter, segments are added until the number defined for Maximum Segments is reached. o If the combined value of Maximum Degree and Maximum Segments does not still meet the tolerance value, the curves are created and a message that they do not meet the specified tolerance value is displayed. o Maximum Degree Sets the maximum number of degrees for this feature. o Maximum Segments Sets the maximum number of segments for this feature.

Tip Use Advanced to create curves that are more suitable to styling related tasks. Use Cubic and Quintic for curves that must be in tolerance. For more information, see Curve Fit Method in Modeling Preferences. Lets you assign the kind of curve to create when you join curves of multiple faces. Gaps between curves are filled based on a specified tolerance.

Join Curves

No Makes the curves created across multiple faces or planes appear as separate curves on each face or plane. Cubic Joins the output curves to form a degree 3 polynomial spline curve. General Joins the output curves to form general spline curves drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

352 Quintic Joins the output curves to form a degree 5 polynomial spline curve.

Tolerance

Sets the distance tolerance value to the value you specify.

4. Bridge Curve
Use the Bridge Curve command to create, shape, and constrain bridge curves between curves, points, surfaces, or surface edges. You can also use this command to create symmetric bridge curves across a datum plane. This following graphic shows five bridge curves between a surface edge and points on a curve. The bridge curves are perpendicular to the surface edge at the intersection point.

Where Do I Find It? Application Menu Modeling Insert Curve from Curves Bridge

a. Create and customize basic bridge curves This example shows how to create and customize bridge curves between the sheet bodies below. The final part includes four bridge curves and a Through Curve Mesh surface based on the curves.

1. From the Curves toolbar, choose . 2. To define start and end points for the straight curve at the bottom of the part, select the curve ends at and . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

353

3. To complete the first bridge curve, click Apply. 4. To define start and end points for the second curve, select the curve ends at

and

5. To change the tangent magnitude from the start point, click the handle at ENTER.

, type 2, and press

6. To complete the curve, click Apply. 7. To create the final two bridge curves, select the start and end points and click Apply. The following graphic shows the final part, including a Through Curve Mesh surface based on the bridge curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

354

b. Create symmetric, constrained bridge curves You can use the Bridge Curve command to create symmetric, constrained bridge curves across a center plane. This example shows how to create symmetric bridge curves extending from the four horizontal curves below to the datum plane.

1. 2. 3. 4.

From the Curves toolbar, choose . On the Selection bar, ensure that the End Point option is turned on. Select the end point of the first curve as the Start Object. Ensure that the End Object Option is set to Object and select the datum plane. The software sets Shape Control to Depth and Skew disables the G0 and G1 constraint types . and, under Bridge Curve Attributes,

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

355

5. Right-click the constraint handle at the start of the curve and select Infer G3. 6. To create the first curve, click Apply. 7. To create the next 3 curves, select each remaining curve end, and the datum plane, and click Apply.

c. Create and constrain a bridge curve along a vector direction This example shows how to create a bridge curve starting at the curve on the left and along the vector direction of a circular sheet body on the right.

1. CurvesBridge Curve 2.

To select the Start Object, click the curve end.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3.

356

In the End Object group, choose Vector from the Option menu. 4.

Click the circle.

5.

The software calculates a vector that is normal to the plane of the circle.

6.

On the start curve, right-click the constraint handle and choose Infer G3.

7.

Click OK.

d. Bridge Curve dialog box Start Object

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Select Object Selects an object that defines the start of the curve. You can select:

357

Points Curves and curve features such as curves on surface, projected curves, and offset curves Edges, including surface edges Surfaces, including the faces of sheet bodies and solid bodies

End Object Option

Lets you define the end of the curve by selecting an object or a vector. Use the vector option when you want to construct a symmetric bridge curve. Select Object Lets you select an object or a vector that defines the end of the curve.

This option is available only for the end object, and selects a datum plane or datum axis for a symmetric bridge curve. The software sets Continuity to G2 and Shape Control to Depth and Skew. Bridge Curve Attributes Lets you specify the point you want to edit. You can set Continuity, Position, and Start/End Direction options independently for the start and end points of a bridge curve. Continuity, Lets you define constraints, location, and orientation of bridge curve start and end points. Position, and Direction Point Available when you select a point to define the bridge curve start or end:

Continuity Lets you set the continuity. Only G0 (Position) and G1 (Tangent) continuity are available. Position Not available as position settings do not apply. Direction Lets you define the curve direction at the point by using the Vector Constructor. Reverse Direction Reverses the curve direction at the start and end points. If you specify a G0 constraint, this option is unavailable.

Curve or surface edge Available when you choose a curve or surface edge to define the bridge curve start or end:

Position Lets you specify the U percentage along the curve or edge. Direction o Tangent defines the tangent vector direction at the pick point to the bridge curve end. o Perpendicular imposes the bi-normal direction at the selection point to the bridge curve end. You can use the Select Face option to select one or more reference faces Reverse Direction Reverses the curve direction at the start and end points. If you specify a G0 constraint, this option is unavailable.

Surface Available when you choose a surface to define the bridge curve start or end:

Position Lets you specify the U and V percentages along the surface. Direction Lets you specify the bridge curve direction at the start or end points using Isoparametric and Sectional options. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

358

Reverse Direction Reverses the curve direction at the start and end points. If you specify a G0 constraint, this option is unavailable.

Constraint Type U/V Percentage

Sets continuity at the curve point. Continuity options are available depending on the input geometry and current bridge curve settings. Lets you specify the U and V point position as a percentage of the target geometry. You can also set the Start/End Location using the Specify Location option, which opens the Point Constructor. Sets the direction of the bridge curve. The options vary depending on the target geometry: Vector Constructor Lets you specify the bridge curve direction at the point using the Vector Constructor when you select a point Tangent and Perpendicular Lets you specify whether the bridge curve is tangent or perpendicular at the point. Select Face Lets you select a target face. This option is available only when you select Perpendicular. Reverses the direction of the tangent vector at the Start or End object. This option is not available for the Reference Shape Curve selection step or the Conic Shape Control method.

Direction

Reverse Direction

Constraint Faces Lets you select constraint faces for the bridge curve. Use this option when your design Select Faces requires a curve that is coincident with a set of faces, or when you create a curve network that defines a tangent edge for blending.

Constraint faces support only G0 (Position) and G1 (Tangent) continuity. They do not support the Conic shape type. The constraint faces must be capable of being sewed. G0 (Position) continuity must be within the Modeling Distance tolerance. G1 (Tangent) continuity must be within the Angle tolerance. Constraint Faces are not available if you set a Radius Constraint.

Radius Constraint Input curves must be coplanar. Type Specifies Minimum or Peak constraint values for complex transitions such as washouts. For both options, the software sets Shape Control to the Depth and Skew type. As you edit the curve shape, the curve does not go below the minimum or above the peak values. Only the Skew shaping tool is available with Radius Constraint. Specifies Minimum or Peak radius value.

Value Shape Control Lets you reshape the bridge curve interactively. Type

Tangent Magnitude Represents the percentage of tangency in Start and End values. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

359

These are initially set to 1. To get a reverse tangency bridge curve, click the Reverse Direction button. Depth and Skew Depth Controls how the curvature of the curves affects the bridge. The value represents the percentage of the effect of the curvature.

Top Depth = 100 Middle Depth = 50 Bottom Depth = 0

Skew Controls the location of the maximum curvature (or reversal of curvature, if you chose the Reverse Direction option) where the value represents the percentage of the distance along the bridge from start to end.

Top Skew = 80 Middle Skew = 50 Bottom Skew = 0

Conic The input curves must be coplanar. Changes the bridge curve shape by altering the fullness of a conic curve based on the Rho value you specify. Valid values are from .01 to .99. A small Rho value produces a flat conic, while a large rho value produces a pointed conic. Note that Conic supports only G0 (Position) and G1 (Tangent) continuity. Reference Shape Curve Lets you select an existing spline to control the general shape of the bridge curve. Note that Reference Shape Curve supports only G0 and G1 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING continuity.

360

Settings Associative Curve Fit Method

Lets you specify whether the output bridge curve is associative. An associative bridge curve updates automatically when you change the source objects. Available only when you select constraining faces: Cubic Creates a degree 3 curve on surface. Use this option if you need to transfer your spline data to another system that supports only degree 3 splines. Quintic Creates a degree 5 curve on surface. Curves created with this method have a smaller number of segments than those created with the Cubic fit method, and are easier to edit. The curvature distributions are smoother, and they better replicate the curvature properties of the true curve. Advanced Enables the Maximum Degree and Maximum Segments options in the dialog box. You can specify a maximum number of degrees and a maximum number of segments. The software builds the curve without adding segments, up to the maximum degrees. If the curve is out of tolerance at the maximum degree, the software adds segments up to the maximum number you specify. If the curve is still out of tolerance at the maximum segments, the software creates the curve and displays an error message. Specifies the tolerance. By default this value equals the Distance tolerance in Modeling Preferences.

Distance Tolerance Microposition Activates or deactivates micropositioning. You can also use the Control key to activate Enable micropositioning without selecting this check box. For very fine curve point editing, reduces the relative amount by which a handle drag Rate moves the corresponding point. You can specify a value between 0 and 100. Lower values produce finer point movement.

5. Simplify Curve
Creates a string of best fit lines and arcs from a string of curves (you may select a maximum of 512 curves). Prior to simplifying the selected curves, you may specify a status for the original curve(s) after the conversion. You may choose one of the following options for the original curve(s): Maintain The original curves are maintained after the lines and arcs are created. The curves are created over the selected curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Delete

361

Hide

Removes the selected curves after simplification. Once deleted, you can no longer recover the selected curves. (If you choose Undo, the original curve is recovered but is no longer simplified.) The selected original curves are removed from the screen, but not deleted, after the simplified curve is created.

Note Use the Edit Show and Hide Show command to return hidden original curves to the screen. When a spline is simplified, it is approximated into arcs and lines using the Distance Tolerance. If the spline is long and nearly straight and the default distance tolerance (0.01") is used, the spline is approximated using a large arc whose radius could be outside the maximum part size limit of 1000 x 1000 x 1000 meters. You can avoid this problem by increasing the distance tolerance.
Drawing View Edges

In the Drafting application, you can use the Simplify Curve functionality to simplify drawing view edges so that they can be selected later for annotation purposes. Edges that can be simplified include member view edges, silhouettes, and section edges. For more information, see the Drafting Help.

6. Join Curves
Use this command to join a chain of curves and/or edges into either a Join Curve feature or an unassociative B-spline. Join Curve feature Create a feature when you want to maintain associativity between the original curves and the output spline. You can control the shape of the feature only by editing the original curves. B-spline Create an unassociative B-spline when you want to edit the output spline directly. The output spline can be a degree 3 or degree 5 spline that approximates the original chain, or a general spline that exactly represents the original chain. The following graphic shows a chain of basic arcs and lines joined to create a Join Curve feature.

In Drafting, you can use the Join Curves command to join curves that were previously created from simplified member view edges. For more information, see Drafting Help.
Where do I find it?

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveJoin Curves Insert Curve from Curves Join.

362

a. Join curves associatively This example shows how to join a chain of lines and arcs into a single B-spline that is associative to the input curves.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click InsertCurve from CurvesJoin. In the Settings group, ensure that the Associative option is checked. From the Input Curves list, select Hide. From the Output Curve list, select Cubic. Select the curves you want to join. Click OK. The software creates a Join Curve feature and hides the input curves.

If you edit the input curves, the software automatically updates the Join Curve feature. In the following graphic, the last curve in the original chain is extended, and the Join Curve feature is updated.

b. Join curves unassociatively This example shows how to join multiple splines into a single B-spline that is unassociative to the input curves. In the example, the extruded sheet body is based on the input splines.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

363

1. Click InsertCurve from CurvesJoin. 2. In the Settings group, clear the Associative check box. 3. From the Input Curves list, select Replace. The software will replace the input curves with a single B-spline. 4. From the Output Curve list, select Cubic. 5. Select the curves you want to join. 6. Click OK. The software
o o o

Creates a single B-spline that approximates the input curves. Makes the sheet body associative to the new B-spline. Creates a single face for the sheet body.

c. Join Curves dialog box Curves Lets you select a chain of curves, edges, and Sketch curves. Select Curve

If there are gaps greater than the Angle tolerance between any curves, the software creates a corner at the gap and marks the corner with an asterisk. If there are gaps greater than the Distance tolerance between any curves, the software cannot join the curves.

Settings Associative Makes the output spline associative to the input curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Lets you specify the disposition of the input curves. Keep

364

Retains the input curves. The new curve is created over the input curves. Hide Hides the input curves. This option does not hide edges. Delete Deletes the input curves. You can use Undo to recover them, but the new spline is discarded. You cannot delete the input curves if the output spline is associative. Replace Replaces the first input curve with the output spline and deletes all other input curves. You can use Replace to preserve associativity between the new spline and any features you built from the input curves. You cannot replace the input curves if the output spline is associative. Note The Delete and Replace options are available only for non-associative input curves; edges, sketch curves, and associative curves are ignored. For example, if you use the Delete option when the input curve chain consists of an edge, a sketch curve, and a non-associative curve, the software deletes only the nonassociative curve. Lets you specify the spline type. General Creates a spline that is an exact representation of the input curves. The General option can create a higher degree curve than the Cubic or Quintic type. In applications where an approximate representation is acceptable, you may prefer to use Cubic or Quintic. Cubic Output Curve Type Approximates the input curves with a degree 3 polynomial spline. Use this option to minimize the number of knots. Quintic Approximates the input curves with a degree 5 polynomial spline. Advanced Rebuilds the curves using only one segment until the number of degrees specified by the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. If tolerances cannot be met with the Maximum Degree parameter, segments are added until the number drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Input Curves

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

365

defined for Maximum Segments is reached. If the maximum degree and maximum segments combined still do not allow the tolerance to be met, the curves are created and a message is displayed you that the curves do not meet the specified tolerance. Maximum Degree Available only for the Advanced type of output curve. Lets you specify the maximum number of degrees. The software uses this value instead of the default value in Modeling Preferences. Maximum Segments Available only for the Advanced type of output curve. Lets you specify the maximum number of segments. The software uses this value instead of the default value in Modeling Preferences.

7. Project Curve
Use this command to project curves, edges, and points onto faces, faceted bodies, and datum planes. You can direct your projection toward, or at an angle to, a specified vector, a point, or along the face normals. The software trims projected curves at holes or edges of the faces. This example shows sketch curves projected along the Z axis onto a sheet body.

Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveProject Curve Insert Curve from Curves Project

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING a. Project a chain of curves to a surface This example shows how to project a chain of tangent curves along a vector onto a surface.

366

1. On the Curve toolbar click Project Curve , or choose InsertCurve from CurvesProject. 2. Select the sketch curves and click the middle mouse button. 3. Select the target surface. 4. In the Project Direction group, from the Direction list, choose Along Vector. 5. From the Vector list, choose Z.

6. In the Settings group, ensure that the Associative option is checked. 7. Click OK.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

367

Because the Project Curve feature is associative to the input curves, any changes you make to the original sketch update the feature. In this example, the sketch is closer to the front end of the sheet body, so the projected curves move along with the sketch.

b. Project Curve dialog box Curves or Points to Project Select Curve or Point

Lets you select the curves, edges, points, or sketches that you want to project the objects. You can also create points using the Point Constructor.

Objects to Project To Select Object Lets you select the faces, faceted bodies, and datum planes on which to project. Specify Plane

Lets you define a target plane using the Inferred plane method. You can also create a plane using the Full Plane Tool.

Projection Direction Direction Lets you specify the projection direction. Projecting objects onto a plane using either the Along Face Normal or Along Vector method is exact. All other projections are approximations that use the Modeling tolerance value. Projects the objects normal to the target.

Along Face Normal

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Curves to project Normals to the face Projected curves

368

Projects the objects toward a specified point. For a projected point, you get the intersection point of the line between the selected point and the projection point.

Toward Point Curves to project Curves projected toward this point Projected curves Projects the objects towards a straight line, along vectors perpendicular to the line. For a projected point, you get the intersection point of the line from the selected point perpendicular to the specified line. For a projected curve, you get the intersection curve of the surface created by all the normals to the specified line that pass through the selected curve.

Toward Line

Curves to project Curves projected toward this line Projected curves Along Vector Lets you specify a direction vector using either the Vector list or the Vector Constructor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Projection Option Lets you specify additional characteristics of the projection. None Projects the curves in the vector direction. Project Both Sides

369

Projects the curves in both the vector direction and the reverse direction. Equal Arc Length The Equal Arc Length option is not available for sheet bodies or planes. Projects curves from an XC-YC coordinate system to the u-v isocurve coordinate system on the face being projected to, preserving curve arc lengths in the XC (or uisocurve) direction and the YC (or v-isocurve) directions as specified. The projection uses only a single face, which you must select before choosing the Equal Arc Length direction method.

V-isocurve Point on face U-isocurve Reference point Source Plane Definition For the Equal Arc Length option, lets you specify the XY origin and X direction of the Source Plane using the standard point and direction tools, and control how the software prioritizes X and Y values for the arc length calculation.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Keep Length Lets you specify the attributes of the input curves you want to retain. Both X and Y

370

'u' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of XC along the u-isocurve, and 'v' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of YC along the visocurve. First X, then Y First 'u' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of XC along the uisocurve, then an arc length distance of YC is measured along the v-isocurve to determine 'v'. First Y, then X First 'v' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of YC along the visocurve, then an arc length distance of XC is measured along the u-isocurve to determine 'u'. X Only 'u' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of XC along the u-isocurve, and 'v' is determined by measuring a distance of YC along the surface tangent vector in the v-isocurve direction. Y Only 'v' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of YC along the v-isocurve, and 'u' is determined by measuring a distance of XC along the surface tangent vector in the u-isocurve direction. Note The reference point, the projection vector, and the CX vector define the CX-CY plane (the CY vector is orthogonal to the projection vector and to the CX vector). The curves selected should be on (or parallel to) this plane for the arc length distances to be preserved by the projection. Warning Projecting onto a face or portion of a face that is not smooth or is almost normal (orthogonal) to the projection vector may not work well. Note When you select the Along Vector, Angle to Vector and Equal Arc Length options, the vector remains associative. If you change the vector direction, the projection direction is updated automatically. Angle to Vector Projects the curves at a specified angle to a specified vector. The projection is angled out or in with respect to the approximate centroid of the curves depending on the choice of the angle value (angled in for negative value).

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

371

Curves to project Projection direction vector Positive angle (out) Resulting project curves Angle to Vector Lets you specify a value for the angle to the selected vector used for projecting curves. Note The Angle to Vector option is not available for projecting points. There is no unique solution for this case. Available when Direction is set to Along Vector, and the Projection Option is set to either None or Project Both Sides. Projects a curve on the surface that is nearest to the input curve along the projection vector, if there are more available surfaces on which the curve can be projected.

Project to Nearest Point along Vector

Curve selected to project. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Surface on which to project the curve.

372

Project curve created when the Project to Nearest Point along Vector check box is selected. Project curve created when Project to Nearest Point along Vector check box is not selected. Gaps Bridges small gaps between any two segments in projection curves, and joins the segments as a single curve. Gaps are bridged only when both the following conditions are met:

The gap distance is less than what is defined in Maximum Bridged Gap Size. The gap distance is larger than the specified modeling tolerance.

Create Curves to Bridge Gaps

Curve selected to project. Surface on which to project the curve. Two of the holes in the surface have a diameter less than the defined Maximum Bridged Gap Size and more than the default Modeling Tolerance. When the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is selected, the gaps in the two smaller holes are bridged and the project curve has several consecutive segments. When the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is not selected, the gaps are not bridged and the project curve has several separate segments.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Maximum Bridged Gap Size Available when the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is selected.

373

Specifies the maximum size allowed between gaps. Gaps that are smaller than this value are bridged when the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is selected. Lists the following information:

Gap List

Number of gaps Number of bridged gaps Number of non-bridged gaps Length of the non-bridged gaps The start and end point coordinate information for each gap

When you select a gap in the list, the corresponding gap segments are highlighted in the graphics window. Settings Lets you specify if curves or points you create are associative to the original objects. This option is selected by default. You cannot break the associativity later. Lets you specify the disposition of the input curves. Keep Keeps the input curves intact. Hide Input Curves Hides the input curves. Delete Deletes the input curves. This option is not available when the Associative check box is selected. Replace Replaces the original input curves with the new projection curves. This option is not available when the Associative check box is selected. Lets you specify the curve fit method for the curve to be projected. Degree and Segments Advanced Curve Fit Use this option to specify the degree and segment of output curves. This provides explicit control on the parameterization of output curves. Degree and Tolerance Use this option to specify the maximum degree and the tolerance to control the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Associative

[NX8 HELP] MODELING parameterization of the output curve. Keep Parameterization

374

Use this option to inherit the degree, segments, pole structure and the knot structure from the input curve (or, in the case of Intersection Curve, the input surface) and apply it to the output curve. Auto Fit Use this option to specify the minimum degree, the maximum degree, the maximum number of segments and tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. If the output curves do not meet the specified tolerance, then an Alert message is displayed to inform you that the specified tolerance is not met. Lets you specify if you want to join the projected curves. No Makes the curves created across multiple faces or planes appear as separate curves on each face or plane. Cubic Join Curves Joins the output curves to form a degree 3 polynomial spline curve. General Joins the output curves to form general spline curves. Quintic Joins the output curves to form a degree 5 polynomial spline curve. Align Curve Shape Applies the pole distribution of the input curve to the projected curve regardless of the curve fitting method used.

c. Equal Arc Length The Equal Arc Length projection option is used to project curves from an XC-YC plane to a single face, maintaining the arc lengths of the curves as closely as possible. This method can be used to transfer a tread pattern that is created on a plane, onto a 3D surface. It is the converse of world map making, where lines on the 3D earths surface are mapped to a planar representation. Arc lengths are preserved by mapping the XC-YC coordinates of points on the curves in the 2D representation, to parametric u-v coordinates on the 3D face being projected to. There are several Preserve Length options for mapping and they are discussed below. Note The projected arclength will be truly equal (within modeling tolerance) only for special cases of the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

375

curve being projected, that is, for lines through the reference point and parallel to the XC and YC axes of the plane. The projection can be made to only a single face. The 'face' you select must be a face, and not a plane or datum plane. If you select additional faces (and/or planes), they are ignored for the equal arclength projection. Defining the XC-YC plane 1. After selecting a curve to project, and the face or faces to project to, choose the Equal Arc Length projection option (if it has not already been selected). 2. Define the XC-YC coordinate plane by making three selections. 3. Select the reference point. The reference point should be on or near the XC-YC plane of the curves. It becomes the origin of the XC-YC plane that you are defining. 4. Select the projection direction. It will appear as an arrow through the reference point. The u parametric direction appears on the face being projected to. The projection direction becomes the normal (or ZC direction) for the XC-YC plane that you are defining. Note: The project operation will fail if the projection of the reference point does not fall on the face to project to. Keep this in mind when selecting the projection direction and the reference point. 5. Select an XC vector that corresponds to the u parametric direction that is displayed on the face being projected to. The v parametric direction appears on the face being projected to. The YC vector is displayed. It is perpendicular to the XC vector and the ZC vector, and in accordance with the right hand rule. This YC vector corresponds to the v parametric direction on the face. The XC vector is adjusted if necessary so that it is perpendicular to the ZC vector. 6. The XC-YC plane that is the basis for the projection is now completely defined. The (XC,YC,ZC) coordinate system is then used to define the parametric u-v coordinates on the face being projected to. The projected reference point (XC,YC,ZC) coordinate system origin, becomes the origin of the u-v coordinate system. The surface isolines that pass through the projected point become the u-v axes of the parametric coordinate system. Note The reference point, the projection vector, and the X vector define the XC-YC plane (the Y vector is orthogonal to the projection vector and to the XC vector). The curves selected should be on (or parallel to) this plane for the arclength distances to be preserved by the projection. The new 'u' and 'v' coordinates of the projected (XC,YC) points depend on the Keep Length option. You can choose from one of the following options:

Both X and Y - 'u' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of XC along the u-isocurve, and 'v' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of YC along the v-isocurve. The projection of a line in the XC-YC plane, through the reference point and along the XC-vector or the YC-vector, will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. First X, then Y - First 'u' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of XC along the uisocurve, then an arclength distance of YC is measured along the v-isocurve to determine 'v'. The projection of a line in the XC-YC plane, through the reference point and along the XC-vector, will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. The projection of any line in the XC-YC plane parallel to the YC-vector will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. First Y, then X - First 'v' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of YC along the visocurve, then an arclength distance of XC is measured along the u-isocurve to determine 'u'. The projection of the line in the XC-YC plane, through the reference point and along the YC-vector, drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

376

will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. The projection of any line in the XC-YC plane parallel to the XC-vector will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. X Only - 'u' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of XC along the u-isocurve, and 'v' is determined by measuring a distance of YC along the surface tangent vector in the v-isocurve direction. The projection of the line in the XC-YC plane, through the reference point and along the XC-vector, will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. For a line in the XC-YC plane parallel to the YC-vector, the distance along the surface tangent vector in the v-isocurve direction is preserved. For a line parallel to the XC-vector, distance along the surface tangent vector in the u-isocurve direction is preserved.

Y Only - 'v' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of YC along the v-isocurve, and 'u' is determined by measuring a distance of XC along the surface tangent vector in the u-isocurve direction. The projection of the line in the XC-YC plane, through the reference point and along the YC-vector, will have an arc length equal to the length of the line.

8. Combined Projection
Use the Combined Projection command to combine the projections of two existing curves to create a new curve. Note The two curve projections must intersect. You can:

Select curves, edges, faces, sketches, and strings. Specify whether the new curve is associated with the input curves. Specify whether you want to keep, hide, delete or replace the input curves.

In most cases, this command creates an approximated B-curve. However, you can also create an exact curve without approximation if:

There is only one curve in each of the two original strings, which can be "matched" together internally by NX with the same number of poles, degrees and knots. The deviation between each correspondent control pole of the two resulting matched curves is less than the current modeling tolerance along the "non-projection" direction, which is normal to the two projection vectors.

Where do I find it? Application Modeling Toolbar Menu CurveCurve from Curves Drop-downCombined Projection InsertCurve from CurvesCombined Projection

a. Create a combined curve This example shows a metric part that contains an arc in one plane and a string of curves in another plane. These curves need to be projected and combined.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

377

1. Choose InsertCurve from CurvesCombined Projection. 2. In the Combined Projection dialog box, under Curve 1, click Curve and select the sketch (line and arc) on the upper plane. The sketch is selected and the default direction is set.

3. Under Curve 2, click Curve

and select the arc on the lower plane. The default direction is set.

4. Under Projection Direction 1, specify the required direction. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING You can also change the direction for the second curve similarly.

378

In this example, the default direction displayed is normal to the plane of the curves, which is the direction in which you want to project both curve strings. 5. Click OK or Apply to create the combined curve projection feature. b. Combined Projection options Curve 1 and Curve 2 Lets you select the first and second chain of curves to project, respectively. Select Curve

Reverse Direction

Reverses the displayed direction

Available if you select a loop of curves for Curve 1 or Curve 2. Specify Lets you specify the origin curve from the loop of curves. Origin Curve Projection Direction 1 and Projection Direction 2 Lets you specify the direction for the first and second chain of selected curves respectively, using one of the following options: Direction

Normal to Curve Plane: Sets the direction normal to the plane of the curves. Along Vector: Specifies the required direction using either the Vector dialog box, or the available vector constructor options.

Appears when you set Direction to Along Vector. Lets you specify a vector for the projection using one of the following options:

Vector Constructor: Opens the Vector dialog box. Inferred Vector: This is the default vector type. Click to see the Vector list. Select the required vector type, then select objects supported by that vector. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects.

Specify Vector

Reverse Direction Settings Associative

Reverses the displayed direction

Creates combined projection curves which are associated to the input curves and defining data. When the original curves are modified, the combined projection curves also update drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING as necessary.

379

Specifies what happens to the original input curves when the curves are created. Available options are:

Keep: Keeps the input curves. Hide: Hides the input curves.

Input Curves Additional options when the Associative check box is not selected are:

Delete: Deletes the input curves. Replace: Moves the input curve to the combined projection curve position.

Specifies the fitting method while creating or editing a combined projection curve feature. Available methods are:

Curve Fit

Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. Quintic Uses degree 5 splines. Advanced Rebuilds the curves using only one segment until the number of degrees specified by the maximum degree parameter is reached. If you select Advanced, you can enter new values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments.

Appears when you set the Curve Fit method to Advanced. Maximum Degree Specifies the default maximum number of degrees to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves. Appears only for the Advanced type of curve fitting method. Maximum Segments Specifies the default maximum number of segments to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves.

9. Mirror Curve
Use the Mirror Curve command to create Mirror Curve features across a datum plane or planar surface. You can:

Copy curves, edges, curve features or sketches. Create associative Mirror Curve features. Create non-associative curves and splines. Move non-associative curves across the plane without have to copy and paste them.

In the following animation, curves and edges are mirrored about a datum plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

380

Where do I find it? Application Modeling Toolbar Menu CurvesMirror Curve InsertCurve From CurvesMirror

a. Mirror curves and edges The following example shows both curves and edges as input. 1. Choose Insert Curve From CurvesMirror Curve or click Mirror Curve Curve toolbar. 2. In the Mirror Curve dialog box, under Curve, click Select Curve and/or edges you want to mirror. on the

and select the curves

3. 4 curves and 4 edges selected 4. Under Mirror Plane, do one of the following: o Select Existing Plane from the Plane list, click Plane or Face and select the required plane or face from the graphics window. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


o

381

Select New Plane from the Plane list, and use either the Plane dialog box, or the available plane constructor options to create a plane.

Datum pane highlighted for selection 5. (Optional) Clear the Associative check box if you do not want associative mirror curve features. Depending on your choice for associativity, select the appropriate option form the Input Curves list to specify whether you want to keep, hide, delete or replace the selected curves. 6. Click OK or Apply to mirror the selected curves. A mirror curve feature is created across the datum plane.

b. Mirror Curve options Curve Lets you select curves, edges or curve features of sketches to mirror. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Select Curve Mirror Plane

382

Lets you select the planar face or datum plane across which you want to mirror the selected curves or edges. Available options are: Plane

Existing Plane: Selects a face or datum plane to mirror the selected curves about. New Plane: Creates a datum plane.

Appears when Plane is set to Existing Plane. Select Plane Lets you select a face or an existing datum plane about which to mirror the selected curves. Appears when Plane is set to New Plane. Lets you specify a plane to mirror the selected curves. Available options are:

Full Plane Tool

: Opens the Plane dialog box.

Specify Plane

Inferred : This is the default plane type. Click to see the Plane list. Select the required plane type, then select objects supported by that plane. You can change the plane and select new objects as needed.

Settings Associative Creates mirror curves which are associated to the input curves and defining data. When the original curves are modified, the mirror curves also update as necessary. Specifies what happens to the original input curves when the offset curves are created. Available options are:

Input Curves

Keep: Keeps the input curves. Hide: Hides the input curves.

Additional options available when the Associative check box is not selected are:

Delete: Deletes the input curves. Replace: Moves the input curve to the position of the Mirror Curve.

10.

Wrap/Unwrap Curve

Use the Wrap/Unwrap Curve command to wrap curves from a plane onto a conical or cylindrical face or unwrap curves from a conical or cylindrical face onto a plane. Note You cannot delete defining geometry, such as the wrapped face or faces, the Wrap plane, or the input curves until you remove all dependence on that geometry.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING The following animation illustrates how to wrap a curve on a conical face.

383

Where do I find it? Application Modeling Toolbar Menu CurveCurve from Curves Drop-downWrap/Unwrap Curve InsertCurve from CurvesWrap/Unwrap Curve

a. Wrap a curve on a conical face This example shows how to wrap a curve on a conical face. Use the same workflow to unwrap a curve. 1. Choose InsertCurve from CurvesWrap/Unwrap Curve. 2. In the Type group, choose Wrap. 3. In the Curve group, click Select Curve and select the curve to wrap.

4. Under Face, click Select Face and select the conical face.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

384

5. Under Plane, click Select Object and select the plane.

If the conical face you selected does not already have an appropriate tangent plane, you can create one with the following steps.
o

Create a datum plane that goes through both the axis of the cone/cylinder and the tangent line. Note A tangent line is an imaginary line that lies on both the wrap face and the wrap plane where they meet. It is a straight line that is coplanar with the axis of the cone or cylinder.

Create another datum plane that is tangent to the face and normal to the datum plane created in the previous step.

A major advantage to creating a tangent plane with this method is that the datum plane updates to remain tangent to the face whenever the model is updated. 6. (Optional) Under Settings, change the Cut Line Angle value as required. 7. Click Apply or OK. The Wrap Curve feature is created.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

385

b. Wrap/Unwrap Curve options Type Wrap Unwrap Curve Lets you select a curve or curves to wrap or unwrap, depending on the Type option selected. Select Curve Face Lets you select a conical or cylindrical face for wrapping or unwrapping curves on which curves will be wrapped, or from which curves will be unwrapped. For the Wrap option, this is the face to which selected curves on a tangent plane are wrapped. Select Face For the Unwrap option, this is the face from which selected curves are unwrapped onto a tangent plane. Note When you wrap a curve, you can select multiple faces if the face is split, but the selected faces must be on the same cone or cylinder. Plane Lets you select a datum plane or planar face tangent to the conical or cylindrical face. Select Object Lets you select a plane as the Wrap or Unwrap plane. Available options are:

Wraps a curve from a plane onto a conical or cylindrical face. Unwraps a curve from a conical or cylindrical face onto a plane.

Full Plane Tool

: Opens the Plane dialog box.

Specify Plane

Inferred : This is the default plane type. Click to see the Plane list. Select the required plane type, then select objects supported by that plane. You can

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING change the plane anytime and select new objects.

386

For the Wrap option, selected curves on this plane are wrapped onto a tangent conical or cylindrical face. For the Unwrap option, selected curves on a tangent conical or cylindrical face are wrapped onto this plane. Settings Creates an associative Wrap or Unwrap Curve feature. If you modify the input curves, the wrap/unwrap curves update accordingly. This check box is selected by default. Cut Line Angle Distance Tolerance Angle Tolerance Specifies the cut line angle, which is the rotation (between 0 and 360 degrees) of the tangent line about the axis of the cone or cylinder. You can enter either a number or an expression. Specifies the maximum distance between the input geometry and the resulting body, that is the maximum distance between a calculated point and the generated curve. Specifies the angle tolerance which ensures that the generated curve is tangent continuous within this tolerance.

Associative

c. Wrap/Unwrap Curve terminology

Unwrapped cut line Unwrapped cone top Unwrapped cone bottom Cut line. This is an imaginary line that is some rotation of the tangent line around the axis of the cone or cylinder. This line affects where curves are placed after being wrapped or unwrapped. If a closed curve on the face of a cone or cylinder that completely surrounds the axis is unwrapped, it cuts at the cut line. This is the only time the cut line actually "cuts" anything. For all other curves, if the majority of a curve is to one side of the cut line, it will be unwrapped to the same side of the tangent line. Tangent line. This is an imaginary line that lies on both the wrap face and the wrap plane where they meet. It is a straight line that is coplanar with the axis of the cone or cylinder. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

387

Wrap face. For the Wrap option, this is the conical or cylindrical face to which selected curves on a tangent plane are wrapped. For the Unwrap option, selected curves on this face are wrapped onto a tangent plane. Wrap plane. For the Wrap option, selected curves on this plane are wrapped onto a tangent conical or cylindrical face. For the Unwrap option, selected curves on a tangent conical or cylindrical face are wrapped onto this plane.

M.

Curve from Bodies

View a topic
Intersection Curve Isoparametric Curve Section Curve Extract Curve Extract Virtual Curve

1. Intersection Curve
Use the Intersection Curve command to create intersection curves between two sets of objects.

Intersection Curves are generated between two sets of faces or planes. Intersection Curves are associative and update according to the changes in their defining objects. They can be edited by adding or removing objects to or from the sets of intersection objects. You can select multiple objects in the input sets to perform an intersection operation. When possible, analytic curves (lines, arcs, and ellipses) are created; otherwise, a spline is created.

The following graphic shows an example of intersection curves that are created where a sheet body intersects a solid body.

First set of faces or planes (body faces selected). Second set of faces or planes (sheet body). Intersection Curve feature. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Modeling or Drafting CurveIntersection Curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Menu (Modeling) InsertCurve from BodiesIntersect

388

a. Create an Intersection Curve feature 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Intersection Curve or choose InsertCurve from Bodies Intersect. 2. Specify the first set of objects to intersect by doing one of the following:
o

Use Select Face intersect.

to select faces and/or datum planes as the first set of objects to

Use the Specify Plane options to define a datum plane to be included in the first set of objects. 3. (Optional) Select the Keep Selected check box to reuse the objects selected as the first set. When you click Apply the objects selected as the first set remain selected so that another Intersection Curve feature can be created using the same set. Note You can select only one set at a time. For this example, the Face Rule option Solid Body is used for selecting the entire solid body for Set 1.

4. Specify the second set of objects to intersect in one of these ways:


o o

Use Select Face

to select faces or datum planes as the second set of objects.

Use the Specify Plane options to specify a datum plane to be included in the second set of objects. 5. (Optional) Select the Keep Selected check box to reuse the objects selected as the second set. For this example, the Face Rule option Single Face is used for selecting the surface for Set 2.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

389

6. (Optional) In the Settings group, clear the Associative check box if you do not want the intersection curve to be associative. This check box is selected by default. 7. (Optional) Select the required curve fitting method from the Curve Fit list. 8. Click OK or Apply to create the Intersection Curve feature.

b. Intersection Curve dialog box Selection-specific options Select Face Lets you select one or more faces and or datum planes to intersect. Specify Plane Set 1 and Set 2 Lets you define a datum plane to be included in the set of objects to intersect.

Full Plane Tool Displays the Plane dialog box. Inferred Lets you select a plane from the option list.

Keep Selected When selected, lets you reuse the objects you selected as the set for a subsequent Intersection Curve feature, after you create this intersection curve. Common Options drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Associative Makes the intersection curve associative. Advanced Curve Fit Lets you select the curve fit from the Method list.

390

Settings

Degree and Segments Use this option to specify the degree and segment of output curves. This provides explicit control on the parameterization of output curves Degree and Tolerance Use this option to specify the maximum degree and the tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. Auto Fit Use this option to specify the minimum degree, the maximum degree, the maximum number of segments and tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. If the output curves do not meet the specified tolerance, then an Alert message is displayed to inform you that the specified tolerance is not met.

Maximum Degree Sets the maximum degree for the fit calculation. Maximum Segments Sets the maximum number of segments for the fit calculation.

Tolerance Sets the tolerance value. you The default value is the Distance Tolerance value that is set in the Modeling Preferences dialog box.

2. Isoparametric Curve
Use the Isoparametric Curve command to generate curves on a face along given U/V lines of direction.

Isoparametric curves represent the underlying geometry of the selected surface. For example, if you create an isoparametric curve that runs along the parameter of revolution of a revolved body, the resulting curve is an arc. For complex faces, the resulting curve is a spline. The modeling tolerance value is used to calculate isoparametric curves on foreign faces and on offsets obtained from non-analytic faces. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling, Shape Studio Curve Isoparametric Curve Insert Curve from Bodies Isoparametric Curve

391

a. Create uniform isoparametric curves This example shows how to create uniform isoparametric curves.

1. On the Curve toolbar, click Isoparametric Curve .

2.

Click the surface on which to create the isoparametric curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3.

392

In the Iso Curve group, from the Location list, select Uniform. Type 7 in the Number box to create seven isoparametric curves.

4.

From the Direction list, select U and V to create both U and V isoparametric curves.

5.

Optional: Click the Spacing check box and drag the slider to adjust the distance between the isoparametric curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 6.

393

Click Apply.

b. Create a mix of isoparametric curves This example shows how to create isoparametric curves that are uniform and between two points.

1.

On the Curve toolbar, click Isoparametric Curve .

2.

Click the surface on which to create the isoparametric curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 3.

394

1. In the Iso Curve group, from the Direction list, select V. 2. From the Location list, select Uniform. 3. Type 7 in the Number box to create seven uniform isoparametric curves. 4. Click Apply.

4.

1. Select the same face again. 2. From the Direction list, select U. 3. From the Location list, select Between Points. 4. Type 5 in the Number box. 5. On the Snap Point toolbar select Point on Curve. 6. Select a point on two of the V direction isoparametric curves.

5.

Click Apply.

c. Isoparametric Curve options Face Lets you select the face on which to create isoparametric curves Select Face Iso Curve Direction Lets you select the U direction, the V direction, or both directions along which to create drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 Once selected, U and V direction arrows display on the face to show its direction.

[NX8 HELP] MODELING isoparametric curves. Choose one of the following: U Specifies the U direction for isoparametric curves. V Specifies the V direction for isoparametric curves. U and V Specifies both the U and V direction for isoparametric curves.

395

Lets you specify a location method to place isoparametric curves on the selected face. Choose from the following: Uniform Places isoparametric curves at an equal distance from one another on the selected face.

Location Through Points Places an isoparametric curve through each specified point on the selected face.

Between Points Places isoparametric curves at an equal distance from one another, between two drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING specified points.

396

Available when Location is set to Through Points and Between Points. Lets you specify points on the selected face to use to create isoparametric curves. You can move or delete points you specify: Specify Point

To move a point, left-click and drag. To delete a point, right-click and choose Delete.

Available when Location is set to Uniform and Between Points. Number Specifies the total number of isoparametric curves to create. Available when Location is set to Uniform and Between Points. Spacing Specifies a constant distance between each isoparametric curve. d. Isoparametric Curve notes

When the selected face is planar the extracted isoparametric curves do not follow the direction of the face and edges as with a non-planar face, but are always either vertical or horizontal. Specifying a point outside the face bounds using the Through Points option may generate unexpected results and is not recommended.

3. Section Curve
Use the Section Curve command to create intersection geometry between specified planes and bodies, faces, or curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

397

Selected object to section Defined planes to cut sections Resulting section curves

Analytic section curves (lines, arcs or conics) are created if the face is planar, analytic, or a bounded plane. Section curves are trimmed at edges and holes.

Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling, Drafting CurveSection Curve (Modeling) InsertCurve from BodiesSection

a. Create a section curve using selected planes 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Section Curve or choose InsertCurve from BodiesSection. 2. From the Type option list, select Selected Planes. 3. In the Object to Section group, with Select Object active, select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. For this example, the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curve.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

398

4. In the Section Plane group, use Select Plane to define a new plane.

to select an existing plane, or Specify Plane

For the following example, the datum plane is selected.

5. In the Settings group, make changes if needed. None were made in this example.. 6. Click OK or Apply to create the section curve feature.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

399

b. Create section curves using a set of parallel planes 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Section Curve or choose InsertCurve from BodiesSection. 2. From the Type option list, select Parallel Planes. 3. In the Object to Section group, with Select Object active, select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. For this example, the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curves.

4. In the Base Plane group, click Specify Plane the sectioning planes to be parallel to For this example, the XC-ZC plane is selected.

and select (or specify) the plane you want

5. In the Plane Location group, enter values for the Start and End locations of the planes. The sectioning planes will be positioned between the start and end locations. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING For this example, in Start the value entered 8.0 and in End the value entered is 8.0 6. In Step distance enter a value for the distance between successive planes. For this example, the value entered in Step is 8.0.

400

7. The preview shows a series of plane symbols. You now can change any of the parameters.

8. In the Settings group, make changes if needed. None were made for this example. 9. Click OK or Apply to create the section curve feature.

c. Create a set of section curves using radial planes 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Section Curve or choose InsertCurve from BodiesSection. 2. From the Type option list, select Radial Planes. 3. In the Object to Section group, with Select Object active, select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. For this example, the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

401

4. In the Radial Axis group, with Specify Vector active, select or specify a vector. All the radial planes will pivot around this vector. For this example, the ZC axis is used. 5. In the Point on Reference Plane group, with Specify Point active, select an existing point, or define a new point, that will lie on the base (initial) plane in the series. A series of planes is displayed in the preview. For this example, a quadrant point on the top of the circular edge is selected. 6. In the Plane Location group, enter values for the two limiting angles in the Start and End fields. These values represent the angles between which the sectioning planes are placed. For this example the following values are entered: Start: 0.0 End: 180.0 7. Enter a value in Step. This represents the angle between successive planes. For this example, the following value is entered: Step: 45.0 8. The preview is updated. You can now change any of the parameters if needed. For this example none were changed.
o o o

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

402

9. Click OK or Apply to create the radial section curves.

d. Create section curves using planes perpendicular to a curve 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Section Curve or choose InsertCurve from BodiesSection. 2. From the Type option list, select Planes Perpendicular to Curve. 3. In the Object to Section group, with Select Object active, select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. For this example, the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

403

4. In the Curve or Edge group, with Select Curve or Edge which the perpendicular planes are to be created. For this example, the spline in front of the bottle is selected.

active, select a curve or edge along

5. In the Plane Location group, from the Spacing option list, select the method of plane spacing. For this example, Equal Arc Length is selected. 6. Enter the values for the type of spacing you have selected. For this example, the values used are:
o o o

Start: 10.0 End: 90.0 Number of Copies: 5

The preview shows the series of planes you have defined. You can now change any selections made, or parameters chosen or values entered. 7. Click OK or Apply to create the section curves.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

404

e. Section Curve dialog box Type Lists the methods to create section curves.

Selected Planes Creates section curves using selected individual existing planes or those that you define in the process. Parallel Planes Creates section curves using a specified series of parallel planes. You specify a base plane, a step value (distance between planes), and the start and end distances. Radial Planes Creates section curves using a specified set of planes that fan out from a specified axis. You specify a pivot axis and a point to define the base plane, a step value (angle between planes) , and the start and end angles. Planes Perpendicular to Curve Creates section curves using specified multiple section planes perpendicular to a curve or edge. You can control the spacing of the section planes along the curve.

Type-Specific Options Section Plane lets you select or define planes for sectioning.

Selected Planes

Select Plane lets you select an existing plane as the section plane. You can select one or more planes. Specify Plane lets you use the Full Plane Tool or the plane option list to define a new plane to be used as the section plane.

Base Plane lets you define the base plane for the parallel series of planes.

Specify Plane lets you specify the base plane. You can click Full Plane Tool base plane. or use the plane option list to specify the

Parallel Planes

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Plane Location lets you define the series of parallel planes.

405

Start The distance from the base plane for the first plane in the series. End The distance from the base plane for the last plane in the series. Step The distance between the planes in the series.

Radial Axis lets you specify a vector around which the radial planes will pivot.

Specify Vector You can click Vector Constructor to define the vector. Reverse Direction vector.

or use the option list

allows you to reverse the direction of the specified

Radial Planes

Point on Reference Plane lets you specify a point to define the base plane for the radial series.

You can click Point Constructor

or use the option list to do so.

Plane Locations lets you specify the radial series.


Start The angle from the base plane to the first plane in the series. End The angle from the base plane to the last plane in the series. Step The angle between the planes in the series.

Curve or Edge lets you select the curve or edge along which the perpendicular planes will be calculated. Plane Location lets you specify the number and the spacing of the planes.

Planes Perpendicular to Curve

Spacing lets you space the planes along the selected curve or edge using one of the following methods in the list: o Equal Arc Length Planes are at equal arc lengths along the curve. o Equal Parameters Planes are at equal spaces based on the parameterization of the curve. o Geometric Progression Plane spacing along the curve are based on a geometric ratio. o Chordal Tolerance Plane spacing is based on a chordal tolerance (distance between the selected curve and a direct line between the planes). o Incremental Arc Length Planes are at specified increments along the curve. Common options for Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, and Geometric Progression:
o o o

Start Specifies the location of the first plane, measured as percentage value along the curve. End Specifies the location of the end plane, measured as percentage value along the curve. Number of Copies Displays the number of planes along the

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING curve. Unique option for Geometric Progression:


o

406

Ratio The spacing between the planes (measured along the arc length of the selected curve) varies. Each succeeding spacing is equal to the previous spacing multiplied by the ratio.

Unique option for Chordal Tolerance:


o

Chordal Tolerance Lets you specify the spacing of the planes based on the specified maximum chordal tolerance.

Unique option for Incremental Arc Length:


o

Arc Length Displays the specified arc length distance between the planes.

Options common to all Types lets you select the objects to be sectioned. They can be bodies Objects to Section Select Object (solid, sheet, facet), curves, faces, or planes. Associative Creates an associative section curve.

Note Associative section curves cannot be created from faceted bodies or planes. Curve Fit specifies the Curve Fit Method used to create the section curves if splines are needed by NX (Analytic curves are created whenever possible).

Settings

Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. Quintic Uses degree 5 splines. Advanced Displays fields where you can enter values for the maximum degree and the maximum number of segments.

Join Curves specifies the join curves type.


No Creates section curves as separate curves on each face or plane. Cubic Joins the section curves to form cubic polynomial spline curves. This option is not available for the Advanced type of Curve Fit method. General Joins the section curves to form general spline curves. Quintic The section curves are joined to form quintic polynomial spline curves. This option is not available for the Advanced type of Curve Fit method.

Note When Associative is selected, the resulting section curves cannot be joined if the object to section is a face. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

407

Non-associative Settings appear only when the Associative check is cleared:


Group Objects Creates a group containing the section curves. Output Sample Points Creates points instead of section curves. The distance between the points is specified by the Sample Distance. Sample Distance (available when the Output Sampled Points check box is selected). Lets you specify a value for the sample distance.

Show Result Preview

computes the feature and displays it.

Note If the feature string has any gaps then the ends of the chains are highlighted (using big red dots).

Undo Result

exits the result display and allows you to make changes.

4. Extract Curve
This option creates geometry (lines, arcs, conics, and splines) using the edges and faces of one or more existing bodies. The bodies are not changed. Most extracted curves are not associative, but you can choose to create associative isocline or shadow outline curves. The following extract options are available: Extract Curve Dialog Options Extracts curves from specified edges. Creates curves from silhouette edges. Creates curves from all visible edges (including silhouette edges) of bodies in the work view. Creates curves where the draft angle on a set of faces is constant. Creates curves that show only the outline of the bodies in the work view.

Edge Curves Silhouette Curves All in Work View Isocline Curves Shadow Outline

Curves created using All in Work View, Silhouette Curves, or Shadow Outline are view-dependent in the view that was the work view when they were created.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING a. Edge Curves

408

This option lets you create curves along the edges of one or more existing bodies. Select the desired edges one at a time, or use the menu to select all edges in a face, all edges in a body, by name, or by chaining. The total number of edges selected is displayed in the Status line, and you can use Back to deselect edges. After all the edges are selected, choose OK and the curves are created. Note If the body has no edges (as in the case of a complete sphere), consider using the Silhouette Curves method. b. Silhouette Curves

Creates outline (silhouette) curves for bodies (lines where curved faces change from pointing toward the eye to pointing away from the eye). When you select the desired body, the silhouette curves are immediately created and you are prompted to select another body. The creation of the curves is an approximation, controlled by the modeling distance tolerance. Silhouette curves are created viewdependent in the work view. Note Silhouette curves are not displayed when they are coincident with real edges. c. All in Work View Allows you to create all edge curves, including any silhouettes, from the visible edges of the solid bodies and sheet bodies in the work view. If the work view's hidden edges are Invisible, curves are created along the visible edges only. If the hidden edges are dashed or thin, the hidden curves are created in dashed or drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

409

thin font. Curves are created along any displayed grid lines. All curves are created view-dependent in the work view. To use this option, you must have the Rendering Style set to Static Wireframe, and the Hidden Edges option set to Invisible in the Visualization Preferences dialog box. After you choose All in Work View, the curves are immediately created. Note The created curves are not the same as those created using the Edge Curves option. All in Work View curves approximates the curve from the visible display, while creates an exact copy of the selected edge. If you compare the definitions of the two curves as shown in the Information window, the results will be different in most cases. d. Isocline Curves Isocline curves are one or more curves that are drawn on a set of faces. They are created based on the surface normal, an angle, and a vector direction. The figure below shows single isocline curves created on a sphere, at 10 and 40 degrees from the reference vector. You can see the relationship between the angle and where the isocline curve is created.

You can create isocline curves on any selected face, or on multiple faces. You may need to flip the direction vector to get corresponding isocline curves on adjacent faces. The figure below shows a sheet body with a family of isocline curves placed on it at 5 degree intervals, from 0 to 90, with the +ZC axis as the reference axis.

Some uses for isocline curves are: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


410

To split a surface. To create a "draft angle map" of a face. You can use them to analyze a face, similar to the Reflection Lines capability in AnalysisFace. However, isocline curves can give you a more detailed analysis of the face. To help in construction of parting surfaces on a mold or casting. To create extracted curves that are associative and update when the faces from which they were extracted are modified. (You can also create isocline curves that are nonassociative.)

When you choose Isocline Curves, you are first asked to specify a reference vector. After you have done that, the Isocline Angle dialog appears. Isocline Angle(s) Dialog Options Lets you create a single isocline curve, or a family of isocline curves. Note Isocline curves are created by using the surface normal, an angle, and a vector. Reversing the surface normal of a selected face, especially when using the Single option, may result in a different isocline curve. Angle The angle at which the single isocline curve will be created. (If you chose Family, this option is unavailable.) Start Angle / The angles at which a family of isocline curves begins and ends. (If you chose Single, these End Angle options are unavailable.) Step The increment between each curve for a family of isocline curves. (If you chose Single, this option is unavailable.) Tolerance The creation of the curves is an approximation, controlled by this option, whose default is the distance tolerance from the Modeling Preferences dialog. Associate If this option is toggled ON, the isocline curves will be associated to the faces from which they were extracted. Curve Fit During edit, you can change the Curve Fit Method that was originally used to create the Method isocline curve(s), as specified in Modeling Preferences. You can select Cubic, Quintic or Advanced fitting methods. Cubic Cubic uses degree 3 splines. Quintic Quintic uses degree 5 splines. Advanced Selecting Advanced displays fields where you can enter your own values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments. The system will try to rebuild the curves without segments until the number of degrees specified by the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. If tolerances cannot be met with the Maximum Degree, segments are added until the number defined for Maximum Segments is reached. If the maximum degree and maximum segments combined still does not allow the tolerance to be met, the curves are created and a message displays that they do not meet the specified tolerance. These Curve Fit Method options are available on this dialog only when you are editing an drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Single / Family

[NX8 HELP] MODELING isocline curve feature.


Procedure

411

To create isocline curves: 1. Specify the reference vector, using the Vector Constructor. The Isocline Angle(s) dialog appears. 2. Choose Single or Family. 3. For a single isocline curve, enter the Angle. For a family of isocline curves, enter the Start Angle, End Angle, and Step (increment) between each curve. 4. Ensure that Associate is toggled ON if you want the isocline curves to be associative. 5. Select one or more faces. Note When Associate is ON, only faces from the work part can be selected. If Associate is OFF, faces can be selected from any part in the assembly.
Editing Associative Isocline Curve Features

To edit an associative ISOCLINE_CURVE feature: 1. Choose EditFeature Parameters and select an isocline curve, 2. Or choose EditCurve Parameters and select an isocline curve. A dialog appears with these editing options: Feature Parameters Brings up the Isocline Angle(s) dialog, identical to the one used to create isocline curves, except that

The Associate option has been removed. You can change the Angle of Single isocline curves, or change the Start Angle, End Angle, or Step of Family isocline curves. You can also change a Single curve to a Family of curves, or vice versa. The Curve Fit Method panel is available.

Edit Direction Replace Faces

Lets you modify the isocline direction using the Vector Constructor. The original direction is shown with a temporary conehead vector. Lets you select new faces for the feature from the work part.

Note For all of the editing options, you may have to choose OK in multiple dialogs before the edit occurs. e. Shadow Outline This option produces an outline of view-dependent curves of the bodies displayed in the work view. No curves are created from interior details. To execute this option, set the work view to the Static Wireframe display mode, with hidden edges set to invisible and select Shadow Outline. The figures below show examples of parts with shadow outline curves that have been extracted.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

412

This function is sensitive to the value found in the Preferences Visualization Line Curve Tolerance field. If your results are not satisfactory, you can try making the tolerance smaller and executing Shadow Outline again. The shadow outline curves are not associative to the bodies from which they were created, unless the operation was performed in Drafting. In that case, when the bodies are changed, the old shadow outline is deleted and a new shadow outline is created as part of the drawing view update process.

5. Extract Virtual Curve


Use the Extract Virtual Curve command to create curves from face rotation axes, blend centerlines, and virtual intersections of blend faces. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING You can:


413

Extract the axis of revolved faces. Extract the centerline of blend faces. Extract the virtual intersection of a blend face. Select multiple faces to create the virtual curve. Create an associative virtual curve feature.

The following graphic shows the virtual blend centerline curve (blue) of the highlighted blend face.

Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling CurveExtract Virtual Curve InsertCurve from BodiesExtract Virtual Curve

a. Create a virtual curve feature This example shows how to create a Rotation Axis type of virtual curve feature from a set of revolved and circular faces.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Extract Virtual Curve BodiesExtract Virtual Curve. 2. Set the type to Rotation Axis 3. Select the required faces. .

414 or choose InsertCurve from

For this example, revolved and circular faces are selected from which the virtual curves are extracted.

4. Click OK or Apply. The virtual curve feature is created.

5. On the View toolbar, click See-Thru

to view the virtual curve feature better.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Extract Virtual Curve dialog box Type Spcifies the type of virtual curve to create.

415

Rotation Axis

Lets you extract the axis of a cylindrical, conical, toroidal, or revolved face to construct a rotation axis virtual curve. The following graphic shows the rotation axis virtual curves (blue) for the revolved faces.

Blend Centerline Type list

Lets you extract the centerline of a blend face to construct a virtual centerline curve. The following graphic shows the virtual blend centerline curve (blue) of the highlighted blend face.

Note Only rolling ball (constant radius) face and edge blends are supported. Virtual Intersection Lets you extract the virtual intersection of the surfaces of the two construction faces of the input blend face to create a virtual intersection curve.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

416 The following graphic shows the virtual intersection curve (blue) of the highlighted blend face.

Note Only rolling ball (constant radius) face and edge blends are supported. Face Available only for the Rotation Axis type. Select Revolved Face Lets you select a cylindrical, conical, toroidal, or revolved face to extract the virtual curve. You can select more than one face. Available for the Blend Centerline and Virtual Intersection types. Lets you select a blend face to extract the virtual curve. Select Blend Face You can select more than one face. Settings Associative Creates an associative virtual curve feature.

N.Edit Curves View a topic


X-Form Edit Curve Parameters Divide Curve Edit Fillet Stretch Curve

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


All (Legacy) Parameters (Legacy) Trim Curve Trim Corner Curve Length Smooth Spline Shape by Template

417

1. X-Form
Use the X-Form command to edit b-surfaces or spline curves by dynamically manipulating the pole locations. Available by choosing EditCurveX-form, or on the Edit Surface toolbar.

2. Edit Curve Parameters


Use Edit Curve Parameters to edit a curve using the creation dialog box for the type of curve selected. The procedure is: click Edit Curve Parameters Curve Selected Line (regardless of how it was created) , and then select the curve you wish to edit.

Dialog box information See Line creation Note If the line is not associative, the dialog box header is Nonassociative Line. See Arc/Circle creation

Arc or Circle (regardless of how it was created) Note If the arc or circle is not associative, the dialog box header is Non-associative Arc/Circle. See Editing a Spline Spline Note If you edit the spline by double-clicking it, see Studio Spline Studio Spline Ellipse See Studio Spline See Editing an Ellipse

3. All (Legacy)
The options under All (Legacy) let you modify existing non-associative curves using the pre-NX7.5 dialog boxes. Note All (Legacy) is only available by adding it to a toolbar or a menu using CustomizeCommands.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

418

You can edit a number of curve types using a Selection Steps dialog similar to the one that was used to create them. The creation and editing of these types of curves is covered in the same section of the documentation (for example, see Offset Curve and Wrap/Unwrap Curve). The All (Legacy) option opens a dialog with all non-associative edit curve functions. Edit Curve (All) Dialog Options For Non-Associative Curves Edit Curve Parameters - Lets you edit the parameters (that is, the defining data) of most types of curves. Trim Curve - Adjusts the endpoints of curves (lines, arcs, conics, or splines) based on the bounding entities selected (curves, edges, planes, faces, points, or cursor locations) and the segment(s) of curve selected for trimming. Trim Corner - Trims two curves to their intersection point, thereby forming a corner. Divide Curve - Divides a curve into a series of like segments. Edit Fillet - Lets you edit existing fillets. Stretch Curve - Lets you move geometric objects, while simultaneously stretching or shrinking selected lines. Curve Length - Trims or extends a curve by a given curve length increment, or to a total curve length. Smooth Spline - to automatically remove imperfections in the curvature properties of a B-spline. Point Method Used to change the position of a line endpoint. The Point Method options let you specify points relative to existing geometry, or by specifying a cursor location or using the Point Constructor. In some cases, you will use the Snap Point tool instead of the Point Method options. Edit Arc/Circle You can edit an arc or circle two ways: by editing its Parameters, or by Dragging it. By Complement Lets you create the complement of an existing arc. Arc Display If you are editing a spline, this option lets you display the original spline for comparison Original Spline during the editing. Edit Associative By Parameter lets you edit an associative curve while preserving its associativity. Curve As Original breaks the associativity between the curve and its original defining data (you receive a warning). Arc Length Total - Use this method to extend or trim a curve by its total arc length. Total arc length Trim Method is the distance from the start of a curve to the end of the curve, following the exact path of the curve. Incremental - Use this method to extend or trim a curve by a given arc length increment. The arc length increment is the length used to extend or trim from the original curve. This option is also found under Edit Curve Length. Lets you enter a value for the length of the extended or trimmed arc. Use this option to update your model after making edits to curves, without exiting the Edit Curve dialog. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Arc Length Update

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Click on the following topics for additional information for editing non-associative curves: Editing a Line Editing an Arc or Circle Editing an Ellipse Editing a Spline

419

Use Edit Transform to change the location of an associative or non-associative curve. However, some functions, such as copy, remove the relationship between a dependent curve and its associated geometry. In many cases, you are warned if a transformation would have this effect. For cases like a copy operation or circular/rectangular instance arrays, no warnings are issued.
Editing Associative Curves

To edit associative (feature) curves, select the curve in one of the following places:

The graphics window, followed by MB3 Edit Parameters The Part Navigator, followed by MB3 Edit Parameters The Edit Feature dialog listing

For more information on associative curves, see Edit Curve Parameters.

4. Parameters (Legacy)
This option lets you edit most types of curves. When this icon is active and you select a curve, you are automatically put into edit mode for that type of curve. Note Parameters (Legacy) is only available by adding either it or All (Legacy) to a toolbar or a menu using CustomizeCommands. The Edit Curve Parameters (Legacy) dialog box includes the following options: Edit Curve Parameters (Legacy) Dialog Options Used to change the position of a line endpoint. The Point Method options let you specify points relative to existing geometry, or by specifying a cursor location or using the Point Constructor. You can edit an arc or circle two ways: by editing its Parameters, or by Dragging it. Lets you create the complement of an existing arc. If you are editing a spline, this option lets you display the original spline for comparison during the editing. By Parameter lets you edit an associative curve while preserving its associativity. As Original breaks the associativity between the curve and its original defining data (you receive a warning). You can use this option to update your model after making edits to curves, without exiting the Edit Curves dialog. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Point Method

Edit Arc/Circle By Complement Arc Display Original Spline Edit Associative Curve

Update

[NX8 HELP] MODELING a. Edit a Line You can edit a line by changing its endpoints or its parameters (length and angle). To change a line's endpoint:

420

1. Select the line end to be modified. The line can now be rubberbanded from the fixed end. 2. Specify a new position using any of the Point Method options on the dialog. To change a line's parameters: 1. Select the line, avoiding its control points. 2. Key in new values for the length and/or angle in the dialog bar, then press <Enter>. b. Edit an Arc or Circle You can change an arc or circle's parameters by entering new values in the dialog bar, or you can change it by dragging. You can also change an arc to its complement. You can move an arc or circle to a new location, regardless of the editing mode that is active, as follows: 1. Select the center of the arc or circle (release MB1). 2. Move the cursor to a new location and press MB1, or enter a new XC, YC, ZC location in the dialog bar. You can use this method to move an arc or circle to another control point, such as the end of a line, or the center of another circle. To create the complement of an arc, you must be in Parameters mode. Simply select one or more arcs and choose Complement Arc from the Edit Curve Parameters dialog. Parameters To change an arc or circle using Parameters mode: 1. Select the arc or circle, avoiding its control points. 2. Key in new values in the radius, diameter, start angle, and/or end angle fields in the dialog bar and press <Enter>. If you select the arc's endpoints, rather than the arc itself, you will be in dragging mode, regardless of the setting on the dialog, and you can change the start or end angle. Dragging There are two ways you can change an arc or circle using Dragging mode:

To change the radius of the arc or circle, select it, avoiding its control points, and drag it. When it is the size you want, press MB1. You can also select other geometry to control the size of the arc. For example, you can select a line to make the arc tangent to it, or you can pick the endpoint of another arc to make the selected arc pass through it. You can use all the same techniques that are valid during arc creation.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

421

To change the start or end angle of the arc or circle, select it at the desired endpoint and drag it. When the angle is correct, press MB1. You can also select other geometry to control the start and/or end angles of the arc. You can select a line to stop the arc at its intersection with the line, or you can select an endpoint of another object, and that endpoint is projected onto the arc to determine its start angle. Again, you can use all the same techniques that are valid during arc creation.

c. Edit an Ellipse Use the Parameters (Legacy) option to edit one or more existing ellipses. This option behaves much the same as that for creating an ellipse. You are allowed to select a maximum of 128 ellipses. When you select multiple ellipses, the values of the last selected ellipse become the default values. This allows editing by inheritance: 1. Select ellipse(s) to edit. 2. Select the ellipse with the desired values. 3. Choose Apply. All selected ellipses become identical. The absolute value is used for the semimajor and semiminor values. For example, if you enter a negative five for the semimajor axis, this is interpreted as positive five. Any start angle, end angle, or rotation angle value is accepted. A new rotation angle is applied to the original position of the ellipse. The new angle is not added to the current rotation angle value. Note Any associated drafting objects are automatically updated when you change any of the ellipse values. After you choose Apply, the selection list is emptied and the values are reset to zero. Undo resets the ellipse(s) back to their original state. Error Messages Semimajor and semiminor values must be nonzero. If you enter a zero for either of these values, one of the following two messages occur:
Semimajor value cannot be zero. Semiminor value cannot be zero.

d. Edit a Spline This option provides several methods that let you modify a spline. In general, to edit a spline, you must: 1. Select a spline to edit. 2. Select the edit method you wish to use. 3. Define the parameters to use in editing the selected spline. The following options are available for modifying a spline: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

422

Edit Spline Menu Dialog Edit Point Lets you move, add, or remove the defining points of a spline. Edit Pole Provides options for editing the poles of a spline. Change Slope Lets you change the slope at the spline's defining points. Change Lets you change the curvature at the spline's defining points. Curvature Change Lets you change the degree of the spline. Degree Move Lets you move a segment of a curve without affecting the rest of the curve. Multiple Points Change Lets you modify the shape of a curve by changing its degree while preserving the number Stiffness of control poles. Fit Reduces the data required to define a spline by "fitting" it to existing points that define the spline. Smooth Lets you reduce variations in the curvature distribution of an open spline. Restore When edits to the spline have caused it to be out of synchronization with its defining data, Defining Data this option resets the spline to its defining data. This option is only effective for Edit Pole operations. Undo Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification. If more than one modification is made, you may choose Undo as many times as needed. (Undo is also available on several of the dialogs for spline edit operations.) You can display the original spline during editing by turning the Display Original Spline option ON. When you edit a spline that was created through defining points, using the Change Degree or Change Stiffness options, the following warning message is displayed: Defining Data and its Associated Dimensions Will Be Deleted If you continue with the edit, the defining points are removed. Edit Point Edit Point Dialog Options Edit Point Method Move Point lets you move single or multiple points. Add Point lets you add points to a spline. Remove Point lets you remove points from a spline. Move Point By Destination Point defines the new position by dragging or by using the Point Constructor. Delta Offset defines the new position as specified changes in the XC, YC, and ZC coordinates. Micro Positioning Deviation Lets you move a point by 1/10th of the vector specified by the original location and the location of the cursor, allowing very fine adjustments to the curve. This option only works when you are dragging the point. Lets you evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Threshold Redisplay Data Points From File Undo

423

This option's default is the Tolerance used in creating the spline. It determines which deviations are displayed. Redisplays the spline's points. Lets you identify a file from which points will be read in. Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification. When you use the dragging method, each drag operation is considered to be one modification.

Edit Point Parameters For the Move Point and Remove Point options, the selectable points are:

The defining points used to create the spline, or The points generated by the system if the curve does not have defining points. This occurs if the spline was not created using the Through Points or Fit method, or when the spline has been edited and the defining points removed.

Once you choose an Edit Point method, select the point you want to edit by clicking near it. The closest point is selected. Move Point also lets you select multiple points. Deviation is used to evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. None is the default option, or you can choose By Vectors or By Markers for a graphical display of the deviations whose minimum distance between spline and defining point exceeds the value entered in Threshold. For each qualifying defining point, By Vectors draws a scaled vector from the minimum-distance point on the spline toward the defining point. The length of the vector is determined by scaling the actual deviations. By Markers puts special markers around the qualifying data points. If any of your edits (removing points, slopes or curvatures, etc.) result in the spline not having sufficient defining data, the following error message is displayed:
Not Enough Defining Data for Current Degree

Move Point There are three ways to move a single point:


Place the cursor over the point and drag it to its new location before releasing MB1. (This method does not depend on the setting of the Move Point By options.) If Destination Point is the current Move Point By option, select the point (click near it) and use the Point Constructor to specify the new location. If you choose Delta Offset as the Move Point By option, select the point and enter the offset values in the Delta Offset dialog.

Multiple points are selected by dragging a rectangle around them. Once the points are selected, you have two choices for moving them:

If Destination Point is the current option, the points drag as a group. If Delta Offset is the current option, the Delta Offset dialog is displayed to let you enter the offset values.

Points From File drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

424

You can choose Points From File and identify a file, exactly as when creating the spline originally. The points from the file are read in and replace the original points, but the original degree and closed status of the curve are retained if possible. You must use a Series of Points with Slope and Curvature type file. If there are not enough points in the file to maintain the curve's degree, the degree is reduced. Tangents or curvatures assigned to the original curve are not maintained. Add Point

After you specify the location of the new point, the modified spline is displayed. (New points can be selected from the graphics window or from the Point Constructor, which appears if you choose OK in the dialog.) When you indicate where to add a new point, you cannot specify an existing defining point. If you attempt to do this, an error message is displayed: Specified Point is Already a Defining Point Note If the edited spline was created using the Fit method, the least squares algorithm is used to edit the curve. Remove Point

You can use this option to remove points from an existing spline. To remove a point, just select it. Edit Pole This option lets you edit the poles of a spline, and provides graphical feedback in real time. Edit Pole Dialog Options Edit Method Move Pole lets you move one or more poles to a defined point or by a defined distance.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Add Pole lets you add a pole to the control polygon of a spline.

425

Match End Slope lets you match the slopes of a spline and another curve at selected endpoints. Match End Curvature lets you match the curvatures of a spline and another curve at selected endpoints. Move Pole By Destination Point defines the new position by dragging or by using the Point Constructor. Delta Offset defines the new position as specified changes in the XC, YC, and ZC coordinates. Let you control the shape of the spline by restricting the movement of the pole or the shape of the spline. Lets you define the vector used with the Along Direction constrain option. Lets you define the plane used with the On a Plane constrain option. Lets you move a pole using micro-movements, to 1/10,000th of the vector specified by the original location and the location of the cursor, allowing very fine adjustments to the curve. This option only works when you are dragging the pole. An option menu lets you choose the level of precision (number of decimal places) for the movement. The decimal places selected from the option menu is a multiplying factor that is used to scale the dragging gesture. Pressing <Ctrl> and MB1 while dragging the pole automatically engages Micro Positioning. Lock Button - When the micro positioning lock button is unlocked, the micro positioning mode can be temporarily set with the <Crtl> key, as described above. If the lock button is locked, micro positioning is effective all of the time. The default is unlocked. Displays a 2D curvature comb to let you graphically analyze splines to detect irregularities such as inflections, flat curvature and sharp corners. Scale and Slider - Controls the displayed length of the curvature comb's teeth. Either enter a value in Scale or drag the slider. Comb Density - Controls the number of teeth visible in the curvature comb. Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of teeth. Drag it to the left to decrease the number of teeth. Suggest Scale Factor - Clicking this button automatically sets the scale factor to an optimal size. Opens the Deviation Gauge dialog. This dialog can provide graphical and numerical feedback about the deviation between the target geometry (i.e., a curve) and a defined reference. The reference can be a set of points, a set of curves, a face, or a facet body. You can edit the target curve while having instantaneous graphical and numerical feedback of the deviation with the given reference.

Constrain Define Drag Direction Define Drag Plane Micro Positioning

2D Curvature Comb

Deviation Check

See Deviation Gauge in the Shape Studio Help for details. Points From Lets you identify a file from which points will be read in. File Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification. When you use the dragging Undo drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING method, each drag operation is considered to be one modification.

426

Warning When you add or move poles, any dimensions associated with the spline's defining points are lost.
Common Options

Once you choose an Edit Pole Method, select the pole you want to edit by clicking anywhere near it. The closest pole is selected; for Match End Slope and Match End Curvature, the closest endpoint pole is selected. Move Pole also lets you select multiple poles. Some of the options on the Edit Pole dialog are unavailable unless Move Pole is chosen. These options are: the Move Pole By options, Constrain, Define Drag Direction, Define Drag Plane, and Micro Positioning. Holding the <Shift> key while using MB1 to drag a pole or multiple poles constrains the end cursor position in the horizontal or vertical direction (with respect to the position of the cursor when MB1 was first pressed). The cursor will snap to whichever is closest. This cursor constraint works if no directional constraint is currently active (i.e., End Slope, End Curvature or Along Direction). Holding the <Ctrl> key while using MB1 to drag a pole turns on Micro Positioning.
2D Curvature Comb

The ends of the vectors of the 2D curvature comb are joined, which differentiates it from the 3D curvature comb and the deviation comb. To control the size of the comb, you can enter real values in the Scale data entry field, or you can drag the Scale slider. For fine adjustments, you can use the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard (the slider must have focus for the arrow keys to work). Use the Comb Density slider to modify the number of combs displayed. If a 3D curvature comb was displayed when you turned on the 2D Curvature Comb option, it is automatically hidden.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

427

2D Curvature Comb Move Pole

There are three ways to move a single pole:


Place the cursor over the pole and drag it to its new location before releasing MB1. (This method does not depend on the setting of the Move Pole By options.) If Destination Point is the current Move Pole By option, select the pole (click near it) and use the Point Constructor to specify the new location. If you choose Delta Offset as the Move Pole By option, select the pole and enter the offset values in the Delta Offset dialog.

Multiple poles are selected by dragging a rectangle around them. Once the poles are selected, you have two choices for moving them:

If Destination Point is the current option, you can drag the poles as a group. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

428

If Delta Offset is the current option, the Delta Offset dialog is displayed to let you enter the offset values.

Constrain Options

The Constrain options let you control the shape of the spline by restricting the movement of the pole or the shape of the spline. These options only apply when dragging a pole: Constrain Options On Curve Plane End Slopes No constraints are put on the pole's movement or the spline's shape. Option descriptionLets you change the shape of a curve near its endpoint without changing the end slopes of the curve. The end slope is only affected by moving the first two or last two poles. Lets you change the shape of a curve near its endpoint without changing the curvature. The end curvature is only affected by moving the first three or last three poles. Lets you drag the selected pole(s) along a vector that you specify with the Define Drag Direction option. When you have successfully defined a vector using the Define Drag Direction option, the current constrain is automatically set to Along Direction. The Along Direction option is not available until you have first used the Define Drag Direction option to specify the vector. Lets you drag the selected pole(s) on a plane that you specify with the Define Drag Plane option. If the pole is not on the plane that you define, a plane that passes through the pole and is parallel to the plane you define is used instead. When you have successfully defined a plane using the Define Drag Plane option, the current constrain is automatically set to On a Plane. The On a Plane option is not available until you have first used the Define Drag Plane option to specify the plane. Lets you move the selected pole(s) on the plane of the view on which the cursor resides.

End Curvatures

Along Direction

On a Plane

On View Plane
Points From File

You can choose Points From File and identify a file, exactly as when creating the spline originally. The points from the file are read in and replace the original points, but the original degree and closed status of the curve are retained if possible. You must use a Series of Points type file. If there are not enough poles in the file to maintain the curve's degree, the degree is reduced. Tangents or curvatures assigned to the original curve are not maintained.
Moving the Pole

After you specify the new pole, the modified control polygon and the modified spline are displayed, as shown in the figure below.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

429

Note The first two or last two poles cannot be identical. If you try to move a pole, but it must remain unchanged to satisfy the specified constraints, the following message is displayed:
Cannot Move This Pole With Current Constraints

Add Pole

To add a pole to a spline:


Select the spline you wish to modify. Select the control polygon segment where you want to add a pole.

Note When you add a pole, the spline defining data is lost. Once you have selected the control polygon segment, a knotpoint is added at the midpoint of the spline segment and the control polygon is recalculated for the entire spline. The shape of the control polygon changes, while the shape of the spline is unchanged.

Change Slope When you choose this option, the Change Slopes dialog is displayed. You use this dialog the same way that you use the Assign Slopes dialog during spline creation. When you use the Change Slope option, it changes the derivative (tangent) of the spline at a selected point and displays the edited spline. Deviation and Threshold are used to evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

430

Note If the curve has least squares defining data, only the end slopes are definable. A specified slope may be flipped by 180 degrees because the direction of the end slopes are limited by the natural shape of the curve due to the least squares computation. This prevents the curves from having sharp bends. You cannot assign a slope value to an interior point. Change Curvature You can use the Change Curvature option to change the radius of curvature value at any specified point. When you choose this option, the Change Curvatures dialog is displayed. You use this dialog the same way that you use the Assign Curvatures dialog during spline creation. Deviation and Threshold are used to evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. Note You cannot change curvature on a spline whose degree is less than three, or on a spline created using the Fit method. Otherwise, one of the following error messages is displayed:
Assigning Curvature Is Not Allowed on Splines With Degree Less Than 3 Assigning Curvature is Not Allowed on Fitted Splines

Change Degree This option lets you increase or decrease the degree of a spline. The degree of a single segment spline can be increased or decreased. The degree of a multiple segment spline, however, can only be increased. While increasing the degree of a spline does not change its shape, decreasing the degree generally only approximates the original shape, unless the degree reduction is performed immediately after the degree has been increased. When you enter the new value, you must specify an integer value between 1 and 24. If the degree entered is less than 1, an error message is displayed:
Degree Less Than Minimum

In the same way, if you enter a degree value greater than 24, an error message is displayed:
Degree Greater Than Maximum

If you try to reduce the degree of a multiple segment spline, an error message is displayed:
Cannot Decrease Degree Of Multi-segment B-spline

Increasing the degree value increases the number of poles a spline has, as shown in the figure below, allowing for a larger number of degrees of freedom when editing this spline. Reducing a spline's degree decreases the number of poles and is often used to simplify a spline's representation, thus saving storage space and improving performance.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

431

Move Multiple Points

This option lets you move a segment of a curve without affecting the rest of the curve. You select start and endpoints that define two segments on the curve, along with two offsets. The first segment (limit) identifies the portion of the curve to be modified. The second segment (displacement) identifies the portion of the curve that is moved. To use this function, you need to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select a start limit point. Select an end limit point. Select a start displacement point. Choose a start displacement method and follow the procedures. Specify a start displacement distance. Select an end displacement point. Choose an end displacement method and follow the procedures. Specify an end displacement distance.

After you select the first start displacement point, you can choose from the following displacement methods: Distance Normal to Curve Lets you move the point at a specified distance normal to the curve. Vector and Distance Lets you move the point along a specified vector at a specified distance. Direction Point Lets you move the point using the Point Constructor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

432

Distance Normal to Curve lets you move the point at a specified distance normal to the curve. When you choose this option, the normal vector is displayed and you are prompted to enter a distance value. A negative value specifies a direction opposite that of the displayed vector. Note When you choose this option, you must use it for both the start and end displacement points, as you are not allowed to choose another method for the end displacement point. Also, this option does not subsequently appear on the menu if you choose one of the other options for the start displacement method. Error Messages If you select the same point for both the first and second limit points, the following error message is displayed:
Limit Points Coincide

If you select a displacement point that does not lie between the two limit points, the following message is displayed:
Displacement Point Must Be Between Limit Points

If the placement of the second displacement point is not between the first displacement point and the second limit point, the following error message is displayed:
Second Displacement Point is Out of Order

In order for the edit to be defined sufficiently, you must indicate distinct segments for the new spline portion to be determined. A single limit point and its nearest displacement point are allowed to coincide, or both displacement points are allowed to coincide. However, a limit point and both displacement points are not allowed to coincide. If this occurs, the following error message is displayed:
Too Many Zero Length Segments Indicated

Errors may also be reported during processing. For example, if sufficient memory cannot be allocated, the following message is displayed:
Memory Error from Build Curve

For periodic curves, additional checking is performed during processing to identify interactive input that does not satisfy the conditions necessary for a valid edit. If such input is detected, the following error message is displayed:
Invalid Interactive Input

The input data is passed to a processor that defines the edited portion of the curve. If the processor is unable to produce a curve the following error is displayed.
Cannot Create Curve

After you have defined the edited portion of the curve, the new segment is joined with the one or two additional pieces that remain of the original curve. If this join operation fails, the following message is displayed: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING


Unable to Join Curve Segments

433

Change Stiffness This option lets you modify the shape of a curve by changing its degree while preserving the number of control poles. You are asked to enter the desired degree. The minimum degree allowed is 1 and the maximum degree is equal to one less than the number of control vertices (poles) defining the curve. If the degree entered is less than 1, this error message is displayed:
Degree Less Than Minimum

If you enter a degree value greater than the possible maximum, the following error message is displayed:
Degree Greater Than Maximum

Increasing the degree, as shown in the figure below, makes the curve "stiffer" and less sensitive to undulations (reversals of curvature) in its control polygon.

Decreasing the degree, as shown in the figure below, reduces the stiffness of the curve, allowing it to mimic the undulations of its control polygon more closely.

Fit Reduces the data required to define a spline by "fitting" it to existing points that define the spline. This option is most effective when used on a relatively smooth spline that has more points than necessary to retain the shape of the spline. To edit a spline using the fit method:

Select the spline you wish to modify. Define the control method for fit. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

434

The control method for fit is defined using the same process as that described for creating a Fit spline. If the spline being modified was originally created using the Fit option, the points used to perform a Fit edit will be the same as those used in creating the curve. Likewise, for a curve created through points, the points used during creation are used to edit the spline. Note If you defined the number of segments when creating the spline, the Fit dialog shows the number that you defined, even if the spline's current segment number changed during editing. This helps you fit the spline to the original segment number that you defined. You cannot change curvature on a spline that was created using the Fit method. If you try, the following error message is displayed:
Assigning Curvature Is Not Allowed on Fitted Splines

Smooth Reduces variations in the curvature distribution of an open spline. You can smooth the entire spline automatically, or select individual points to smooth. Splines have a degree of 5 after smoothing. Smooth Spline Dialog Options Source Curve The data source for sampling points and calculating the end slopes and curvatures. It can be either the original spline or the edited spline in its current state. Segments Defines the number of segments that will be in the smoothed spline. Approximate Updates the segments. Constraints Match End Slopes matches the end slopes of the edited spline and the source curve during approximation or smoothing. Match End Curvatures matches the end curvatures and slopes of the edited spline and the source curve during approximation or smoothing. The maximum distance that each point can move from its original location. If the curvature distribution does not improve during approximation or smoothing, try increasing the threshold. Automatically smooths all the points of the spline, limited by the Threshold and any Constraints you chose. This option is generally most useful at the beginning of the smoothing process. (You can further refine the smoothing by moving individual points.) Redisplays the spline's points. Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification. When you use the dragging method, each drag operation is considered to be one modification.

Threshold

Smooth

Redisplay Data Undo

Note Match End Slopes or Match End Curvatures restrict the amount of smoothing that can occur. These options should only be used if you know that the end slopes or end curvatures of the source curve are correct. Additional display options are available with AnalysisCurve. You will probably find the Curvature Graph option (Curvature versus Parameter Value) especially useful, available by choosing the Show Graph option on the Curve Analysis dialog. Smoothing a Spline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

435

In many cases, you will want to control the amount of smoothing that occurs at each point on the spline, instead of letting the system smooth the entire spline. Local smoothing gives you control of both the amount and the location of smoothing. To perform local smoothing, click MB1 near a point whose curvature distribution you wish to improve. (The Curvature Graph that is available from the Info menu - see above - may help you determine the points to adjust.) The system adjusts the point's position and modifies the spline each time you click near the point, until the Threshold is reached for that point. Continue smoothing individual points with this method, increasing the Threshold if you need to, until you are satisfied with the curvature distribution. To smooth a spline: 1. Choose the Original or Current (edited) spline as the Source Curve. 2. Define the number of Segments you want in the smoothed spline, and choose Approximate. At this point, Threshold and Smooth become active. 3. Define the Threshold. 4. Smooth the curve by clicking MB1 near individual points until you are satisfied with the curvature distribution. Or choose Smooth at any time to automatically smooth the curve. 5. When you are finished, choose Back or Cancel to dismiss the dialog. (OK is always unavailable.)

5. Trim Curve
Use the Trim Curve command to adjust the end points of curves, based on bounding entities and segments of curves selected for trimming. You can trim or extend lines, arcs, conics or splines. You can trim to (or extend to) curves, edges, planes, faces, points, or cursor locations. You can specify that the trimmed curve is associated with its input parameters. You can use bodies, faces, points, curves, edges, datum planes and datum axes as bounding objects when trimming a curve. Selection Intent is available while selecting the curve to trim, as well as while specifying the bounding objects. Note You cannot trim bodies with Trim Curve. When trimming feature curves, the software warns you that the creation parameters of the highlighted curves will be removed. Click Yes to continue with the trim operation or No to cancel. When trimming splines, the software warns you that the defining data of the spline will be changed. Click OK to continue with the trim operation or Cancel to quit. To select curves to trim from within a sketch, the Associative option should not be selected, because the sketch cannot have a Trim Curve feature within it. Where do I find it?

Choose EditCurveTrim. On the Edit Curve toolbar, click Trim Curve .

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING a. Create a trim curve feature

436

Choose EditCurveTrim to open the Trim Curve dialog box. Select Curve is active. In the graphics window, select the curve, or curves you want to trim or extend. Specify which end (Start or End) of the curve you want to trim or extend Specify the first bounding object. You can select curves, bodies, faces, points, edges, datum axes or planes using the Select Object options, or create a new datum plane using the Specify Plane options. 5. (Optional) Select the second bounding object. 6. In the Intersections group, select a direction from the Direction list. 1. 2. 3. 4. If you select Along a Vector, use the vector options to specify the direction of the trim. 7. Specify the Method as either Inferred or Defined. 8. (Optional) You can do the following: o Specify the state of the input curves after the trim operation. o Specify the curve extension method for the selected curve. o Select the Trim Bounding Objects check box if you want to trim the bounding objects. 9. Click OK or Apply to create the trim curve feature. b. Trim Curve options Curves to Trim Lets you select one or more curves to trim or extend. Selection Intent is available. Select Curve Lets you specify which end of the curve to trim or extend. If you select a single curve to trim or extend, an oval is displayed at its start or end point. If you select multiple curves, no ovals are displayed. If the multiple curves you select form a chain of curves, the trimming operation is performed on the chain as though it were one continuous curve.

End to Trim

Start Trims, or extends, from the starting point of the curve to the bounding object. End Trims, or extends, from the end point of the curve to the bounding curve.

Bounding Object 1 Lets you select objects from the graphics window for the first boundary against which the selected curves are to be trimmed, or extended. Use the following options to select the bounding object: Object

Select Object Specify Plane

Note Selection Intent is available. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Appears when you select Specify Object in the Object list. Point Constructor Opens the Point Constructor dialog box. Select Object

437

Select Object Lets you select curves, edges, faces, points, or cursor locations as the bounding objects. Appears when you select Specify Plane in the Object list. Plane Dialog Opens the Plane Method dialog box.

Specify Plane

Inferred This is the default plane type. Click to see the plane type list. Select the required plane type from the list, then select the objects supported by the type.

Bounding Object 2 This is an optional step. The selection method and options are the same as for Bounding Object 1. If you have selected the Trim Bounding Objects check box for the first bounding object, the second bounding object is also trimmed. You can independently set the End to Trim option for the second bounding object to Start or End. Intersection Specifies the direction method that the software uses to find object intersections. Select from the following options:

Direction

Shortest 3D Distance Trims or extends curves to the bounding objects at the intersection, marking the minimum distance measured in three dimensions. Relative to WCS Trims or extends curves to the intersection of the bounding objects as projected along the ZC direction. Along a Vector Trims or extends curves to the intersection of the bounding objects as projected along the direction of the selected vector. Along Screen Normal Trims or extends curves to the intersection of the bounding objects as projected along the direction normal to the screen display.

Available only when you select Along a Vector as the Intersection option to let you specify the vector direction for the trim operation. Vector Constructor Opens the Vector dialog box. Specify Vector Inferred Vector This is the default vector type. Click to see the vector type list. Select the required vector type from the list, then select objects supported by that vector. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects. Lets you specify the method as Inferred or User Defined after you select an intersection option.

Method

Inferred Trims or extends curves at the bounding objects to the closest drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

438 intersection point. If a single bounding object is selected, the selected point on the curve being trimmed determines which intersection to use. If two bounding objects are selected, the selected point on the bounding objects determines which intersection to use.

User Defined Trims or extends curves at the bounding objects to a userdefined intersection point.

Reverse Direction Settings

Reverses the displayed vector direction for the trim operation.

Associative

Makes the output trimmed curve associative when the check box is selected. An associative trim results in the creation of a TRIM_CURVE feature, which is a duplicate, associative, trimmed copy of the original curve. The original curves change to a dashed font, to be more easily visible against the trimmed, associative copy. Note To select curves to trim from within a sketch, the Associative option should not be selected, because the sketch cannot have a Trim Curve feature within it. Specifies the state of the input curves after the trim operation. Select from the following:

Keep keeps input curves in their original state and unaffected by the trim curve operation. New curves are created based on the output of the trim operation and are added as new objects. Hide Hides input curves, as specified by the EditHide option. New curves are created based on the output of the trim operation and are added as new objects. Note Input curves are hidden only at the initial creation of the trim curve feature. Subsequent updates have no effect on the input or bounding curves.

Input Curves

Additional options are available for non-associative curves, that is when you clear the Associative check box.

Delete Removes input curves. Replace Replaces or exchanges input curves, with the trimmed curves. When you use Replace, features that were children of the original curves, become children of the trimmed curves.

Specifies how to extend the selected curve. Select from the following options: Curve Extension

Natural Extends the curve from its endpoint along the natural path of the curve. Linear Extends the curve from either endpoint to the bounding object where drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

439 the extended portion of the curve is linear. Circular Extends the curve from its endpoint to the bounding object where the extended portion of the curve is circular. None No extension is performed for any type of curve.

Trims the bounding objects. The portion of each bounding object that is trimmed depends on where the bounding objects intersect the curve . An exception to this is when you have selected the same Trim Bounding curve for both the Bounding Object 1 and Bounding Object 2. In this case, the Objects bounding object is trimmed as though it were a single curve being trimmed to two locations. For more information, see Bounding objects. Keeps bounding objects selected after you click Apply, so that you do not have to Keep Bounding select them again if you want to trim additional strings using those same bounding objects. Objects Selected Note This option is not available in the edit mode. Automatic Selection Progression Automatically advances you through each selection step when this check box is selected. If this check box is not selected, you must manually click each selection step.

6. Trim Corner
Use the Trim Corner command to trim two curves to their intersection point, forming a corner. The portion of the curves selected, with respect to their intersection point, is trimmed, as shown in the following figure. Before After

Line 1 Line 2 Selection cursor drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

440

When trimming splines, the software warns you that the defining data of the spline will be deleted. You can choose Cancel to cancel the operation or OK to continue with the trim operation. When trimming circles, they trim back from the zero-degree position, as shown in the figures below. Before After

Point where the circle is selected Before After

Point where the circle is selected Where do I find it?


Choose EditCurveTrim Corner. On the Edit Curve toolbar, click Trim Corner .

7. Divide Curve
Use the Divide Curve command to divide a curve into a series of like segments (line-to-line, arc-toarc). Each segment is created as a separate entity and is assigned the same font as the original curve. The new objects are placed on the same layer as the original curve. Note Divide Curve is a non-associative operation. The defining points for splines are deleted. Divide Curve is not applicable for sketch curves. However, the option is available when a sketch is active so that you can edit non-sketch curves, without having to disable the active sketch. Where do I find it?

Choose EditCurve Divide. On the Edit Curve toolbar, click Divide Curve .

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING a. Divide a curve into equal segments 1. Click EditCurveDivide to open the Divide Curve dialog box.

441

2. In the Type group, select Equal Segments. Select Curve is active. 3. In the graphics window, select the curve to divide. 4. From the Segment Length list, select Equal Parameter or Equal Arc Length from the Option list. 5. In the Number of Segments box, type the number of segments you want to divide the curve into. 6. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. The figure below shows an example of segmenting a curve (ellipse) using the Equal Parameter method. Before After

Selected curve Ellipse center

Resulting number of segments after the divide curve operation. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen.

The figure below shows an example of segmenting a curve (ellipse) using the Equal Arc Length method. Before After

Selected curve

The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen Resulting number of segments of equal length after the divide curve operation.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Divide a curve by bounding objects 1. Click EditCurveDivide to open the Divide Curve dialog box.

442

2. In the Type group, select By Bounding Objects. Select Curve is active. 3. In the graphics window, select the curve to divide. 4. In the Bounding Object group, from the Object list, select the type of object to use to divide the curve. 5. Select the objects to divide the curve. Note In most cases, when you select a bounding object, the software prompts you to indicate an approximate intersection point between the bounding object and the curve to be segmented. If the curve to be segmented and the bounding curve are both lines, you need not indicate an approximate intersection point. If the two curves selected do not intersect, the following error message is displayed.
No Intersection Point

6. Optional. In the Bounding Object group, from the Object list, select another type of object to use to divide the curve. 7. Select additional objects of the newly defined object type to divide the curve. 8. Once you have selected all desired bounding objects, click OK or Apply to divide the curve. Before After

Selected curve First bounding object Approximate intersection point of first bounding object with curve Second bounding object Approximate intersection point of first bounding object with curve

, , Resulting number of segments after the divide curve operation. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen.

c. Divide a curve into arc length segments Note Arc length" is a mathematical term and should not be confused with "Arc" which is an NX object. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Arc Length is not only for arcs. 1. Click EditCurveDivide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. 2. In the Type group, select Arc Length Segments. Select Curve 3. In the graphics window, select the curve to divide. is active.

443

Select the curve near the end where you want to begin segmenting the curve. The software begins at the end you select, and creates segments of your specified length along the curve until it reaches the other end. 4. Specify the length of each segment in the Arc Length Segment box. Note You cannot use a value which is equal to or greater than the arc length of the curve to be segmented. If you attempt to do so, the following error message is displayed.
5. Arc Length Greater Than Or Equal To The Total Arc Length

6. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. The number of full segments created, is displayed as Number of Segments, based on the total length of the curve and the length input for each segment. The length of any remaining portion of the curve is displayed as Partial Length. Before After

Full segments Point where the arc is selected, where total arc length = 5. Partial length Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed in the graphics window.

d. Divide a curve at knot points A knotpoint is the endpoint of a spline segment. 1. Click EditCurveDivide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. 2. In the Type group, select At Knotpoints. Select Curve 3. In the graphics window, select the curve to divide. 4. Select the required Method. is active.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

444

Selecting By Knotpoint Number lets you segment a spline by entering a specific knotpoint number. Knotpoints are numbered in the order specified when the spline is created. For example, if you create a spline using knotpoints indicated by screen position, the first screen position indicated becomes knotpoint number 1; the second screen position becomes knotpoint number 2; and so on. 5. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. Before After

Selected spline First knotpoint Second knotpoint

Resulting splines after the divide curve operation. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed in the graphics window.

e. Divide a curve at corners 1. Click EditCurveDivide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. 2. In the Type group, select At Corners. Select Curve 3. In the graphics window, select the curve to divide. is active.

Note If the selected spline does not have any corners, the curve is automatically deselected and the software displays the following error message: Cannot subdivide - curve has no corners. 4. Select the required Method. Selecting By Corner Number lets you segment a spline by entering a specific corner number. 5. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. Before After

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

445

Selected spline First corner Second corner


f. Divide Curve options

Resulting splines after the divide curve operation. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed in the graphics window.

Type Sets the method by which to divide the curve. Select from the following options: Equal Segments By Bounding Objects Divides a curve into equal segments, using the length of a curve or a specific curve parameter. The curve parameter depends on the type of curve (line, arc, or spline) being segmented. Divides a curve into segments using bounding objects, like points, curves, planes, and/or faces. Divides a curve based on the arc length defined for each segment. Arc Length Segments Note "Arc length" is a mathematical term and should not be confused with "arc," which is an NX object. Arc Length is not only for arcs. Divides a curve using selected knot points. A knot point is the endpoint of a spline segment. Divides a spline at corners, that is, at knot points where there are bends in the spline. At Corners Note If the selected spline does not have any corners, the curve is automatically deselected and the software displays the following error message: Cannot subdivide - curve has no corners.

At Knotpoints

Curve to Divide Lets you select the curve to divide. Select Curve Segments Appears only when the Equal Segments type is selected. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

446

Equal Parameter Segments the selected curve equally, based on the parameter characteristics of the curve. Curve parameters vary with respect to each curve type: Segment Length

If you select a line, the total linear distance between the start and endpoints is divided by the number of segments entered. If you select an arc or an ellipse, the total included angle of the arc is divided by the number of segments entered. If you select a spline, the segments are related to the distance between knot points.

Equal Arc Length Divides the selected curve into separate curves of equal length. Number of Segments Specifies the number of separate curves the original curve is divided into.

Arc Length Segments Appears only when the Arc Length Segments type is selected. Arc Length Divides a curve based on the arc length defined for each segment. Displays the number of full segments created, based on the total length of the curve and the Arc Length input for each segment. Note This is different from the Number of Segments option that appears for the Equal Segments type.

Number of Segments

Displays the length of any remaining portion of the curve after the number of full Partial Length segments created is based on the total length of the curve and the Arc Length input for each segment. Bounding Object Appears only when the By Bounding Objects type is selected. Sets the type of bounding objects you select or specify to divide the curve. Select from the following types:

Object

Existing Curve Lets you select existing curves as bounding objects. Project Point Lets you select a point as the bounding object. 2 Points Lets you select a line between two points as the bounding object. Point and Vector Lets you select a point and a vector as the bounding objects. By Plane Lets you select a plane as the bounding object.

Appears when Existing Curve is the selected Object type. Lets you select curve bounding objects. Select Object Specify Intersection Lets you indicate an approximate intersection point between the bounding object and the curve to be divided.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

447

Lets you select or specify a point as the bounding object when Project Point, Line by 2 Points, or Point and Vector is the selected Object type. Point Constructor Opens the Point Constructor dialog box. Specify Point Specify Point Lets you select a point on the geometry. Lets you specify a vector as the bounding object for the Point and Vector option. Vector Constructor Opens the Vector dialog box. Specify Vector Inferred Vector This is the default vector type. Click to see the vector type list. Select the required vector type from the list, then select objects supported by that vector. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects.

Reverse Direction

Reverses the displayed vector direction.

Lets you select a plane as the bounding object for the By Plane option. Plane Dialog Opens the Plane Method dialog box. Specify Plane Inferred This is the default plane type. Click to see the plane type list. Select the required plane type from the list, then select objects supported by that type. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects.

Knot Points Appears only when the At Knotpoints type is selected. Sets the knot point method. Select form the following options:

Method

By Knot Number: Segments a spline by the specified knot points number Select Knot Point: Lets you select segmentation knot points by indicating a position close to the knot points with the graphic cursor. The knot points are displayed when you select the spline. All Knot Points: Selects all knot points on the spline to segment the curve.

Appears when you select the By Knot Number method. Knot Number Lets you specify the required number of knot points. Appears when you select the Select Knot Point method to let you select the required Select Point knot point using Select Point Corners Appears only when the At Corners type is selected. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5 .

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Sets the corner method. Select from the following options: Method

448

By Corner Number: Segments a spline by the specified corner number(s). Select Corner: Lets you select corners by which to divide the curve. All Corners: Selects all corners on the spline to segment the curve.

Corner Number Select Point

Appears when you select the By Corner Number method. Lets you specify the required number of corners. Appears when you select the Select Corner method to let you select the required knot points using Select Point .

8. Edit Fillet
Edit Fillet lets you edit existing fillets. This option behaves similar to the two-object fillet creation technique. To edit an existing fillet: 1. Select the trim method you wish to use. 2. Select the objects to edit. 3. Define the parameters to use for creating the modified fillet. There are three possible trim methods when you are editing a fillet: automatic trim, manual trim, and no trim. These methods are the same as those used when creating fillets. You must select the objects to be edited in a counterclockwise direction. This ensures that the new fillet is drawn in the proper direction. Warning Failure to select the proper fillet objects may corrupt associated boundaries and crosshatching. The creation parameters of a fillet can be edited using any of the following options: Radius Radius Default New Center Lets you specify a new radius value for the fillet. The value of the radius defaults to the radius of the selected fillet or to the last user specified radius. Toggles between Fillet and Modal. When set to Fillet, the radius value defaults to the fillet radius each time a fillet is edited. If the default is Modal, the radius value remains constant, until a new radius is entered or the radius default is changed to Fillet. Lets you choose whether to specify a new approximate center. If it is set to No, the current fillet arc center is used to start the calculation for the modified fillet.

Note Any associated drafting objects are automatically updated when you change the center and/or radius of the fillet.

9. Stretch Curve
Use this option to move geometric objects, while simultaneously stretching or shrinking selected lines. You can move most object types, but you can only stretch and shrink lines. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

449

Note Stretch Curve works for all object types except sketches, groups, components, bodies, faces and edges. Note Stretch Curve is not applicable for sketch curves. The option is available when a sketch is active so that you can still edit non-sketch curves without having to disable the active sketch. Stretch Dialog Options Delta XC, Delta To use the Delta method, enter delta XC, YC and ZC values. The geometry is moved YC, Delta ZC or stretched by these delta values. Reset Values Resets the three delta buffers to zero. Point to Point Displays the Point Constructor dialog to let you define the reference and destination points. (The Stretch dialog updates the delta XC, YC, and ZC values.) Undo Lets you change the geometry back to a previous state. Basic Stretch Curve Procedure To perform a stretch: 1. Choose Stretch from the Edit Curve dialog. The Stretch dialog is displayed. 2. Select the geometry you wish to stretch, either individually or using a rectangle. 3. Specify the method, Delta or Point to Point, you wish to use to stretch the selected objects Choosing Apply or OK extends or moves the selected geometry from the reference point to the destination point. Geometry that is moved is translated by the delta values, and zero length lines are deleted. If you choose Apply to perform the stretch, the Stretch dialog remains open and all objects remain selected. You can then add new objects and deselect any previously selected, and use Apply again.

If, after you have used Apply, you are not satisfied with the results, choose the Undo button in the Stretch dialog. The objects are repositioned back to their previous locations, or to their locations after the previous Apply. You can use the Undo button repeatedly until all previous Apply operations are rolled back. The objects remain selected as each Undo is entered. Selecting different objects, or choosing Cancel, clears the Undo buffer. If you choose Undo after an OK or Cancel (from the Edit drop-down menu, or the MB3 popup), the geometry rolls back to the condition prior to entering the Stretch function. When you stretch a line endpoint, the following conventions apply:

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

450

Lines that are single-selected are moved if the selection point is near the midpoint of the line. Otherwise, the line endpoint nearest the selection point is extended. Line endpoints that are going to be stretched are highlighted with an asterisk after they are selected. Lines selected with the rectangle method are extended if the rectangle contains only one of the line's endpoints. Otherwise, the line is moved. If a line to be stretched is contiguous to a fillet, the tangency of the fillet to the line may be lost. Lines stretched to a zero length are deleted if the stretch operation is accepted. Associated geometry is adjusted when Update is performed.

Selecting objects using a rectangle operates as described under Robust Selection methods for the Class Selection Tool. You define the rectangle by indicating two diagonal corners. The rectangle must encompass the objects you want to translate, as well as the endpoints of lines you want to stretch. If only a part of an object (except a line) is within the rectangle, the object is not selected.

10.

Curve Length

Use the Curve Length command to extend or trim a curve by a given curve length increment, or to a total curve length. When you select a curve or a string of curves to edit, a preview of the curve is available on the screen. You can edit the input before accepting the results. DesignLogic allows for greater efficiency. Use Trim Curve to adjust the endpoints of curves based on bounding entities and segment(s) of curves selected for trimming. You can use bodies, faces, points, curves, edges, datum planes and datum axes as bounding objects when trimming a curve. Note You cannot trim bodies, sheet bodies or solid bodies.
Where do I find it?

Choose EditCurveLength. On the Edit Curve toolbar, click Curve Length .

a. Create a curve length feature with incremental extension Use this option to extend or trim a curve by a given curve length increment. The curve length increment is the length used to extend or trim from the original curve. The default value is 0.0. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

451

1. Click EditCurveCurve Length to open the Curve Length dialog box. Select Curve is active. 2. Select the curve to extend or trim. 3. Set the Length Option to Incremental. 4. Set the End Option to either Start and End or Symmetric. 5. Choose from the Method option to specify the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed or extended. 6. In the Limits group, enter the required values for the curve length increment in the Start and End fields. You can also change the length by dragging the onscreen handles. The values in the Start and End fields are dynamically updated in the Curve Length dialog box when you drag the handles. Note You can enter either a positive or negative value for the curve length. A positive value generates an extension of the curve. A negative value truncates the curve. The following figure is an example of an incremental curve length feature. 7. Optional. If you do not want associative output, clear the Associative Output check box. 8. Optional. Choose from the available Input Curves options to specify whether you want to Keep, Hide, Delete or Replace the input curves. Note Delete and Replace are available only if you clear the Associative Output check box. 9. Click OK or Apply. An example of extending a curve by its incremental curve length is shown in the figure below.

Incremental curve length using circular direction Original curve selected Start point End point Extended incremental curve length of circular direction from the start point Extended incremental curve length of circular direction from the end point Resulting extended curve

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING b. Create a curve length feature with total extension

452

Use this option to extend or trim a curve by its total curve length. Total curve length is the distance from the start of a curve to the end of the curve, following the exact path of the curve. 1. Click EditCurveCurve Length to open the Curve Length dialog box. Select Curve is active. 2. Select the curve to extend or trim. 3. Set the Length Option to Total. 4. Set the End Option to Start, End or Both. 5. Choose from the Method option to specify the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed or extended. 6. Enter the required curve length value in the Total field. You can also change the length by dragging the onscreen handles. The value in the Total field is dynamically updated in the Curve Length dialog box when you drag the handles 7. Optional. If you do not want associative output, clear the Associative Output check box. 8. Optional. Choose from the available Input Curves options to specify whether you want to Keep, Hide, Delete or Replace the input curves. Note Delete and Replace are available only if you clear the Associative Output check box. 9. Click OK or Apply. An example of extending a curve by its total curve length is shown in the figure below.

Total Curve Length Using Linear Direction Original curve selected Start point Extended curve length of linear direction Resulting extended curve c. Curve Length options Curve Lets you select the curve to trim or extend. Select drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Curve Extension

453

Lets you extend or trim the curve by the selected curve length. Select from the following options:

Length

Incremental Extends or trims a curve by a given curve length increment. The curve length increment is the length used to extend or trim from the original curve. This is the default extension method. Total Extends or trims a curve by its total curve length. Total curve length is the distance from the start of a curve to the end of the curve, following the exact path of the curve.

Lets you trim or extend the curve from the start, end or both directions of the curve. Choose from the following options:

End

Start and End Trims or extends the curve from both its start and end points. This option is available only for the Incremental method. Start Trims or extends the curve from its start point. This option is available only for the Total method. End Trims or extends the curve from its end point. This option is available only for the Total method. Symmetric Trims or extends the curve from either start or end point, at an equal length from both sides.

Note End options are also available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on handles. Lets you select the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed or extended. Choose from the following methods:

Method

Natural Trims or extends the end point of the curve along the natural path of the curve. Linear Trims or extends the end point of the curve along a linear path leading to a tangential extension. Circular Trims or extends the end point of a curve along a circular path.

Note Method options are also available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on handles. Limits Start Lets you specify a value for the length of the trimmed or extended curve at its starting point. Lets you specify a value for the length of the trimmed or extended curve at its end point. End Note Start and End options are available only for the Incremental length option. Lets you specify a total length value by which to extend or trim the curve. Total Note This option is available only for the Total length option. Settings drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Associative

454

Makes the extended or trimmed curve associative when selected. Associative trimmed curves update automatically if the input parameters change. Lets you specify the output options for the selected curves. For associative curves, select from the following options:

Keep Retains the original curve. This is the default output option for an associative curve. Hide Hides the original curve.

Input Curves

If you clear the Associative Output check box, two more output options are available for non-associative curves:

Delete Deletes the original curve. Replace Replaces the original curve. This is the default output option for a nonassociative curve.

Tolerance

Lets you specify the tolerance value used to trim or extend the curve. The default is taken from the tolerance setting in Modeling preferences.

11.

Smooth Spline

Use the Smooth Spline command to remove minor imperfections in a spline by minimizing the curvature magnitude or curvature variation. Note If the selected spline is associative, the Smooth Spline command deletes the defining data and the associated dimensions of the spline. You can:

Smooth manually created splines that have minor imperfections depending on the number and location of picked points. Smooth a B-spline in a specified region or across the entire spline. Knots are inserted at the boundary of the region and within the region until there are enough free control points to reduce the variation to the desired levels. Repeated use of this command on a spline makes it increasingly linear.

As you smooth a spline, the deviation between the original spline and the resulting spline is displayed at the location of the maximum deviation.

Original spline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Smoothed spline Where do I find it? Application Modeling, Shape Studio Toolbar Menu Edit CurveSmooth Spline EditCurveSmooth Spline

455

a. Smooth a spline 1. On the Edit Curve toolbar, click Smooth Spline , or choose EditCurveSmooth Spline. 2. In the Smooth Spline dialog box, set the Type list to Curvature. The Select Curve option is active in the Curve to Smooth group.

3. In the graphics window, select the spline you want to smooth. If the selected spline is associative, a warning message is displayed. Click OK to continue.

Start location End location Selected B-spline with arrow indicating the maximum deviation value and location 4. In the Smooth Limits group, drag the %Start and %End sliders, or enter values in the boxes to define the section you want smoothed.

5. Modified start and end locations 6. (Optional) Under Constraints, select the level of constraint you want for the start and end of the B-spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

456

7. In the Smoothing Factor group, drag the slider to specify the number of times the smoothing operation is to be performed each time you click Apply. 8. In the Modification Percentage group, drag the slider to specify the level of overall smoothing you want for the B-spline. The shape of the spline updates, and the maximum deviation from the original curve, indicated with an arrow, is displayed in the graphics window. As you make additional changes to the smoothing parameters, the maximum deviation updates dynamically. 9. Click Apply to smooth the B-spline. You can continue to change the smoothing factor and modification percentage values until you get the required shape. Click Apply after each change to view the updates in the graphics window.

Original spline Modified spline after changing the smoothing factor and modification percentage 10. When you get the required shape, click OK to smooth the B-spline and close the dialog box.

Original spline Smoothed spline b. Smooth Spline options Type Type list Lets you specify the type of algorithm you want to use to smooth the B-spline. Available drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING options are:


457

Curvature Smoothes a B-spline by minimizing its curvature magnitude. Curvature Variation Smoothes a B-spline by minimizing its curvature variation.

Curve to Smooth Lets you specify the curves to smooth. Select Curve Smoothing Limits Specifies the smoothing limits for either a partial spline or the entire spline. Handles are placed on the selected spline, one at the start of the spline and one at the end. If you smooth a portion of a spline that does not have sufficient degrees of freedom for the smoothing process, knot points are inserted, causing the spline to have more segments. Specifies the start location. %Start You can drag the %Start slider, or enter a start percentage value in the box. Specifies the end location. %End You can drag the %End slider, or enter a start percentage value in the box. Constraints Lets you to constrain either end of the spline you are modifying. Select the boundary constraints from the list of available options. Continuity constraints are used to lock the position of the appropriate poles so they are not free to move during smoothing. Continuity constraints take precedence over smoothing. For example, when smoothing splines of a lower degree while using continuity constraints, there may be insufficient freedom of movement to perform the operation. Smoothing Factor Specifies the number of times to carry out the smoothing operation each time you click Apply. Drag the Smoothing Factor slider to the number you want. Micro-positioning is on by default with this slider. To disengage it, press the Ctrl key. Modification Percentage Changes the percentage of overall smoothing that is applied to the selected spline as you drag the slider. The spline updates dynamically in the graphics window. Slider The goal of this option is to provide access to a series of steps between the starting and ending conditions of the smoothing operation. This option can be useful to balance the smoothness of a spline object against its deviation drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

Start, End

Slider

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

458

to a scanned image or other specification data. Zero percent causes no change to the original curve. One hundred percent provides the maximum smoothing that can be achieved. Micro-positioning is on by default with this slider. To disengage it, press the Ctrl key. Results Maximum Deviation Shows the deviation between the original spline and the resulting spline.

12.

Shape by Template

Use the Shape by Template command to transform a spline from its current shape to match the shape characteristics of a template spline, while preserving the start and end points of the original spline. You can:

Dynamically shape the spline using the slider. Apply the shape changes to the selected spline or a copy of the selected spline. Use the shaping options to determine the degree or segmentation of the resultant spline. You can either match the degree or segmentation of the template with the original spline, or modify the properties of the original spline.

The template spline affects the degree, segmentation, peaks, inflection, and acceleration of the original spline.

Original spline to shape Template spline Original spline and the corresponding surface modified using the template spline Where do I find it? Application Modeling, Shape Studio, and all other applications that support curve commands Toolbar Edit CurveShape by Template Menu EditCurveShape by Template a. Modify a spline using a template spline This example shows how to modify the shape of an existing spline using a template spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING 1. On the Edit Curve toolbar, click Shape by Template Template. Spline to shape is active.

459 , or choose EditCurveShape by

2. Set the following output parameters: o Select the Refit Curve check box to match the degree and segmentation of the spline to shape with the template spline. o Clear the Edit a Copy check box, to modify the original spline. 3. In the graphics window, select the spline to shape.

As you select the splines to shape, temporary arrows are displayed at the point nearest to the selection. The arrow indicates the start direction for the shape operation. You can change the direction of an individual spline to shape by deselecting it (Shift+MB2), and then selecting it on the end you want as the start point. 4. Click the middle mouse button to advance to the Template Spline 5. In the graphics window, select the template spline. selection step.

When you select the template spline, an arrow is displayed at the point nearest to the selection, and the word "Template" appears next to it. You can change the direction of the start point by first deselecting the template spline (Shift+MB2), and then selecting a point on the spline that is nearest to the end you want as the start point. 6. Drag the slider to change the shape of the spline while retaining both its start and end points and the characteristics of the template spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING

460

7. (Optional) Click Deviation Analysis to check the deviation as you edit the spline to shape.

8. When you specify the template spline, the spline to shape adopts its characteristics. You can: o Click OK to make the change to the spline to shape permanent, and exit the dialog box. o Click Apply to make the change to the spline to shape permanent. The template spline remains selected, and you can select other splines to shape using the current template. 9. Click OK to finalize the changes made to the spline to shape.

b. Shape by Template options Option Selection Steps Description Spline to shape Lets you select the splines you want to shape. Template Spline Lets you select a spline to act as the template to change the original spline. Note You can select only one spline as the template spline. Slider Lets you dynamically change the Spline to shape.

As you drag the slider all the possible curves between the start and end point that match the template spline's shape characteristics are displayed. The original spline and the altered shape are simultaneously displayed in the graphics window. Refit Curve Forces the spline to shape to match the degree and segmentation of the template spline. Edit a Copy Keeps the original spline unchanged, and edits a copy. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5

[NX8 HELP] MODELING Deviation Analysis

461

Opens the Deviation Gauge dialog box, to dynamically generate graphics and numeric deviation data. This can be useful as you edit the Spline to shape.

c. Shape by Template Deviation Analysis When you click Deviation Analysis, the Deviation Gauge dialog box opens. You can make adjustments to the selected spline. However, the object selection option is not enabled. If you edit multiple curves simultaneously, the Deviation Gauge dialog box settings are applied to all selected splines. The Deviation Gauge command works differently when accessed from the Shape by Template dialog box. When accessed directly, the Deviation Gauge command automatically creates a deviation gauge object superimposed onto the selected objects. The deviation gauge object remains on the display and is saved with the part file. When the Deviation Gauge command is accessed from the Shape by Template dialog box, the deviation gauge object is temporarily created between the animated spline to shape and its original shape. The Deviation Gauge object is deleted when you complete the shape by template operation and click OK or Apply. d. Shape by Template Refit Curve When the Refit Curve check box is selected the degree and segmentation of the spline to shape are forced to match the degree and segmentation of the template spline. The spline to shape keeps its original degree and segments in the following conditions:

The template has a higher degree, in which case the spline to shape has its degree increased to the degree of the template spline. The template spline has knots that are not in the spline to shape. In this case, the template spline knots are inserted into the spline to shape, thus creating additional segments.

When the Refit Curve check box is not selected the spline keeps its original shape characteristics, plus any change in degree and segments required by the template spline. This can result in the new spline possibly having a higher degree or a higher number of segments than the original spline.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 11 5